Lee Harris om inträdet till 2012
120107http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pJJ_AM5C4ns
Kopiera länken ovan och ta del av ett fantastiskt vackert och tidsenligt meddelande om inträdet till 2012 av Lee Harris.
God Jul och Gott Nytt År
111224Hej Vänner!
Stort tack till Er alla för det gångna året!
Jag önskar Er en riktigt God Jul och Gott Nytt År 2012.
Varma hälsningar
Eeva-Kaarina
Kiesha, Little Grandmother, News
111214My beautiful Tribe of Many Colors,
At the close of this monumental year here on planet earth, I wish to address you, the children of Mother Earth, the Great I Am, those who have chosen to be here at this time. As you know, we stand on the threshold of a great new beginning, a time to stand together in our strengths and our love, setting aside our petty differences and our old ways of ego and judgments to make the shift from mind into the heart.
We all are aware of the negativity and fear that surrounds the upcoming date of December 21, 2012, but let me remind you that it is us, those living here on the earth at this time, that create our now and our future. We are the great creators of our lives! Our thoughts, followed by our emotion, create our reality, so it is for all life that exists. This is the great law of life. Let us not give our thoughts, feelings and emotions to fear, for this is what we will create. Think for a moment how the world views 2012, how the world portrays the "end of the world" in the media. All over the world the people of planet earth are consciously and unconsciously feeding fear of the unknown and this date in an unprecedented way. Never before has the entire world’s population been so fixed on a single date surrounded by fear, chaos and destruction. Because thought followed by emotion creates our reality, ask yourself what kind of awful monster are we creating?
It is my heart’s wish that we can all step into our knowing, the knowing that is there waiting for us to take hold of it and propel us into a brighter future. Let us realize how extraordinary and unique each of us are, and that each and every one of us chose to come here to live this life at this time. We knew it wouldn't be easy, but that we had the strength and the love to create a more magnificent way of living. Too often we set our attention on that which is negative, so many are worried about what is around the corner for us in the next year. First, let me remind you that the "other side" views time and space much differently than we do here on Earth. Secondly, we have free will and choice and each day’s actions create a different tomorrow. Because of these two factors, I do not believe anyone’s predictions about specific dates. God, angel, saint or spirit alike cannot give us a specific date or time for any event. This being said, let us fill our hearts with bliss and excitement knowing that it is US, we are the ones that determine our tomorrow and what that will look like!
This last year has been difficult for many of us. The amount of energy coming to our planet now exceeds anything we have ever experienced before. Energy and life itself has been sped up! Many of us are experiencing significant changes in our personal, professional, spiritual and public lives. This is because, as Grandfather Eesawu taught, in the days of great change we will each go through being put into the great sieve and shaken up, letting everything that does not support your highest self and greatest good fall away. Not one of us can escape this. We each are struggling as our lives are changing. Do not give into the sorrow of this, but instead be reminded that as we see lovers, partners, friends and family move on or leave, as our jobs are changing and our living situations are being shifted, we are letting go of things that have held us back or kept us from shining our brightest. We must be our brightest selves to stand in the highest love and light, to venture upon this new life offered us. Let us not focus on the negative things happening today, but seek out those beautiful and exciting things that are taking place. Sadly, our media does not feed the public exciting, reassuring, positive and uplifting information and inspiration, rather the mainstream media keeps us in fear and uncertainty. In fact, many beautiful things have taken place in the last several months. I have been blessed to take part in or witness many of these miraculous things.
In the last year, I was able to meet with the beautiful Aboriginal people of Australia who took me to the "nameless place". After walking a great distance in the woodlands, we came to a large mound of huge stones stacked one on top of another. Following "Auntie Lila", we soon came to a cavern where, stretched out in-front of us on all sides of a huge stone, were ancient Egyptian hieroglyphs! There were hundreds, if not thousands, of these hieroglyphs, telling the story of two sons of the pharaoh and their ocean fairing crew, who went to Australia to talk to their brothers and sisters of the Great Mother. They speak about the star beings that brought knowledge and life. I also saw a chamber that contained an untouched tomb where the Egyptian pharaoh’s son was buried after dying from a fatal bite by a poisonous snake. This wonderful time spent with the Aboriginal elders was full of amazing information, teachings and prayers, but was also just the beginning for all that I would learn in the coming months about our ancestors.
It is a mainstream belief that we human beings have been evolving for centuries from mindless, barbaric cavemen, but as we uncover more and more about who our real ancestors are and all that they knew, we can begin coloring a completely different picture. In learning more about our ancient ancestors, we start to understand that history is not the evolution of technology, but rather the evolution of thought by the masses, which brings us back to, "thought with great emotion and belief creates your reality".
It is so thrilling we have the chance to live during these amazing and transformative times, where we are unearthing some of the most history-changing evidence about who we really are and where we came from. Just as I stood in awe looking at ancient Egyptian hieroglyphs in Australia, that some believe to be carbon dated before humans were capable of crossing the ocean in ships, I again found myself spellbound time and time again while teaching in Egypt recently. My wife Joyce and I, along with a group of 30, were blessed to experience two weeks within the many different temples and ancient structures, from Cairo to Luxor through the Nubian Desert, and down the Nile River. Everywhere we went, we were left with a sense of great awe. From the hieroglyphs depicting armored tanks, helicopters and airplanes, to walls covered in carvings of fully-functioning light bulbs, the flower of life, surgeries performed with crystals, human bodies with animal heads, and the full depiction of how the process was done. We saw huge monolithic temples that once were capped with gold and used as conductors of great amounts of energy to the great pharaoh Akhenaten and his family, who were depicted with elongated skulls, low hips and bellies, very long arms and almond shaped eyes. If you are interested, there are many photos posted on my website from our visit to Egypt.
There was so much to learn there, and at the same time, so frustrating that the archeologists could not or would not share with us the answers to so many of our questions. One could experience a life time there, and not be able to truly fathom the knowledge that our ancient ancestors possessed. I think everyone from the Egypt conference would agree that we would have loved to have stayed longer. We became like a little family!
This last year has produced some of the greatest discoveries ever made in human history, One of those discoveries, with the aid of Google Earth, has been that over 17 new temples and 1000 new tombs have been discovered in Egypt, just waiting to be uncovered and their secrets unearthed. In fact, new temples are being discovered all over the world, including nine in Bosnia, Illinois, Greece, Italy, Sicily, Spain, over 300 in China, Russia and Utah. Temples and ancient civilizations are being found as well, a couple of the most exciting is the pre-Incan Temple found at the bottom of Lake Titicaca between Bolivia and Peru, and the underwater temples in the eastern China Sea dating back 5000 years older than the Egyptian pyramids. An ancient civilization was also found in South Africa, dating somewhere around 200,000 BC, containing many gold mines and very accurate calendars, using stone circles and maps of the stars.
The Smithsonian has also published the findings of several gigantic skeletons from the areas of West Virginia, Toledo, Ohio and Louisiana as well as Rancho, California, ranging from 7 to 12 feet in height. These giant human remains have also been found in Sweden and Mexico, along with many locations in North America. We do not know why this information is finally being released to the public, but it is exciting to know that, as promised by our indigenous elders, at the time of the great change, humanity would come to know vast amounts of knowledge about who they are and where they come from, and the mysteries of human kind and their mother earth would be given back to her children. It is exciting to learn of these real and scientifically documented findings, and to know that these are not just someone’s idea of a good trick, but are real bones and teeth belonging to ancient humans. In some cases, like in New South Wales and Bathurst, Australia, axes, chisels, and other tools weighing up to 25 pounds each and petrified human molars estimate the humans to have been 10 to 12 feet tall. In Ireland, an entire mummified man who would have stood over 12 feet tall was discovered in the county of Antrim.
The location of the great library of Alexandria has also been discovered, as well as an accurate 4th century map, devoid of ice and inhabited Antarctica, on animal hides once belonging to the library of Constantinople and now housed in the Ottaman library.
So much is yet to be understood about our past, our ancestors and who they really were. We human beings were capable of doing things we once thought impossible and yet the evidence is being uncovered a little at a time. Our indigenous elders have taught for centuries that the mysteries and knowledge would be given to those who inhabit the earth at the time of the great shift, and the knowledge would be given to those who would remember who they were and stand in their hearts again, bringing forward a new age of knowing, of great wisdom and love. We are those people. We are the Ones we have been waiting for, and we are the Ones who can change the world we live in. Not because we found a few giant’s bones and not because we found Egyptian hieroglyphs in different parts of the world, but because we are the ones who will change history by once again knowing the keys to life just as our ancestors once did. We will remember that our thoughts, along with our emotions, create our reality. We do not have to live our lives like a bunch of sheep following the herdsman. We can believe in ourselves again, knowing that we are gods and goddesses, the Great I Am, demanding more out of life than just going with the flow. It is time for us, as humans, to come together and stop separating ourselves because of our differences, and to instead unite as one--Humanity, along with Mother Earth as our shared mother. We know that love is the highest vibration on the planet, and that love and light are the source, the source of God and Goddess, the source of all life and creation and that love and light exists within each and every one of us. A new day is dawning on Planet Earth. Time and motion are speeding up, and it is time for human beings to take a giant leap into a new way of being, a new way of living, the way of the heart. Love is the answer, for the more loving we are the more enlightened we become. It is time for us to understand who we are, where we come from, who our ancestors really were and what they were capable of. There truly is no time to waste by being scared or full of fear about the future, but to understand that we create our future.
We once knew the keys to love and life. Humans knew how to live in harmony with the Great Mother, our indigenous cultures teach us that many civilizations went inside the earth to live. This year, an indigenous tribe was found living within great cave systems in the rain forests of South America, where they use crystals for light, for growing their crops and to heal the sick. There is evidence in many of these newly discovered civilizations that crystals are used in one way or the other in ever single one of them. Crystal can be found in every ancient pyramid and temple. How is it now that we know so very little about these amazing stones? We are finding that ancient peoples traveled the world all the time. Just a few months ago, one of the Egyptian mummies was found to have South American cocoa leaves in his intestines, a single cave in Illinois was found to hold a library of stone and gold tablets from the first millennium, figurines and drawings of Sobek- Ra, identical to the god in the temples along the Nile River. It also housed Sumerian artifacts, Egyptian, Greek, Roman, Meso American, Hebrew and even Ecuadorian artifacts. With increasing frequency, these discoveries are being made, proving that humans once had a richer knowledge than we thought possible.
We are indeed living in an amazing time on the planet. This is truly a time to celebrate! We are living in the middle of a pole shift, and in a time when it is said Mother Earth will be reborn, renewed, and that human kind will have the chance to make a leap forward in our consciousness and oneness. But this is up to us. We are the ones who have to stop living in the old ways of mind and ego, fear and unwillingness and start to live from the hearts. Simply put, the more loving you are the more intelligent you become. As human beings start to shift into the consciousness of love, more and more incredible knowledge will be given to us, and we can move into enlightenment and unity on our planet.
The poles are shifting, my dear brothers and sisters. Mother is going through a great change and the energies are very high and will continue to heighten. It is sometimes difficult to stay grounded and positive when we see so much change around us and in our personal lives, but this is exactly what we must do. Focus on the good and the exciting things about life, and not on the fearful things. Being in the heart and loving is what will not only make life easier on a day to day basis, but it’s what will change the consciousness for us all. If we are to be reborn along with our planet, we must live from the heart. The only way to do this is Be Love. Do not give into the unknown and the fear that surrounds it, but instead be excited about this amazing time, this time in which we have the chance to change the future, to create a better world to live in, a time when hidden knowledge will be given to the children of earth and we can walk forward together hand in hand as a family of all shapes and sizes, all colors and backgrounds, into enlightenment.
I will continue to do all that I can to bring the Tribe of Many Colors together, sharing with all those who will listen, to remember. Remember who you are, how great you are and that you have the answers inside of yourself. Remember that you create your reality, that we are all perfect as we are, brothers and sisters of all colors and walks of life, that we must come together in love to create a more beautiful tomorrow.
I will be in Sedona, Arizona on the 3rd and 4th of this month then it’s off to Annecy, France for a talk and workshop on February 8, 2012. I have been so incredibly busy but I’m not complaining! When I am busy, it means that there are many who want to hear how love can change the world and that is always a great thing! And finally the book is finished!! Wow! I had no idea how much work it would take to write and publish a book, but now, with a great exhale and a smile, I can say that it’s ready. You can find it either on Amazon.com or on my website, www.LittleGrandmother.net
I love you all and am so grateful to be living on this planet along with you.
Love, Kiesha Little Grandmother
Webcast with Sri Bhagavan for Scandinavia, Dec 11th, 2011
111213Webcast Darshan with Sri Bhagavan for Scandinavia, from Dec 11th, 2011
Over 400 Oneness Trainers and Deeksha Givers in several locations gathered to take live skype Darshan with Sri Bhagavan.
Videolink: http://youtu.be/Xny407_ruvY
Transcript:
Dear Bhagavan, do you have any news for us for 2012?
Yes, we have some news. 29th of january, we would be introducing a new kind of deeksha. This deeksha would be enormously powerful. People should be able to move into awakened states quite easily and repeatedly taking these deekshas, should very naturally lead to awakening too. Besides that, in the month of March, there'll be special deekshas at the temple, which will help people to move into awakened states very fast and to become awakened.
Also, from March onwards, awakened people will gather in the temple to meditate for the sake of the world. Only awakened people will be allowed into the temple on that day and they would gather and they would meditate with Amma and Bhagavan for the transformation of the world.
So that's the news for you for 2012.
Bhagavan, if awakening can only happen through Grace, what is the main obstacle that makes the deeksha not able to cause this neurobiological shift in someone?
There are two things involved here, one is the individual's readiness and preparation, the other is the power of the deeksha. In the inital stages, the power of the deeksha was not enough, so people had to work harder. But as we are approaching 2012, people do not have to work that hard, because the power of the deeksha becomes much, much greater. So, in 2012, you'll see people making it more easily, because of the enormous power of the deeksha. The deeksha has taken over 23 years to come to this level.
To get an awakening; how much work or responsibility lies on the individual and how much work and responsibility is on AmmaBhagavan? Can you please tell us in percentage, Bhagavan?
We can not talk about this in terms of percentages, because in the initial stages, you've got to do more work and AmmaBhagavan could do only a little. But as time progresses, more and more work is done by AmmaBhagavan and less and less by you. So in 2012, we could roughly say, that 90% will depend on AmmaBhagavan and 10% on you. It's a varying thing.
Bhagavan, can you please explain the difference between awakened states and being awakened?
They are very different. Awakened states come and go, like waves in the ocean they keep coming and they keep going. And in the awakened state you could still get hurt, still there could be pain and you are very much there, even though you are in an awakened state. To be awakened is to be in a permanent state, a state where you are no longer there. You have clearly realized that there is nobody there to become awakened and you are gone. And you do not get hurt, you do not get pain, it's a very different state. So the awakened state is very different from what we call the Awakened One.
How can one remain in an awakened state at work? When I am with others, I find it difficult to keep the peace I can feel at home when I am by myself.
When you are truly in an awakened state, it does not matter where you are, whether you are alone or in a crowd, whether you are at work or at home. But if the awakened state is very weak, then certainly you would be more comfortable staying at home.
Dear Sri Bhagavan, sometimes people think when you are awakened you should be only happy, can you please speak about that, Bhagavan?
When you are in an awakened state, you may be happy, you may not be happy, but once you are Awakened, which is very different from being in an awakened state, you are always happy. For the simple reason, you are not there. When you are not there, what is there is only consciousness and the nature of consciousness is joy and happiness.
Beloved Bhagavan, when I take deeksha from my Padukas I always, since a month, try to anchor a state of absolute freedom, an earlier transcendental experience of mine, in the Padukas. And now I clearly feel that this transcendental consciousness expands a bit for every time I take deeksha from the Padukas.
Dear Bhagavan, is this something to go on with and will you please comment on this, Bhagavan?
You do not have to do this forever. You have to do this only until your state has become sufficiently deep and permanent. Once permanency is achieved, you need no longer do this process.
Bhagavan, it seems to me that those who are having the deepest experiences from Deeksha are those who have been on a spiritual path for many years and have worked a lot on themselves and their charges. Is Deeksha more like the final push after doing all these preparations? Is it really possible for ordinary people, who have not been on spiritual paths or done years of work on themselves and their charges, to become awakened through deeksha?
The real thing that matters here is your past lives. If we were to take into account what you have done in this life, there is no way you could get awakened. Actually, all of you are great seekers who have worked through hundreds of lives and through thousands of years. It's the past which matters, your past lives, so from that point of view you are well prepared.
What was required was the deeksha power to push you. The deeksha power has been growing ever since 1989 and it reaches a peak in 2012, therefore it will be able to push you to the other side. But you have done your work, but not in this life, but in past lives.
I have a deep desire to stay in touch with my inner divinity in stressful situations. For example, when I have to concentrate mentally at work or when conflicts arise. Is there anything that I can do to keep in touch with you in these situations, Bhagavan?
It is most important that you are in touch with the inner divine in difficult circumstances. And for that to happen you must build a great bond between you and the Antaryamin. If that happens, the more stressful the situation, the more easily you'll be able to connect. And if you could connect to the Divine, everything's taken care of.
What criteria should be met in order to be one of the 8000 people that will sit in the temple and meditate for the future of humanity?
To sit along with 8000 people and meditate with AmmaBhagavan for the welfare of mankind, you have got to be awakened.
Beloved Bhagavan, there seems to be a lack of commitment and desire to give the deeksha and to initiate new deeksha givers in some parts of Denmark. Can you please give us a blessing for Denmark, Bhagavan, so that we work towards Oneness?
Yes, I'll give a strong Blessing for Denmark.
Dear Bhagavan, I feel only emptiness inside, without any expectations. What comes next? I don´t even have a goal in my thoughts anymore. Please, can you give me an explanation as to what is happening to me, Bhagavan?
You're getting very close to being awakened.
Dear Sri Bhagavan, what can we Norwegians do to spiritually activate the Norwegian people? Would it be advisable to give deeksha to the map of Norway, every time the trainers and blessing givers meet, Bhagavan? Please give a blessing for Norway, Bhagavan.
It will work in a very powerful way to give a deeksha to the map of Norway. I'll also bless Norway.
Sri Bhagavan Africa message 11/11/11
111113Sri Bhagavan Africa message 11/11/11
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=M8NqFj_ZQ2Q
Namaste.
Humanity is entering the most pivotal phase of its existence. The coming times shall witness the most novel and undreamt of changes in the course of its long evolution. The human race as a distinct coherent unit has passed through various evolutionary stages and is now approaching its long awaited coming of age.
With the scientific and technological advances arising out of the ingenuity of mankind, man has progressed greatly in the material world. His inventions have made his worldly life more comfortable. Yet he is unhappy. In spite of all these advancements and inventions, man is still lost. His inability to drive out the looming specter of war, the threatened collapse of the international economic order, the spread of anarchy and terrorism has landed him in a no-man's land.
Today, aggression and conflict characterize our social, economic and religious systems. This is because he has hardly progressed in the inner world. In his mad rush towards material happiness he has lost sight of the source of his sorrow, the chaos inside. Not recognizing the emptiness within, he indulges in various pursuits, all of which essentially serve to keep him busy in an attempt to run away from that emptiness.
This can be seen by observing his constant attempts to set new goals to be pursued and from his ceaseless quest for recognition in society. The consequence of this escapism is added mental stress during the conflict within the family, within society and finally to global conflict.
Life is a movement. It sways between order and disorder, arising and ceasing. In the natural course of events, as order moves toward disorder it would move you away from Oneness towards division. In a family whenever there is hurt and mistrust it's a movement away from Oneness. A healing of the heart, the flowering of love is a way to return to Oneness.
As conscious beings, you could use the power of the deeksha to cause this flow to move back from division into Oneness, to erect a social system which is progressive and peaceful, dynamic and harmonious, a system giving free play to individual creativity and initiative, but based on cooperation and reciprocity.
When there is disorder in the family, in the comity of nations and the varied forms of life, the return to Oneness within is possible. It is attainable through the acceptance of life and the experience of oneself without resistance and there is some opportunity to raise life to a level of order and Oneness.
When the Oneness phenomenon began we received several revelations. These revelations pointed to an awakening in Africa leading to global change. The revelations showed that there would be a quickening of awakening across the planet starting with 2012. All one needs to be is a seeker with passion, one who is concerned about humanity and the suffering of all life.
Those who have the passion within are the ones that would quickly get awakened. Once transformed, their very presence, their increased levels of awareness would naturally help others to move into higher levels of consciousness.
Chaos is always a precursor to a change in consciousness and we are certainly at a time of chaos. Remember, therefore that every challenge comes in the form of disorder and division. It is beckoning us towards a greater level of order and Oneness. Since psychologically we are inseparable from the rest of humanity, every individual who awakens to Oneness automatically impacts several thousands of beings, helping them grow towards a greater experience of reality and to discover newer ways of living and loving. You create a better planet for the present and the future.
Namaste.
AmmaBhagwan Darshan GLOBAL AFRICA UBUNTU Deeksha
The Mayan Calendar has come to an End
111108The Mayan Calendar has come to an End
The Mayan calendar has come to an end. This means that the universe has attained its highest possible quantum state as of October 28, 2011. In mythological language, Bolon Yokte Kuh, the nine-support-god, and especially the unity consciousness of the ninth wave has been strongly experienced by a certain number of people. Many now typically report that they experience a flattening of time, an end to time acceleration and as a result a great calmness. The end to the acceleration of time is even experienced as a deceleration and some have reached so deep into their own presence that the term “future’’ is starting to loose its previous meaning. The future is no longer a place to get to. With the completion of the Ninth wave we potentially already have direct access to all the guidance we need. This shifted experience of time all seems understandable given that was has happened is that the directed nine evolutionary processes from seed to mature have now been completed. For those that have a conscious relationship to the tree of life the new experience of time will continue to deepen also after this shift. As we know from all previous experience of the shifting energies of the Mayan calendar it always takes time until their external manifestations become visible.
A good thing about the end to the Mayan calendar is that the world did not also come to an end on October 28, 2011. We now have reasons once and for all to throw out the notion that an end to the world was somehow scripted by the Mayan calendar. This should also go for many of the sometimes crazy disaster scenarios that were suggested under the influence of the high frequency of the Ninth wave when it was sometimes hard to keep the balance. The Mayan calendar is primarily about changes in the human beings themselves and everything else is secondary.
Unfortunately, the October 28 date was sometimes popularized as if the whole transformation would occur on this very date and some big media came to talk about it as another end of the world date. For some, the absence of a catastrophic scenario have then led them to question whether the calendar has actually come to an end, which shows to what extent many have become addicted to Hollywood’s view of the world. As I see it however we are now, as of October 29, 2011 entering an era where the future is no longer scripted and what happens will be entirely up to the human beings. This is a situation that has never existed before as up to this point the evolution of the universe has been guided by nine directed waves. For those following my work it should thus have been clear that whatever would happen on October 28, 2011 would have been the result of the processes of the nine waves leading up to this date.
There is also always reason to expect inertia, and hence delay, at such a shift. To exemplify the delay of manifestation we may for instance take the beginning of the seventh day of the Galactic Underworld on November 3, 2010, which many were celebrating as a day of balancing male and female and an end to dominance. It then took several months after shifts until it more tangibly manifested in the revolutions in Tunisia and Egypt. According to most standards “nothing” happened on the dates of either the Harmonic Convergence of August 16-17, 1987 or the Conscious Convergence of July 17-18, 2010 and so if indeed something happened in or around October 28, 2011, which I will return to below, it would be truly remarkable and a first in this regard.
Because people had different expectations, which did not always manifest, and also sometimes to confuse people, there has been a range of different forms of criticism or questions asked from me. Many advocating the December 21. 2012 end date have written critical articles usually with the essence that I am not an orthodox enough Mayanist. Maybe so, I am a person who honors truth more than tradition, and for this reason I am probably also the only person in modern times to have suggested a solution to the Mayan calendar. Thus, when people who see themselves as Mayanists or Mayan calendar experts have criticized my work they have done so without answering the relevant questions themselves. I then see little reason to respond to criticisms from people that claim to be authorities, but in fact have presented no alternative solutions. (The absurd notion that October 28, 2011 did not mark a cycle end has even been put forth as if this were not even a 13 Ahau date). It is not a solution to the Mayan calendar to say that there is another end date or that something will happen in the sky on such a date. A solution to the Mayan calendar requires a theory of how its shift points drives the evolution of the universe including human civilization. As Einstein once said, “Problems cannot be solved by the same level of thinking that created them,” and this goes for the meaning of the Mayan calendar as well.
Yet, some questions have been raised by people more broadly that need to be taken more seriously. The general prediction I expressed ten years ago in The Mayan Calendar and the Transformation of Consciousness in 2001-2002 that by the end of the calendar we would be enlightened might have been overly optimistic. This was partly of course for rhetoric reasons since I did not want to constantly repeat qualifications and possible alternative negative scenarios when after all I did know that the overall direction that the universe was heading for was unity consciousness. Moreover, it would have been a superhuman task to be able at that point in time to see exactly what the world would look like as the calendar came to an end in 2011. Not everyone who more recently has taken an interest in the Mayan calendar may realize that at the time of writing my first books the impending onset of the Galactic and Universal Underworlds represented something entirely new in the creation of the universe and the human collective: Never before had the duration of a wave been shorter than a human life-time. What this meant is that the majority of people living in 2011 would not actually have been born into the highest waves, the eighth and ninth, that had influenced the minds of humanity and the power of a wave to influence those that had not been born into it was unknown.
It was in fact clear to me already then that a large segment of humanity that had been born into the materialist Seventh wave was so shut off from spiritual experiences that they were not responsive to waves which carried a spiritual light. It was then also possible that they would resist the changes to come as those could be understood from the Mayan calendar leading up to 2011. People that have been born into the eighth wave starting in 1999 are in fact today not yet teenagers and those born into the ninth wave have not yet learned to talk. Even if you generously include people that were born into the pre-wave (starting in 1986) of the Galactic Underworld they would still be less than 25 years old and outside of all major decision making that has shaped the course of our civilization since.
Yet, there obviously also is a group who has taken an interest in the Mayan calendar and the spiritual fate of humanity even though it has not been born into the eighth or ninth waves. This group is however clearly a minority in comparison to the mainstream of people above 25 years of age, a minority that has become sensitive to the energy changes and drawn to a world of oneness because of some special experiences they might have had or personal choices they have made to practice yoga, meditation or deeksha, etc. The existence of such a group, that I belong to myself, does not change the fact that society is still run by a mainstream that was shaped by the materialist Seventh wave. Thus, even if unity consciousness now with the Ninth wave exists as a cosmic imprint most of those born into the Seventh wave will not take part in the creation of a new world unless they feel compelled to do so through the breakdown of the old. It would naturally have been nice if the universe would have taken humanity to a more advanced place as the Mayan calendar came to an end, but as it turns out it did not. I do believe however that it now has provided us with all the necessary tools for our transformation and now everything will be up to the human beings themselves.
With this background to the current situation I would like to start the discussion about what objectively happened as the Mayan calendar came to an end. On my blog at the Mayan Calendar Portal I made the prediction that the end of the Mayan calendar would mean the collapse of duality-based civilization (in fact the end of authority) and its transcendence by unity consciousness. Did this happen? I think to address this question we have to look especially at what happened along the 12 longitude East because this is the line along which duality was first established with the Sixth wave (Long Count). Thus, if duality would be transcended it is along this line, created by the Tree of Life, that we would first see the effects of this before they would spread from to both the East and the West. This is a critical point to understand. Some people have been following the Mayan calendar as a means of following a tradition and others may have been following it as an intellectual or mental structure. Yet, without a personal relationship with the Tree of Life – or the Heart of the Heavens¬¬ – and the various lines along which this creates duality and unity on our planet I do not think that it is possible to actually experience the energies of the Mayan calendar and so understand the reality it describes.
Looking then at the 12th longitude East a very notable thing at the end of the calendar was the fall of the regime of Mouammar Kadhafi, a dictator and supposedly the world’s richest man. The war in Libya had started on the first day of the Ninth wave and followed a classical seed to mature fruit process as it was completed with the final downfall of the regime in its seventh day. The reason that this process was so strictly aligned with the Ninth wave is that it manifested on the line along which duality was initially introduced and where it is now being transcended. Tripolis is located exactly on the 12th longitude and a new government was introduced there on October 31 (three days after the end of the Mayan calendar). The end to this war and the downfall of the oppressive regime has helped clear this critical line for the evolution of humanity.
Shortly before the end of the calendar there was also an intense activity to avoid a collapse of the world’s financial system in the form of the acceptance of an aid/austerity package to Greece on October 27 (The European Union is the world’s largest economy and its central nation is after all Germany, whose capital Berlin is on the planetary midline). The Greek drama was however reactivated with the idea of a referendum proposed on October 31 but later retracted. As it now looks a global economic collapse will instead be precipitated in a relatively short time by Italy (under the midline) an economy of a size that cannot be saved by other EU members. The edge of the knife upon which the future of the world’s economy is balancing has thus shifted to the midline, where its fate will be linked to that of Silvio Berlusconi, a clear representative of male sexist dominance.
Thus, the transcendence of duality may not look exactly as I, or anybody else, had envisioned it. The collapse of the world’s economy will likely be very troublesome to many of us, but as I have written before the current financial system is not consistent with the unity consciousness that has now been brought by the Ninth wave. The most important practical steps in the direction of unity consciousness would probably have to be taken in the economic arena. Unity consciousness is not a state of mind of an individual. Unity consciousness manifests primarily in the absence of relationships of dominance especially in the world’s economical and political systems. Despite its limited reach I feel the Occupy Everywhere group that called for a global “Shut down of the System” on October 28, 2011 had intuitively grasped that the Mayan calendar is all about the end to dominance and duality.
Another thing that happened close to the midline at October 28, 2011 is what the successful practical testing by Italian scientists of cold fusion energy:
http://www.wired.co.uk/news/archive/2011-10/29/rossi-success.
As you might expect question marks regarding further scaling may remain. Yet, it seems clear to me that if there will be any chances for the 7 billion headed (as of October 31, 2011) population of humanity to survive on our planet it is imperative that a source of energy that is both safe and abundant becomes available. Fossil fuels carry the risk of global warming with large ecological consequences and the great risks associated with the use of nuclear fission energy was again recently demonstrated in Japan. If earthquakes continue at the frequency and strengths they have had in the Ninth wave then we would be at a constant risk of a global radiation disaster. For these reasons the demonstration by Rossi of a controllable energy source holds the potential of something very important that may come to save our planet. Maybe it can also be looked upon as a fruit of a process of transformation of our sources of energy that started in the first day of the Ninth wave with the nuclear crisis in Japan. If this is true it may be that people are not always looking in the right directions to see the miracles that happen around them and for this reason are all too quick to dismiss the idea that the evolution of our planet has been guided by a divine plan.
Regardless, given the few points I have mentioned above I really do not understand when some people say that “nothing” happened at or around October 28, 2011. Consider also the fact mentioned above that at the dates of the Harmonic Convergence (called for by José Argüelles) or the Conscious Convergence (called for by myself) nothing visibly happened in the external world. October 28, 2011 is then the first widely celebrated date based on the Mayan calendar when remarkable things happened on its very date. In a sense however this may not be so surprising as this was indeed the date of the shift of the ages and is likely to come down in history as such.
So what will happen after this shift? What I have meant by the “end” of the Mayan calendar is the completion of the Nine waves, including the Long Count, that have developed the cosmos up until this point each in thirteen steps. The processes from seed to mature fruit have been concluded. Bolon Yokte Kuh, the “god” of the nine forces, has descended, but “his full regalia” will continue to manifest also in the time ahead. At least on the level of the Tree of Life unity consciousness has transcended duality through the effects of the Ninth wave. In the time ahead we will continue to see the effects of this transcendence of duality to play out, but in a new way, where the timing of events are not part of processes going from seed to mature fruit. Built on the unity consciousness introduced by the ninth wave we will see a continued transformation of duality to unity consciousness in 2012 and beyond.
What is new is that there is no place, or scripted event, in the future to “get to” since the climb of the top of the pyramid of consciousness has already been accomplished. Throughout the Ninth wave thousands of people have had the experience of a heightened awareness of unity. Thus, much of what was developed in the Ninth wave such as “the world oneness revolution“ (including for instance struggles in Yemen and Syria) – now mostly known as the Occupy Movement – will continue with global objectives emanating from this unity frame of consciousness. It is, I believe, for a reason that people for a long time have been looking to the year 2012 as a year of transformation. The reason is that this year follows upon the end of the Mayan calendar on October 28, 2011 and the unity consciousness that especially the Ninth wave has brought.
From now on the future is no longer scripted in time. Of course, many people, and especially those born into the Seventh wave, did not think the future was scripted to begin with. Yet, I feel there is massive evidence presented in my books and elsewhere that indeed we have been living within a cosmic time plan regardless of whether the large media and social institutions of education chose to ignore this. Certainly, if the future is no longer scripted, the transformation to unity and to the creation of a world in harmony will come down to the human beings themselves. A lasting legacy of my solution to the Mayan calendar will then still be the demonstration of the climb to the top of the nine-storied pyramid with its unity consciousness and this is something many will need to be reminded of also in the future. It is from the unity consciousness attained by the ninth wave that a new world will be created after some time of intensifying chaos.
In one of my most recent articles before the shift I discussed what time would be like and what calendar we might want to follow in the time ahead. I will need some time before I announce my own views on this matter. A new resonance with time is now being developed by people that have experienced the shift and this has to be distinguished from the inertia of the previous consciousness of time. It seems clear that even if certain waves may continue they will not be taking us to higher levels of evolution. Instead, I believe that at the level that we have now attained we will go from doing and evolving to being in harmony. October 28, 2011 was the final shift of the ages and there will not be another one. I think there is no longer any reason to expect anything, whether good or bad, to fall down upon us at any particular date in the future since there is no longer any scripted cosmic plan. At the same time, it seems obvious that the world is still far from the goal of harmony in unity. It is then also entirely possible that this goal will be served by different collective events such as 11:11:11, the Venus Transit on June 6, 2012, 12:12:12 or December 21, 2012, etc that bring people together for intention setting, even if these dates do not have any inherent meaning in the Mayan calendar. To the extent that such celebrations have constructive goals or serve as deadlines for significant projects I will support them. The actual content of global events will now be more important than their actual timing, which is different from before October 28, 2011, when there was an intrinsic value to following the cosmic time plan.
Carl Johan Calleman
November 8, 2011
Mayakalenderns "Slut", Solstormar och Jordförändringar
111011Mayakalenderns "Slut", Solstormar och Jordförändringar
Skicka gärna vidare
Vi har nu firat den kosmiska konvergensen och det är mindre än en natt och en dag före uppfyllandet av den evolutionära planen för hela skapelsen (eller åtminstone att uppnå den högsta nivån). Som förutspått har nionde vågen av denna plan, som närmar sig sitt slut tillsammans med de andra vågorna i Mayakalendern den 28 oktober 2011, fört med sig en enorm frekvensökning till världen. Detta har upplevts på ett personligt plan av många, men det har också varit väl synligt i spridningen av politiskt och ekonomiskt kaos i stora delar av världen. Den nuvarande instabiliteten märks inte bara i vad som faktiskt sker, utan även i de ständiga förändringar i hur händelser eller utvecklingar uppfattas och rapporteras. Grekland, till exempel, sägs en dag vara i konkurs, en annan helt flytande med hjälp av trojkan, och nästa dag sägs det återigen vara i konkurs. En dag har Ghaddafi-regimen fallit och en annan kämpar den återigen bara för att ha fallit nästa dag igen.
I denna värld av osäkra tolkningar av nyheter har alternativa medier på Internet gått in för att försöka fylla gapet och talar ibland med total visshet om förestående katastrofer. Där sägs ena dagen kometen Elenin skapa jordbävningar och göra slut på världen, nästa existerar den inte och sedan är den tillbaka igen (eller var det planet X?). Vad som helst, oavsett hur galet eller långsökt, kan idag hitta en uppmärksam publik på YouTube och presenteras som om den var seriös information. Till instabiliteten i världen har alltså informationskaos lagts till och det är en vanlig känsla bland många att de inte vet vem eller vad de ska tro längre. Den mentala ram inom vilken människor har förstått världen eroderar och detta, lika mycket som det faktiska händelseförloppet, är ett tidstecken. Vissa avvisar meningsfullheten av mental förståelse helt och hållet.
Denna urholkning bereder marken för en ny öppning och radikal förändring i vårt sätt att tänka och relatera och vittnar om det faktum att mycket av världen har skakats ur sin tidigare balans genom den nionde vågen. Under allt detta kan vi finna en något nervös väntan på något okänt och dramatiskt som ska hända. Det är inte förvånande att i sinnet hos många människor så har denna förväntan till stor del varit negativ. När allt kommer omkring, har utvecklingen av den nionde vågen varit väsentligt förutsägbar enligt Uppenbarelseboken 16, där det är de sju dagarna som ger upphov till mest förstörelse av de gamla strukturerna i världen. Därmed har framstegen längs de gamla rutterna steg för steg blivit blockerade och upplevelsen av en återvändsgränd för vår nuvarande civilisation har haft stor spridning men endast lite visas vad gäller alternativ. De nyheter som har genererats av den nionde vågen har därmed varit få i världen i stort, och långt i mellan. Även om många kan ha haft inre uppvaknanden av enhet så har de yttre manifestationerna av dessa varit mycket marginella.
Som en del av urholkningen av den nuvarande världen hade jag förutspått i ett relativt tidigt skede, helt korrekt, att den femte dagen i nionde vågen skulle vara den energi som skulle påskynda den ekonomiska nedgången (och ekonomin kanske är den bästa spegeln av hur människor förhåller sig till varandra). Detta var faktiskt också den tid då den så kallade "marknaden" verkligen började att påverkas av den globala lånekrisen, som sedan med varje nytt skifte i nionde vågen fortsatt att fördjupas. Den utdragna karaktären hos denna kris ändrar inte det faktum att vi är på väg mot en kollaps av det ekonomiska och politiska systemet i världen och det finns inga tecken på att detta skulle kunna avvärjas. Tillväxten i betydelsefulla länder som USA och Tyskland har avstannat (för att inte tala om Grekland och Italien), vilket i praktiken blockerar alla försök till återbetalning av skulder.
Den ekonomiska nedgången har haft en del överraskande inslag som en uttryckt önskan hos en kör av superrika som vill beskattas hårdare och möjligheten att Kina kommer att köpa skulder från Italien eller andra euro-länder för att hålla dem flytande. Jag finner det dock svårt att tro att något av detta verkligen skulle hända och känslan man får är att de styrande nu inte har några mer tricks att visa upp. Trots återvändsgränden, kan det dock förmodligen sägas att livet i stora delar av världen fortfarande verkar vara ungefär som vanligt. Således har ingen händelse ännu varit kraftfull nog för att utlösa den kollaps som många förväntar sig eller fruktar och nu verkar det som att detta inte kommer ske förrän i den sjunde dagen av den nionde vågen, 11-28 oktober. Om så är fallet, kan slutet på kalendern innebära ett mycket tydligt avbrott.
Vad vi bevittnar är alltså inte en ny lågkonjunktur, utan slutet på världens kapitalistiska system och protesterna i USA mot "Wall Street" kan vara en indikation så god som någon på detta. Man får dock intrycket att så länge det gamla systemet överlever finns det inte någon verklig öppning för att skapa en ny värld att ersätta det med. Att göra så skulle vara för mycket i konflikt med lagligheten i den nuvarande dualistiska maktstrukturen och bara efter att någon form av fullständig kollaps har inträffat skulle folk i allmänhet tvingas och inspireras till att skapa ett nytt sätt att leva och förhålla sig i sfärer av politik och ekonomi. För att hindra en sådan ny värld från att födas kan vi också vara säkra på att när kollapsen kommer så kommer den att presenteras av makterna som inget annat än en tillfällig nedgång. En sådan illusion kan då komma att dominera många som saknar Mayakalenderns perspektiv av en utveckling mot enhetsmedvetande och detta belyser också risken med att tro på dem som säger att kalendern slutar den 21 december 2012, vilket är något som kommer att spela rätt i händerna på dem som vill återuppliva det gamla systemet.
Utöver det fördjupade politiska och ekonomiska kaoset så har nionde vågen också fört med sig en tydlig intensifiering av många typer av naturkatastrofer, ibland på platser som de aldrig setts förut. Detta har genererat ett stort intresse för alla sådana fenomen och en genre av katastrof-fascination har vuxit fram på Internet där vissa spyr ut information om naturkatastrofer utan att ge något sammanhang eller förklaring till varför det kan hända nu. Sådana händelser omfattar solstormar, kometer, jordbävningar, översvämningar, värmeböljor och extrema vindar, av vilka många har ökat under nionde vågen.
Några av dessa naturkatastrofer som har intensifierats (översvämningar, värme- och köldvågor, bränder, extrema vindar) är delvis orsakade av människans inverkan på klimatet, men detsamma kan inte sägas om seismiska fenomen som ligger utanför vår kontroll att orsaka eller manipulera. Detta är ännu mera fallet för så kallade jordförändringar som skapar förändrade kustlinjer etc som ursprungligen förutspåttsatt komma av Edgar Cayce, som dock felaktigt förutspådde att detta skulle ske under åren 1958-1998.Med tanke på det stora intresset för sådana idag är det relevant att fråga om de till viss del skulle kunna vara en del av den kosmiska planen och därmed förutsägbar från Mayakalendern. I Mayakalendern och Transformation of Consciousness (2004) skrev jag: "Åtminstone några smärre jordförändringar kan därmed bli resultatet av den frekvensökning i medvetandet som kosmos nu genomgår. Men att vända på orsak och verkan för att skapa en domedagsuppfattning där sådana jordförändringar presenteras som själva syftet med denna fas av skapelsen är ohållbar. Eventuella fysiska effekter bör bara ses som produkter av förändringar i medvetandefältet [...]" och jag anser fortfarande att detta uttalande är giltigt och viktigt. Eftersom den höga frekvensökningen i nionde vågen verkar på flera nivåer i universum samtidigt, exempelvis kosmisk, galaktisk, sol, planetarisk och mänsklig, skulle vi förvänta oss att se det manifesterat på alla dessa. Även om det kan vara svårt att studera dess manifestation på de kosmiska eller galaktiska nivåerna tycks det möjligt att göra det på solens nivå, som alltmer uppmärksammas för sina solstormar. Är dessa solstormar, varav de största inom den nionde vågen har sammanfattats nedan, då relaterade till Mayakalendern?
Det är en komplex fråga som skulle kräva data som samlats över stora tidsperioder för att analyseras men som i huvudsak saknas. Ändå är det värt att notera i listan ovan att det fanns en stor solstorm i början av den nionde vågen den 9 mars samt de vid början av det femte och sjätte dagen. Hypotetiskt kan det då finnas en koppling mellan dessa solstormar och den nionde vågen i Mayakalendern. Även om en intensifiering av solaktiviteten förväntas som en del av en regelbunden solcykel, så är det oväntade i den nuvarande att denna aktivitet verkar ha försenats i flera år och uppenbaras först nu i uppenbar synkroni med den nionde vågen. Om detta är sant kan en intensifiering av solstormarna förväntas mot slutet av nionde vågen i sin sjunde dag som börjar 11 oktober.
När det gäller seismisk aktivitet på vår egen planet, är länken till Mayakalendern mer tydlig, som jag har diskuterat i Vårt Intelligenta Universum. Således är kontinentaldriften orsakad av pulser från det planetariska livsträdet i däggdjursundervärlden och denna drift (även kallad plattektonik) är orsaken till alla jordbävningar och vulkanutbrott på vår planet. Eftersom kalendern nu är på väg mot sitt slut kan vi också undra om den kontinentala strukturen på jorden, den globala hjärnan, nu kommer att bli färdig och om detta kommer att påverka stabiliteten i jordskorpan. Om den gör det så kanske den ökade seismiska aktiviteten under den senaste tiden härstammar från det faktum att den inre kärnan av jorden nu finjusteras för överföring av det nya enhetsmedvetandet från det Kosmiska Livets Träd. En sådan finjustering kan dock för oss som lever på ytan inte upplevas som särskilt "fint" och kan i själva verket ha ganska dramatiska konsekvenser. Oavsett är det viktigt att se att dessa är en del av en målmedveten plan.
Detta är den enda rimliga förklaring jag har hört till varför det skulle vara en intensifiering av seismisk aktivitet vid den här tidpunkten, en intensifiering som var definitivt uppenbar vid sådden av nionde vågen genom jordbävningen och tsunamin i Japan. Om det finns en ökad seismisk aktivitet vid den aktuella tiden skulle det med andra ord bero på att kalendern snart är slut. Även om detta är spekulativt kommer jag från min sida välja att vara på en seismiskt stabil plats då kalendern närmar sig sitt slut.
Eftersom detta förmodligen är mitt sista meddelande innan Mayakalendern tar slut den 28 oktober 2011, kan det nu också vara på sin plats att diskutera lite vad detta "slut" kan betyda och naturligtvis är det en fråga som har diskuterats under en längre tid. Mitt enkla svar skulle vara att universum når sitt högsta kvanttillstånd och skapar en ny scen för livet (på toppen av niovåningspyramiden). Det är alltså en vanlig missuppfattning att en "ny" cykel kommer att börja efter att kalendern tagit slut. Detta är ett missförstånd eftersom det som går mot sitt slut inte är en cykel till att börja med, utan nio riktade linjära evolutionära vågor. Den enda aspekten av den profetiska Mayakalenderns system som kan beskrivas som cyklisk är 260-dagars tzolkin och detta är den enda cykel som kommer att få ett slut. Men även om denna cykel är viktig som en matris för energierna för skapandet och personlig resonans med dagtecken, spelar den ingen roll med att driva det storskaliga universums utveckling eller dess evolution av medvetandet.
Med detta i åtanke ser jag tre möjliga alternativ som kan följa efter att universum har nått sitt högsta tillstånd: Det första och mest dramatiska alternativet är att alla vågor - liksom tzolkin-cykeln - kommer till ett slut. Detta skulle sannolikt innebära ett abrupt slut på all framtida energimässiga styrning av våra liv och handlingar och ett slags frihetschock. Livet skulle levas fullt ut ögonblick för ögonblick för ögonblick och varje ögonblick skulle vara en evighet som inte skulle vara organiskt kopplat till andra ögonblick. Det andra alternativet, som jag nu lutar åt, är att vågorna upphör, efter att ha utfört sina evolutionära syften, men tzolkin fortsätter att ge en viss energisk bakgrundsvariation. Detta skulle fortfarande innebära att leva ögonblick för ögonblick utan några vågor som riktar vår evolution, men en daglig variation av tzolkinenergier kan hindra oss från att uppleva livet som helt tidlöst. Det tredje alternativet är att inte bara tzolkin, men också de nio skapelsevågorna (Undervärldarna) fortsätter på obestämd tid och summan av toppar och dalar inte begränsas till tretton. Detta skulle fortfarande innebära att vi inte längre skulle underordnas riktade processer som pågår från frö till mogen frukt, men det skulle inte betyda att livet skulle vara som ett evigt nu. Snarare skulle alla vågorna som för närvarande driver vår utveckling fortsätta efter förverkligandet av enhetsmedvetandet, men egentligen utan någon ände.
Den senare uppfattningen verkar ha rått i Palenque i forna tider, eftersom kalendariska datum långt in i framtiden nämns där, även om datumen i fråga inte kan betraktas som profetiska. Jag känner vid det här laget att det inte är möjligt att säga med säkerhet vilket av de tre alternativen som kommer att utspelas efter att kalendern tar slut, men var och en skulle innebära en grundläggande diskontinuitet och en betydande, om inte total, omvandling av vår upplevelse av livet. Var och en av dem skulle betyda slutet för riktad evolution och friheten att bara vara. Kanske beror det på att de hör denna kallelse från "framtiden", trots samtidig närvaro av vissa negativa omen vid den aktuella tiden, som jag ser ett påtagligt antal människor som just nu kommer hem till sig själva och verkligen börjar uppskatta livet precis som det är. Kanske det trots allt pågår ett skifte mot enhetsmedvetande och att universum nu börjar tillåta oss att bara vara vad vi än är.
Carl Johan Calleman
Paris, 30 september, 2011 (11 EB)
8:e dagen av den sjätte natten i den nionde vågen
The “End” of the Mayan calendar, Solar Flares and Earth Changes
111005The “End” of the Mayan calendar, Solar Flares and Earth Changes
We have now celebrated the Cosmic Convergence and there is less than one night and one day before the fulfillment of the evolutionary plan for all of creation (or at least the attainment of the top level).
As predicted the Ninth wave of this plan, which is coming to a close together with the other waves of the Mayan calendar on October 28, 2011, has brought a tremendous frequency increase to the world. This has been experienced on a personal level by many, but it has also been easily visible in the spread of political and economical chaos in large parts of the world. The current instability is evident not only in what is actually happening, but also in the constant shifts in how events or developments are perceived and reported. Greece, for instance, is one day said to be bankrupt, another fully afloat with the help of the troika, and the next day it is again said to be bankrupt. One day the Ghaddafi regime has fallen and another it is again fighting only to have fallen the next day again.
In this world of uncertain interpretation of news alternative media on the Internet have gone in to try to fill the gap sometimes speaking with total certainty about impending catastrophes. There, one day the comet Elenin is said to create earthquakes and to set an end to the world, the next it does not exist and then it is back again (or was it planet X?). Anything, no matter how crazy or farfetched, can today find an attentive audience on YouTube and be presented as if it was serious information.
To the instability of the world has thus been added information chaos and it is a common feeling among many that they do not know who or what to believe anymore. The mental framework within which people have understood the world is eroding and this, as much as the actual course of events, is a sign of our times. Some reject the meaningfulness of mental understanding altogether.
This erosion prepares the ground for a new opening and radical shift in our ways of thinking and relating and attests to the fact that much of the world has been shaken off its previous balance by the Ninth wave. Underlying all of this we may find a somewhat nervous expectation of something unknown and dramatic that is to happen. It is not surprising that in the minds of many people this expectation has been largely negative. After all, the development of the Ninth wave has been essentially predictable according to Revelation 16, where it is the seven days that bring the most destruction to the old structures of the world. Thus, progress along the old routes has step by step been blocked and the experience of a dead end to our current civilization has spread widely with little to yet show in terms of alternatives. The novelties that have been generated by the Ninth wave have thus in the world at large been few and far in between. While many may have had inner awakenings of oneness the external manifestations of these have been very marginal.
As part of the erosion of the current world I had predicted at a relatively early point, quite correctly, that the fifth day of the Ninth wave would be the energy that would precipitate the economic downturn (And the economy may be the best mirror of how humans relate to one another). This was in fact also the time when the so called “markets” truly started to be affected by the global loan crisis, which has since with every new shift point of the Ninth wave continued to deepen. The drawn out nature of this crisis does not change the fact that we are going towards a collapse of the economical and political system of the world and there are no signs that this could be averted. Growth in key countries such as the US and Germany has come to a halt (not to mention Greece and Italy), which in practice blocks all attempts for the repayment of debts.
The economic downturn has displayed some surprising elements such as the expressed desire of a choir of super rich to be taxed more heavily and the possibility that China will buy debt from Italy or other Euro countries to keep them afloat. I however find it hard to believe that any of this would actually happen and the feeling one gets is that the rulers are running out of tricks. Despite the dead end, it can however probably be said that life in much of the world still appears much like business as usual. Thus, no occurrence has yet been powerful enough to precipitate the collapse that many are expecting or fearing and it now seems that this will not happen until in the seventh day of the Ninth wave, October 11-28. If so, the end of the calendar may become a very marked discontinuity.
What we are witnessing is thus not another recession, but the end of the world capitalist system and the protests in the US against “Wall Street” may be an indication as good as any of this. One however gets the impression that as long as the old system survives there is no real opening to create a new world to replace it. To do so would be too much in conflict with the legality of the current dualist power structure and only after some kind of full collapse has occurred would people in general be compelled and inspired to create a new way of living and relating in the realms of politics and economics. To prevent such a new world from being born we can also be certain that when the collapse comes this will be presented by the powers that be as nothing but a temporary downturn. Such an illusion may then come to dominate many who lack the perspective of the Mayan calendar of an evolution towards unity consciousness and this also highlights the risk of believing those that say the calendar ends on December 21, 2012, which is something that will play right into the hands of those that want to resurrect the old system.
In addition to the deepened political and economical chaos the Ninth wave has also brought a marked intensification of many types of natural disasters sometimes in places they have never been seen before. This has generated an immense interest in all such phenomena and a genre of catastrophe fascination has emerged on the Internet where some are spewing out information of natural disasters without providing any context or explanation to why they may be happening now. Such events would include solar flares, comets, earthquakes, floods, heat waves and extreme winds, many of which have increased in the Ninth wave.
Some of these natural disasters that have been intensifying (floods, heat and cold waves, fires, extreme winds) are partly caused by human effects on the climate, but the same cannot be said about the seismic phenomena that are outside of our control to cause or manipulate. This is even more the case for so called Earth Changes generating altered coastlines etc that were initially predicted by Edgar Cayce as coming, but erroneously predicted to occur in the years 1958-98. Given the great interest in such today it is relevant to ask if they to some extent could be part of the cosmic plan and thus be predictable from the Mayan calendar.
In The Mayan Calendar and the Transformation of Consciousness (2004) I wrote: “At least some minor earth changes may thus result from the high frequency change in consciousness that the cosmos is now undergoing. But the reversal of cause and effect to generate a doomsday view where such earth changes are presented as the very purpose of this particular phase of creation is untenable. Any possible physical effects should be seen only as by products of changes in the consciousness field […]” and I still consider this statement as valid and important. Since the high frequency change in the Ninth wave is operating at several levels of the universe simultaneously, such as cosmic, galactic, solar, planetary and human, we would expect to see it manifested at all of these. While it may be hard to study its manifestation on the cosmic or galactic levels it seems possible to do so on the level of the sun, which increasingly is receiving attention for its flares. Are these flares, the largest of which within the Ninth wave have been summarized below, then related to the Mayan calendar?
This is a complex question that would require data accumulated over large periods of time to be analyzed that is essentially missing. Yet, it is noteworthy in the list above that there was a large solar flare at the beginning of the Ninth wave on March 9 as well as those at the beginnings of the fifth and sixth days. Hypothetically there might then exist a link between these flares and the Ninth wave of the Mayan calendar. Even though an intensification of solar activity is expected as part of any regular solar cycle, what is unexpected in the current one is that this activity seems to have been delayed for several years and is made evident only now in apparent synchrony with the Ninth wave. If this is true an intensification of solar flares would be expected towards the end of the Ninth wave in its the seventh day beginning October 11.
When it comes to seismic activity on our own planet, the link to the Mayan calendar is more clear as I have discussed in The Purposeful Universe. Thus, the continental drift is caused by pulses from the planetary tree of life in the Mammalian Underworld and this drift (also called Plate Tectonics) is the cause of all earthquakes and volcanic eruptions on our planet. Since the calendar is now about to come to an end we may thus also ask if the continental structure of the Earth, the global brain, will now be completed and if this will affect the stability of the Earth’s crust. If it does then maybe, the increased seismic activity in recent times derives from the fact that the inner core of the Earth, is now being fine-tuned for the transmission of the new unity consciousness from the Cosmic Tree of Life. Such a fine tuning may however from the perspective of us who live on its surface be experienced as particularly “fine” and could in fact have quite dramatic consequences. Regardless it is important to see that these are part of a purposeful plan.
This is the only reasonable explanation I have heard for why there would be an intensification of seismic activity at this particular time, an intensification which was certainly evident at the seeding of the Ninth wave through the earthquake and tsunami in Japan. If there is an increased seismic activity at the current time it would in other words be because the calendar is coming to an end. While this is speculative I will on my part chose to be at a seismically solid place as the calendar approaches its end.
As this most likely is my last communication before the Mayan calendar comes to an end on October 28, 2011, it may now also be in its place to discuss somewhat what this “end” may mean and of course is a question that has been discussed for some time. My basic answer would be that the universe attains its highest quantum state and creates a new stage for life (at the top of the nine-storied pyramid). It is thus a common misunderstanding that a “new” cycle will begin after the calendar comes to an end. This is a misunderstanding because what is coming to an end is not a cycle to begin with, but nine linear directed evolutionary waves. The only aspect of the prophetic Mayan calendar system that may be described as cyclical is the 260 day tzolkin and this is the only cycle that will come to an end. Yet, even if this cycle is important as a matrix of the energies of creation and personal resonance with day signs, it plays no role in driving the large scale evolution of the universe or its evolution of consciousness.
With this in mind I see three possible alternatives that may follow after the universe has attained its highest state: The first, and most dramatic alternative, is that all waves - as well as the tzolkin cycle - come to an end. This would likely mean an abrupt end to all future energetic regulation of our lives and actions and a sort of freedom shock. Life would be lived fully moment by moment by moment and each moment would be an eternity that would not be organically linked to other moments. The second alternative, which I am currently leaning towards, is that the waves end, after having accomplished their evolutionary purposes, but the tzolkin continues to provide some energetic background variation. This would still mean living moment by moment without any waves directing our evolution, but a daily variation of tzolkin energies could prevent us from experiencing life as completely timeless. The third alternative is that not only the tzolkin, but also the nine creation waves (Underworlds) continue indefinitely and the total of peaks and valleys not limited to thirteen. This would still mean that we would no longer be subordinated to directed processes going from seed to mature fruit, but it would not mean that life would be like an eternal now. Rather, all the waves that are currently driving our evolution would continue after the attainment of unity consciousness, but really without any end.
The latter view seems to have been held in the site of Palenque in ancient times, since calendrical dates deep into the future are mentioned there even if the dates in question cannot be considered as prophetic. I feel at this point it is not possible to tell with certainty which one of the three alternatives that will play out after the calendar comes to an end, but either one would amount to a fundamental discontinuity and a significant, if not total, transformation of our experience of life. Either one of them would mean the end to directed evolution and the freedom to just be. Maybe it is because they hear this call from the “future” that, despite the concurrent presence of some negative omens at the current time, I find a noticeable group of people who at this very time are coming home to themselves and are truly beginning to appreciate life exactly the way it is. Maybe after all there is a shift to unity consciousness going on and that the universe is now starting to allow us to just be whatever we are.
Carl Johan Calleman
Paris, September 30, 2011 (11 Eb)
8th day of the sixth night of the Ninth wave
2011-2012 Ken Carey Starseed Dialog and Updates
1108302011-2012 Ken Carey Starseed Dialog and Updates
AN EXCHANGE FORUM FOR COMMENTS, DIALOG, AND MEANING OF 2011-2012 EVENTS.
07/08/2011
Where I'm Coming From. . .
Just before late 1978's winter washed up on the snowy new year's shore of 1979, I took a break from my work as a carpenter to write down a string of visionary yet seemingly random impressions that had been influencing my dreams and weaving themselves through even my waking thoughts since the previous September. I tossed a small oak log onto the coals and sat down at a desk situated in a twelve by twelve foot office that I had built specifically for this purpose.
No sooner had I set my fingers to the typewriter when my mind soared upward to what seemed an inter-dimensional plane of consciousness. There I was met by a group of beings made tangible by brilliant multicolored fields of ever-so-slightly shifting patterns, their light vibrating with a rapidity far beyond my own. As my own perceptual faculties accelerated in joyful excitement, these beings slowed down their own vibrational rates until our eventual synchronization allowed us to communicate in, at first a telepathic, then soon in an increasingly word-speckled manner that included smoothly changing symbolic images, powered by a unified energy stream of unimaginably potent love.
I could feel their intellects scanning my vocabulary at computer-surpassing speeds until in a matter of moments they introduced themselves as angels. When I did not react (because this had been obvious from the start), they altered their self-description and explained they were extraterrestrials. This did impress me until I realized that, not being of this earth, all angels were, in fact, extraterrestrial. For the next 11 days I did nothing but type. I felt intensely alive. Luminosity flowed out from me in a spectrum that differed from, but were not dissimilar to their own. I had no need for food or sleep. (The only ordinary things I did were to throw the occasional log on the fire, and to drink abundantly from the five one-gallon jugs of our own spring water that I had stocked up on beforehand.) On January 6, the experience was over, I slept for almost 24 consecutive hours and awoke to find The Starseed Transmissions manuscript neatly laid out on the center of my desk. Now, about here, you would expect an author to write, "Little did I know that this experience was about to…."
No way. I knew well enough my life would never again be the same. Their message? Here is a summary. In my own words:
As far back as 10,000 BCE early hunting and gathering societies had settled their difference through negotiated trades, occasional skirmishes, or through ritual wars that lasted until the first person was killed. Aided by the beneficial climate of the near-boundless Fertile Crescent surrounding the land where the Tigress and Euphrates Rivers meet, agriculture produced more more and more abundantly, and as time passed those living in the southern portions of the fertile crescent came to depend on it. Their populations grew more rapidly than the hunters and gatherers. Yet hunting/gathering and agriculture went on to work in tandem for nearly seven millennium before the region began experiencing droughts.
The Sumerians answer to drought was to build huge storehouses to store grain from good years to avoid starvation during years of drought. This certainly seemed like sound policy, but the upshot of it was that their larger community-owned storehouses became targets in the dry years, objects of desire to the surrounding tribes without such stores.
This was the origin of war.
Conventional historians set the approximate date of this somewhere around 3,100 BCE. The Mayan Calendar establishes the year as 3,114 BCE. The real tragedy of this is that warfare brought fear into a place it was never designed to enter: the seat of decision-making in the human mind, the intended control room designed to facilitate Love-centered and love-compatible decisions. Fear was to bring a flash of warning in life-threatening situations, nothing more.
Although its power was reduced to about half of what it had been, Love remained active and pressed on with as much of its rightful influence as it could bring to bear on human choice. But the Age of War had begun. By the subsequent calculations of Mayan celestial mathematics, this age would last 5,125 years, and be followed by a Love-powred Age of Creation. Human intelligence would have sufficiently increased during this time to equip us with the talents, tools, and inventiveness that would forever characterize our future earthly creations and eventual adventures among the stars. When would the Age of Creation begin? Would there be a Time of Transition? How long would The Time of Transition last?
My math skills are under the impression that 5,125 minus 3,114 equals 2,011.
If the modern-day mathematicians who have studied the Calendar are right, the pivotal year will be 2012. Yet 2011 is the year predicted by many, if not all, of the pre-1985 prophecies, and we have seen enough unusual events so far this year, with still a long way to go until the winter solstice. I still favor The Starseed Transmission's numerous assumptions that the Mayan Calendar year at issue is 2011. Starseed's accurate predictions (10 years earlier) of the political changes that occurred during the 1987-1989 years helped strengthen its credibility among many, though those of us close to its origins had seen its early years characterized by a near-continuous stream of synchonisticies—and, in cases, downright miracles, so we never doubted it. (A mention of this time occurs briefly if you click my bio page, and if you want to know more, I've got a DVD to share it.)
Those in prophetic states of consciousness experience what most people miss: the ripples, wobbles, and other irregularities that commonly occur in linear time yet pass unnoticed. This is why the dates of so many prophecies miss the mark, but the prophecy itself turns out to be true. Aware of this I have always maintained a certain distance between the event predicted, and the time of its occurrence. But with the most precicely accurate and intuitively ingenious Mathematics standing behind me, giving us a specific year—from more than Five Millennia ago—I'm going with 2011. If the 2012 year turns out to be the correct one, we will be that much ahead in our understanding, and in our physical, emotional and spiritual preparations, able to just take this transparency sheet, lifting in off this year, and placing it on next. But no matter. Just the very fact of this great earth/sun/human convergence of consciousness is so mind-boggling, its effects so far-reaching, to me, the date of its arrival is of far less importance than the blazing reality of the event itself.
With so much at stake, whether the final collective "nanosecond of non-time" happens this year or next has no bearing on the Starseed perspectives and principles that form the main body of my work. They explain detail by detail how to become closer to God, how to understand the relationship between ourselves and the angels, and some of the possibilities and adventures that could occur when we all work together. I have full faith in what I have written in the Starseed Trilogy, because it was written by angels close around the burning flame of our Great Spirit, Our God, Our Creator. I have grown much closer to living in full-time awareness of the Being behind all Being these decades since, but there is something I need to make explicit.
What I write on these Web Blog pages is not in the same league as the material in the three volumes of the Starseed Trilogy. That is sacred text. What you are reading here is flowing out from the deepest, inner recesses of my being, but it is coming from a human being nonetheless, and an all-too-falible one at that. Whether the final collective "nanosecond of non-time" happens this year or next, the sacred remains in the Trilogy text.
It is not as it was before when fear commanded more power than love. A new world has risen about us, though only now do we see it. Those who profit by the encouragement of fear-centered human behavior are growing ever more desperate, and ever more visible. The worst of them stage dramatically publicized tragedies to convince us that our world continues to get worse, and "they" are out there doing their best to save us. But all things pass. Has there ever been an era without an end? The alligators found flash-frozen deep in the arctic ice with undigested tropical vegetation still in their stomachs supports a premise of the Mayan Calendar: Not all ages end gradually. Were I to guess (and this is just a guess), indications suggest that the removal of fear's historical dominance of human minds will likely take several years, with the year 2011 their midpoint. The worst of the tribulation will begin immediately after the day punctuated by a nanosecond of non-time. (see The Starseed Transmissions).
Today it is no longer about individual human accomplishment, incarnation, or enlightenment. It is about the singularity of human consciousness awakening (in all who can handle it). It is about the Great Tree of Life at the core of our humanity experiencing itself as a single unity, with our individual creativity fear-free to open into becoming its consciously interwoven leaves and blossoms. At times we will be with those in the collective core at the very singularity of consciousness itself. At other times we will be those same true selves inhabiting sensuous human bodies.
But it's about so much more than ourselves. We must include the Earth, and Sun. When their respective centers of consciousness come into perfect alignment with each other, they will immediately have the ability to convey their Emerging Evolutionary Visions to a totally awakened and participating human family. For we, too, will be one with them, sharing the same consciousness and eager to co-create whatsoever we choose from the vast menu of possibilities available to our New Entity. (If it seems I am getting ahead here or moving too quickly for some readers, you're right. The scenery, the setting, the context, are described in the books of the Starseed Trilogy.)
Earth, Sun, and Humankind will each guide, regulate, and create within their respective spheres, but like a Tri-Circle Logo, each of our creative domains will increasingly overlap as they approach the center. Here we share a common form of communication, a common excitement for joint creations, and a common sense of self. Here our more rapidly evolving human minds and bodies will reside both in and as this much larger physical organism, a body designed for habitation by the Creative Spirit at the Source of Life.
As far as we know, this shared central area will be the first true Biological Organism, born with a precisely equal balance of Energy and Matter. Earth and Sun. Time and Eternity. With human architectural, aesthetic, and engineering input, and our rapidly evolving human tools of pinpoint specificity, we will be able to introduce a very different form of Solar Architechture on this Earth, with the emphasis on the Art. In the Shadow of Art, the People Prosper." This will be the most fun we've ever had, artists all, creating Beauty through Love as never before, with Biology now included amongst our poetry, paints and songs.
The Starseed Transmissions speak of a time in the 21st century when the full intelligence of earth and sun, working through humans will create many things, among them self-replicating, microbe-sized mechanisms tailor-made to draw out the innermost potential of eagerly cooperating micro-organisms whose biological circuitry mirrors their own. Once created and brought into proximity, I can easily imagine these two micro-components rushing toward one another for a fully sexual embrace that will bind them in love and working partnership, who knows? Perhaps for eternity. They will be of many types and created for many purposes. Guided by an activated Galactic Intelligence, these fully awakened Starseeds, now Stars, Creations of the Great Spirit every one, will rapidly multiply, each new generation a systems upgrade of the last. We will probably not know if we are the first to embark upon this particular path of Conscious Evolution until long after our own Biological Starships have set forth on their journeys of discovery. (See The Starseed Transmissions, Chapter 12, for detail.)
No, my life has not been the same since those 11 winter days. In the ensuing decade, my vibrational friends inspired me to write the second and third books of what became the Starseed Trilogy: Return of the Bird Tribes in '87. And, in '89, Starseed: The Third Millennium, whose title HarperCollins subsequently shortened to simply: The Third Millennium.
those functioning primarily on the frequencies of Love, the coming interval of non-time will literally expand into eternity. These individuals will be able to experience a lifetime, or many lifetimes, in that eternity while still retaining the option to return to their physical projections as transformed representatives of the Being of Life on Earth. These will be our coworkers during the period of Planetary Awakening. Others, not so finely tuned to the forces that will be released at that time, will feel great surges of purifying energy, lasting for an indeterminate period. Some few will experience an intense fear, and many will die. Everything in physical form at this time, every soul in every kingdom, will feel something, something incredible, something that according to all the laws of physics ever known or to ever be discovered, could never happen. But there it will be before all senses, an impossible fact, like the babe in a manger, like the unmistakable feeling in your heart, an incredible vibration, shimmering, scintillating, awakening every nerve, every capillary, every cell of your planetary body. The duration of this interval will be subjectively experienced.
When I wrote the above line, " The duration of this interval will be subjectively experienced." I interpreted it to mean that because everyone is utterly unique, each one's encounter with the interval of non-time would naturally reflect that, and be wholly subjective.
Today, I understand that as my fingers flew across the keyboard back in the 1970s, they missed two words. That sentence would have better read:
The duration and timing of this interval will be subjectively experienced.
What a wonderful revelation! The implications tilt the entire field in our favor. The Creator would know that if our entire species were to simultaneously experience the interval of non-time, even the most trusting and stout of heart would become disoriented, distracted, and perhaps even disabled by the fear they felt from those around them. Suddenly, everything clicked and fell into place. If human birth takes hours in relation to the seven-or-eight-decade span of a human life, it might be presumptuous to assume that a Starchild would be born on a single day.
Wow! Nothing like proximity to give you perspective.
So instead of a tempered cataclysm, among most of us the interval of non-time will fall as a gentle, almost imperceptible rain, each bubble-pippe drop bringing the transformational zero to each individual in their own time, at the moment when their chances of standing upright in the Light are optimal.
Today I see that as a race we have failed to reach that point of critical mass that would have ensured a "natural childbirth," easing the gentle activation of the new Love-Centered cells that will awaken to their new roles as family members in glands, organs, and various other systems of an unprecedented newly born form of life. Although just a fraction of the Earth's six to seven billion people have refused to let the setbacks stop them, that still leaves hundreds of millions who are meeting the Starseed challenge with the traditional bravery of the great Sun Dancers. And I see those who have completed the process, quietly positioning themselves in locations where they can be of greatest assistance to those disoriented and confused when the currency fails.
What else do I see today?
I see that the motivational sources of most people are more likely to be centered in Love rather than Fear. They will make it, but even among the primarily loving, a large number of people will instinctually turn away from the face of God when they feel its brilliance and supreme power. These will find themselves in a kind of purgatory. They will receive nurturing, guidance, and emotional education, just as they will need time to grow unafraid of the Light, time to cautiously look out from behind the brand of cultural programming that initially caused them to withdraw. To do this, those of us who have survived with our faculties intact will (after being trained ourselves) begin training them in emotional and subconscious forgiveness, working alongside the angels to bring these loving yet still troubled souls the aid they need. First and foremost they will need our love to help minimize their fears. They will need our caring, guidance, and protection. We cannot protect them if the media is steadily bombarding them with deliberately fearful or wholly fabricated descriptions of what is supposed to be their world. They are no longer "of that world." They have awakened to Reality in God's world. In God's world there are no media to describe what is going on around you. That's what your senses are for, your intuition, telepathy, your procession of moments. Our bodies have built-in biological sensors with the ability to interpret the world for ourselves. Why let someone else bury our own understanding beneath theirs? Even if that "someone else" is an entire culture?
The only difference between a cult and a culture is scale.
In our future exchanges—and I invite you to participate—there is much to discuss about monetary systems and their history: why Jesus drove the money changers from the temple and made it clear that his kingdom was "not of this world." In other words, it is "not of this monetary world." But it is the same beautiful blue-white planet it has always been. We were never banished from the perfection of this idyllic place of true legend, we just began looking at it differently, interpreting it through the eyes of fear-born greed. When our collective perception shifts back to love, will we we find ourselves standing in a Garden? The monetary world is a world of material-based accumulation, guarded by fear, and built upon monetary standards that people value more highly than they value God.
Probably, most of all I would like to use this blog to communicate with those interested in spiritual matters, exchanging comments with people who care about God and the angels, and are not afraid of the word, extraterrestrial, people who like to explore where the third millennium's consciously guided evolution will lead us, how we might help each other better understand it and how it might help those who are curious to learn if there are others in their neighborhoods equally dedicated to the raising of their personal and regional consciousness. [When I use the terms, "Spirit," or "Spiritual Matters," or occasionally employ the language of Christianity, please understand that I do not endorse Christianity alone or any other (exclusive) path. Dogma and Belief are boulders in the road of understanding. The spiritual matters closest to my heart are always in the motion-language of love or the silent language of being.]
Later, in this year of 2011, a single moment when all those who have not yet encountered "the nano-second" of non-time" will do so. After 20 years of silent observation I now understand this nano-second far more comprehensively than I did in the '80s. The traditional, nativistic dates of preindustrial cultures, and the most thoroughly researched dates of our own era may all (in a swirling, whirling moment of non-time) be simultaneously correct. Faith alone gives predicted dates increased probability. Some dates have already passed. I know these things of which I write have already begun.
The spiritual changes of 2011 began in the fall of 2008 and will end . . . sometime before 2014. END? These are tenuous prediction at best.
In addition to the fact that: "No man know the minute or the hour or the day," when a significantly potent pulse of non-time enters a segment of linear time, it is difficult to predict when the chaos will lift. Non-time is not the only variable here. These are some of the other factors we might want to keep an eye on, remembering, of course, not all of them will take place. There is the unpredictability of human reaction, human free will, explosions of unconscious mass-human behavior, or even conscious mass-human behavior We have no way of knowing how any of these three centers of intelligence are going to behave as their spiritual centers (not their physical centers) approach and enter the proximity that will make us all one. For a short time the earth may attempt to communicate with specific parts of itself, on land (earthquakes, volcanos); and sea, huricanes, etc. This may have nothing to do with people, but will nonetheless bring the earth into balance, and, more importantly, cleanse it thoroughly in preparaion for The Age of Creation. There will be extreme swings in the earth's magnetic field, a probable magneticpolar shift, but not a geographical one. As for the sun, we will see the current increaase in solar flares and sun spots activity continue. The rate at which the poles are melting will dramatically increase. .
No, END would not have been the right word to use back then for the cessation of wild and unpredictable planetary phenomena of this magnitude; for the moment of non-time marks the birth, the beginning of an unprecedented change in the existence not only of earth and humankind but in the very nature and consciousness of our sun/star as well. Our star will now have graduated to a higher rank in the galaxy of understanding. Our life force is that of the same Great Star who is now awakening through us. Human behavior, therefore, has ever-growing influence as to how this 2011-2012 period is going to turn out. With Our Creator's intelligence looking through our eyes, seeing the same world we see, knowing us better than we know ourselves, I think we can trust that God will not force upon us a global change more rapidly than we can bear. Those operating on fearful frequencies, however, do not have that same assurance. Nor does a loving God live in their hearts to inspire and guide their behavior during the most turbulent of the times to come.
I am grateful to HarperCollins for keeping The Starseed Transmissions, Return Of The Bird Tribes, and The Third Millennium in continuous print for more than 20 years. According to reports I get from around the country, all three books are available in most bookstores, if not, they can be ordered. Harper is also publishing these three books in ebook format, so you can read them on your Kindle or other compatible device.
Even if you have not yet read any of the books in the Starseed Trilogy, you are still more than welcome to post your thoughts on this blog. Your email address will not be posted.
I'm interested in your stories (or news articles) of happenings that may possibly be events triggered by intervals of non-time. Please write to me through this blogsite. I will publish all sincere blogs that contribute to the overall discussion. These will be posted in the Comments section where I will also post my responses. My second post will be published when reader input shows the current post has been read. I certainly understand the reluctance to send me your email address, but this is, after all, a blog dedicated to dialog and exchange and if I don't have your email address I am unable to reach you. On this blogsite, your input is not posted until I have read it. I am the only one who has access to incoming material. If you leave your email address at the end of your blog I will make note of it, delete it from the blog, and only then will I post what you've written. If I see you and one or two other bloggers keenly inerested in the same topic, I will email both of you and ask if you would like me to connect you with them. You have my word: Those are the only circumstances that any email address will be pryed from my hot, typing fingers.
I welcome your thoughts, differing viewpoints, insights, questions, speculations, and ideas. I especially enjoy requests for clarification of specific Trilogy passages, or for more detailed explanations of tip-of-the-iceberg statements to which I made only passing reference. And I am most eager to explore whole new ideas and possibilities that none of us have thought of yet.
Please keep in mind that this blog is subject to a Creative Commons licence. Printing paper copies remains subject to the same U.S. copyright laws as those that pertain to books, scientific articles and magazines. Such print publication of electronic material from the Internet is illegal if done without the author's written approval.
I am continuing to decline invitations for public speaking, book-signings, or interviews on all media, including Internet and telephone. Print interviews will be the first I will resume, but that is still down the road.
I have been drifting between worlds these past "few months," though my family and the indisputable evidence of the calendar continuously remind me that it has been "for the past three years!" When I choose, I can control these perceptional drifts—gifts every one—but I learn so much more when I don't! So please, no dropping by to visit without a written or emailed invitation. Now is my time to commune with like-spirited people through the written word, forming new and perhaps lasting connections.
/Ken Carey
Delta i Cosmic Convergence September 23-26, 2011!
110819Delta i Cosmic Convergence
September 23-26, 2011!
Share
Vid tidpunkten för skrivandet (31 juli 2011) befinner vi oss i början av den femte dagen i den nionde vågen, som sedan också snabbt närmar sig sitt slut och slutförandet av alla Maya kalenderns vågor den 28 oktober 2011. Det är tre Dagar (under en tidsperiod av tre vanliga månader) ännu kvar som påverkas av den nionde vågens intensifiering i enlighet med den hög frekvens av omvandling till enighetsmedvetande. Medan vi alla kan ha idéer om hur denna slutliga omvandling kommer att ske, så vet ingen människa de exakta detaljer om vad som ska hända. Vi sitter i väntrummet hos den kosmiska läkaren och vi vet inte hur han eller hon kommer att behandla denna patient.
Genom hela skiftespunkterna i denna nionde våg, så har olika initiativ tagits för inspirerande sammankomster och mot dess kulmen har inte bara händelser planerats för mittpunkten (21 oktober 2011) och slutpunkten (28 oktober 2011) av den sjunde dagen, utan också för gregorianska datum 11: 11: 11 (11 November 2011). Även om det senare datumet inte baseras på Maya kalendern, utan på Numerologi, så fick den sin verkliga innebörd från kalendern och är dagen vi firar för att vi har tagit oss genom sluttiderna och till den nya världen vi skapar efteråt. Jag uppmuntrar alla sådana initiativ som firar skiftespunkter, särskilt om de utbildar människor mer allmänt i den sanna innebörden av Mayakalendern och dess olika Dagar och Nätter. Men jag tror också att det finns ett behov för events som betonar det arbete som vi måste göra vid den här tiden. För denna aspekt av processen anser jag att det finns en Skiftespunkt som förtjänar vår fulla uppmärksamhet och det är början av den sjätte Natten.
Anledningen är att början av den sjätte Natten den 23 September 2011 och dess påföljande få dagar, innebär en konvergens av en energiskifte i Maya kalendern och passagen av kometen Elenin mellan jorden och solen (och, om du föredrar det, höstens vårdagjämningen också).
Denna lilla komet Elenin har fått enorm uppmärksamhet på Internet och förknippas ibland med mer eller mindre förfärliga prognoser. Dess namn har lästs som "Extinction Level Event" (Massutdöende) även om det med lika berättigande kan läsas som El + Lenin (Gud + antikapitalistiska revolutionen) eller Ellen (namnen Ellen, Helen eller Elaine, vilka betyder ljus) eller El enin (Gud + nio bakvänt hänvisar till slutförandet av den gudomliga planen av nio Undervärldarna). Allt som vi verkligen vet om det, är dock att det är synkroniserat med slutet av Mayakalendern den 28 oktober 2011. Som en del av denna nionde våg, även kallad den Universella Undervärlden, tillför en kosmisk kontext till människors liv, på ett sätt som tidigare inte har varit fallet. Människor kommer med andra ord, i den Universella undervärlden, att bli medborgare i universum, ett medvetandeskifte, som har lett till ett förhöjt intresse av alla utomjordiska saker. Ändå, kanske denna förändring handlar främst om att vi skall leva upp till vårt kosmiska ursprung och den kosmiska konvergensen är en inbjudan att fullständigt uppleva detta i början av den sjätte Natten. Med ordet kosmisk menas alltså här mer dess Mayainnebörd, den allomfattande intelligensen.
Jag kan inte nog betona att Mayakalendern är ett uttryck för en verklig kosmisk, men också gudomlig tidsplan. Det är från detta vi vet att den är målmedveten, intelligent och välvillig. Många som inte känner till att denna kalender beskriver en gudomlig plan som utarbetats av vågor av sju dagar och sex nätter, kan riskera för att hamna i hopplöshet eller en tro att världen kommer till ett slut. (Bristen på föreningen till en gudomlig plan är anledningen till att den falska popkulturens slutdatum av Mayakalendern, den 21 december, 2012, ofta har blivit förknippat med sådana tankar.) Det är den gudomliga planens bakgrund, som den beskrivs av Mayakalendern, som förklarar att ingenting i universum händer av en slump. Allt spelar roll för uppfyllandet av syftet med den kosmiska planen, vilket gör det meningsfullt trots de umbäranden och utmaningar, som vi kan förvänta oss en tid framåt.
Ur ett sådant perspektiv kan man undra vad Gud kommunicerar till oss genom komet Elenin särskilt i fråga om vad det finns att göra i början av den sjätte Natten, men också i den sjunde Dagen av den nionde vågen. Det är ju trots allt så, att det är profeterat att kometer skall vara en del av det språk som Gud kommer att använda, för att kommunicera med oss i Mayakalenderns sluttid. En annan sak, som vi vet om den nionde vågen, och dess sjätte Natt och sjunde Dag, är att den medför en särskild polaritetsövergång till enighetsmedvetande som illustreras i figur 1. Elenin kan sedan också ses som den slutliga förändringens budbärare. I dag hör vi ofta idén om ett förestående polskifte, som går tillbaka till Helena Blavatskys och Edgar Cayces mediumskap. Men ändå hävdar de flesta, om inte alla, professionella geovetare, att det inte finns någon anledning att förvänta sig ett polskifte inom snar framtid.
Troligen, eftersom Blavatsky och Cayce inte var bekant med detta slag av polaritets- förändringar, som de olika vågorna av Mayakalendern åstadkommer, och inte hade något språk att beskriva dem, så tog de helt enkelt sådana vågor för elektromagnetiska poleomställningar av jorden. Det polskifte som Cayce förutspådde och som han kallade en “pole shift” för år 2000 kan ha varit ett sådant misstag. Detta skedde nu inte som vi vet, men vad har ägt rum är ett polaritetskifte i medvetandet, som den åttonde vågen av Mayakalendern aktiverade 1999 och troligen var detta vad han såg i sin trance och misstog för ett fysiskt polskifte.
Time of activation
Polaritetsförskjutningar i medvetandet äger rum i synkronicitet på flera olika nivåer i universum - kosmiska, galaktiska, interplanetära, planetära och mänskliga – vid tiden för Mayakalenderns skiftespunkter. Den nionde vågen, som vi för närvarande befinner oss i, bär med sig det polaritetsskifte, som skapar enhetsmedvetandet. Vi måste fråga oss själva vad vi skall göra, om något, om vi som individer vill vara en del av detta polaritetsskifte och ta bort alla mörka filter från våra sinnen. När allt kommer omkring har vi bara befogenhet att omvandla oss själva och sedan hoppas att det sprider sig i linje med den stora indiska ledaren och visdomsläraren Mahatma Gandhi, som sade: "Var den förändring du vill se i världen."
Vad, specifikt, skulle detta innebära för den Kosmiska Konvergensen? Mayakalenderns vågor är att dess Natt- och Dagenergi generellt relaterar till varandra såsom en inre förberedelse för yttre manifestation. Detta kan särskilt vara fallet, när det gäller det sista sådant par av energi, i det totala skapandet, såsom den sjätte Natten och sjunde Dagen i den nionde vågen, vilka startar den 23 september och 11 oktober, respektive. Dessa växlingar mellan de olika energierna kan innebära att den sjätte Natten bör ägnas åt inre arbete såsom bön, kontemplation och meditation, medan den sjunde Dagen bättre passar för globala ceremonier, vilket skulle ge yttre verklighet till de inre förändringar som har förts in med den sjätte Natten. Heliga ceremonier och ritualer är kraftfulla verktyg att gör externalisera omorganiserandet av våra inre landskap.
The ninth wave
I punkt b i figur 2 anser jag således att kometen Elenin signaler till oss, att vi bör ge upp våra egon till den omfattande kosmiska intelligensen och för att detta förmodligen är vår sista chans att vara en del av en polaritetsövergång till enhetsmedvetande, eller om vi vill, Oneness eller Gudsmedvetande. Det blir också ett integritetstest för dagens evolutionära ledare, för att inte tala om "2012-experter." Elenin är en slutlig ”wake up call”, som kommer att förstås även av många som inte vet något om Mayakalendern eller hur detta uttrycker den gudomliga planen. Den sjätte natten är ju, trots allt, den sista energin vi har att vända oss inåt för att förbereda för det polaritetsskifte, som vågen för med sig. Då den sjunde dagen startar är den nya polariteten låst på plats och genererar dess slutliga manifestation.
Detta är delvis varför den Kosmiska Konvergensen den 23-26 september, 2011 skiljer sig från tidigare events, såsom den Medvetna Konvergensen den 17-18 juli, 2010, som också satte avsikten att manifestera enhetsmedvetande. I den Kosmiska Konvergensen kommer det också att vara nödvändigt att göra en ansträngning för att se denna avsikt manifesteras. Detta är ett tillfälle för att ansluta sig till det gudomliga, för självrannsakan och själssökning. En förening med det gudomliga kan åstadkommas genom intensiva böner eller genom andra andliga praktiseringar. För att vara i linje med den kosmiska planen och vara en del av dess medvetandeskifte föreslår jag att följande åtaganden blir grunden för den Kosmiska Konvergensen:
1/ Att konstant låta det gudomliga guida oss i stället för vårt ego och låta det gudomliga styra våra handlingar.
2/ Att förklara vårt oberoende från den mörka sidan inklusive överlåtandet av rätten att använda den mörka sidan mot den mörka sidan i andra.
http://www.youtube.com/user/forunity#p/u/2/pkVHYQFL2Xk
(I min egen förståelse som den mörka sidan inte är något slags evig mörk kraft, utan någonting som resulterar från de lägre vågornas mörka filter, som kan ses i figur 1)
Den Kosmiska Konvergensen är således grunden till att vi själva som individer, är den förändring som vi vill se i världen. Detta kan vara mycket obehagligt om vi har en stor del av vårt förflutna obearbetat. Det handlar så klart inte om att ge skulden för läget på vår planet på andra människor eller krafter. Det handlar om personligt ansvar. Jag tror att vi här måste gå djupt in oss själva och se där vi som individer har bidragit till att skada andra eller skadat vår planets natur.
Vi har blivit ganska vana att klaga på det våld och krig i världen eller hot mot dess naturliga tillstånd. Men det är en sak att klaga och skylla på andra, eller helt enkelt "så är" och något helt annat att se hur vi som individer har gjort vissa val som har bidragit till den globala försämringen. Tanken är att se och erkänna sådana instanser och val i våra liv och ändå inte fastna i skuld, men istället finna en väg till helande genom ett korrigerande handlingssätt.
Eftersom vi vanligtvis har undertryckt eller dövat oss själva från något personligt ansvar för händelseutvecklingen på planeten, kan vi verkligen behöva be för att bli påminda om sådana tidigare händelser. Så om vi verkligen vill skapa ett polaritetsskifte hos oss själva och om vi är villiga att anamma de åtaganden, som krävs (se ovan), är det en naturlig konsekvens att vi söker i våra själar så att vi inser hur vi har misslyckats tidigare att leva upp till dessa åtaganden. Om vi inte gör det som är nödvändigt nu, så kommer aspekter av de mörka filtren att fortsätta att dominera oss och polaritetsskiftet kommer inte att totalt. Den Kosmiska Konvergensen handlar således om att deltagarna tar ansvar för omvandlingen till enhetsmedvetande och att göra det på ett engagerat sätt. Detta kan garanterat vara svåra uppgifter, men åter igen, om vi själva inte får till stånd denna övergång till enhetsmedvetande i oss själva, vem kommer då att vilja göra det?
Den Kosmiska Konvergensen är därför en möjlighet för oss att oåterkalleligt åstadkomma en förskjutning i medvetandets polaritet i oss själva. Emedan det kan vara svårt att omedelbart leva upp till ett sådant åtagande, det om det tas på allvar, så får det ändå kraftfulla konsekvenser. En sak att fundera över, på den positiva sidan, är att det är möjligt att ett sådant djupt engagemang för enhetsmedvetande är nödvändigt för att få lämpliga riktlinjer i den nya världen.
För min egen del deltar jag i samband med denna händelse i en fredsfestival i Frankrike tillsammans med Maya och Hopi äldste http://www.lothlorienfestival.com/EN där vi kommer att meditera kring Kosmiska Konvergensen. På grund av arten av det inre arbete som krävs, anser jag att den Kosmiska Konvergensen lika bra kan observeras individuellt eller helst i små grupper, som tillhandahåller en säker miljö för deltagande. Jag rekommenderar att vi behandlar vårt förflutna och oss själva just nu i introspektion, helande och korrigerande åtgärder med utgångspunkt i den kollektiva energin av observationen av den kosmiska konvergensen runt om på jorden. En gemensam komponent i det kan vara i ljuset av stearinljus, som en helig akt till dessa åtaganden. Deltagande grupper och individer i den Kosmiska Konvergensen kan naturligtvis välja sina egna uttryck, men åtagandet till omvandlingen till enhetsmedvetande bör den gemensamma nämnaren. I den Kosmiska Konvergensen är det för oss att ge os hän till vad som än kommer att krävas av oss.
För att leva upp till vårt åtagande, så kommer förekomsten av komet Elenin att ge ett naturligt sammanhang för den kosmiska dimensionen i denna händelse och samtidigt ge oss en erfarenhet av ett gemensamt öde för mänskligheten. Det blir i detta storskaliga sammanhang som vi måste göra åtaganden, som ska ingå i en polaritetsövergång till enhetsmedvetande. Varje person som gör ett sådant åtagande gör stor skillnad och sprider ljus och hopp till dem runt henne. Detta blir desto mer nödvändigt, om tiderna verkligen kommer att vara utmanande att vår bekvämlighet. Den Kosmiska Konvergensen, den 23-26 september, 2011 är avsett som en högtidlig och ödmjuk händelse, som gör det möjligt för människor av enhetsmedvetande att ansluta på en mycket djup nivå oavsett var de än är på vår planet. Jag tror verkligen detta är den sista chansen för mänskligheten och att ”The Day of Reckoning” är här. Jag anser att ett åtagande för ett polaritetsskifte till enhetsmedvetande inte är bara ett passerkort för den nya världen att födas, utan också det enda hoppet för världen att överleva. De mörka filtren har styrt mänskligheten i årtusenden och ger inte någon väg ut. Om människor inte gör ett sådant åtagande har vi verkligen ingen anledning att förvänta oss att världen kommer att överleva.
Jag vill alltså uppmuntra alla att göra sitt yttersta för att sprida detta budskap och uppmuntra andra att högtidligt göra ett åtagande att skifta till enhetsmedvetande. Vi är de som vi har väntat på. Och det är absolut helt upp till oss. Om vi bestämmer oss för att se vår storhet, bör vi inte se den genom förnekande, eller till varje pris undvika allt som kan orsaka rädsla, utan i modet av att ärligt möta vad vi har skapat så som det visar sig på denna jord. Den nionde vågen ger verkligen en fältförändring på den kosmiska nivån, som vi kan bli en del av, men det kommer inte hända utan ett djupt och allvarligt åtagande från hjärtat av våra själar.
Carl Johan Calleman
July 31, 2011 (2 Chuen)
First day of the Fifth day of the Ninth wave
Tomorrow, the 18th of August, the fifth night of the ninth wave
110817Dear Friends,
Tomorrow, the 18th of August, the fifth night of the ninth wave,
http://treeoflifecelebration.com/images/stories/ninthwaveintro.pdf,
begins, which I have written a new article about:
http://www.calleman.com/content/articles/5thNight_9thWave.htm
For several reasons there is at the current reason a lot of denial as we approach the end of the Mayan calendar on October 28, 2011. This may take the form of denying that anything dramatic will happen and believing that things will just stay the same. It may also take the form of unrealistic fantasy scenarios of alien invasions by Nibiru etc. Sometimes I send out such material if I feel it should be considered, but only such materials that have my name on it, like my own articles and books, truly represents my own best understanding of what is going to happen.
Best
Carl Johan
Sri Bhagavan Teaching - Love and the Self
110726Sri Bhagavan Teaching - Love and the Self
Sri Bhagavan shares how the self survives through its craving for love. Since it does not have an existence of its own, it craves confirmation by having people love us.
The self seeks reinforcement so it won't disintegrate and it gets it through possessing things and titles. Having someone love us is the strongest reinforcement for the self.
He states that once we discover Love (since we are Love) we can simply be that Love and give it to others without begging for love from others.
View video http://www.worldonenesscommunity.com/video/bhagavan-talks-about-love
The self being an illusory thing, the self does not really exist. It is just born out of sensory coordination and all the psychological contents that create the self. It does not have any existence of its own.
So constantly it must be reminded, "Yes, yes, you are there. You are very much there." And this happens if somebody loves you. Then you constantly feel reinforced. You feel the reality of your existence, that you are wanted and therefore you are there. That gives you a nice sense of security, a good feeling. So you crave for love.
That's why once you discover love, that you, yourself are love, you will no more beg for love. All this love that the youth are talking about, it is begging for love, you just keep begging for love. Once you discover this true love, you just give love. You no more beg for love, and to have true love is almost to become enlightened.
So when you have enlightenment you are not there and when you are not there what is there is only love. In which case, you don't beg for love. But as long as that does not happen there is insecurity, there is fear.
Every moment the self is disintegrating so it has to possess things. This property is mine. I have these degrees. I have this job. I have this business. I have this name. I have this fame. All this reinforces you. Therefore, you want to have these things.
One of the strongest reinforcements is love, if somebody loves you, if somebody cares for you. All these things will sustain you. Therefore you keep going at it. The moment that somebody falls in love with a better person than you, you are finished.
That means you are no more wanted and you start disintegrating. That's why you see there is something in the papers recently how a boy was in love with a girl. The girl would not respond and the boy just killed her. I've met alot of people even among our devotees who earlier before they came for the dharma had fallen in love and when the girls did not respond, or later on loved somebody, they just killed them or maimed them.
So what kind of love is that. You tell that she is the most wonderful person in the world and that "I love her" and then you kill her the moment she's in love with somebody else. Instead of celebrating that she got a better person than you, such a wretch. So you don't do it that way.
So what is all this love. When you say you love somebody, it means you love yourself. That's all there is to it. You can never love anybody. How could you do that. You could only love yourself and which you say "I love so much." I love you so much means I love myself so much. I need so much love to survive otherwise I'm gone.
But you must know I'm not condemning it. I'm just describing things as they are. I'm not telling you no, don't fall in love, be totally secure by being zero. I'm not saying those things.
Since it's a fact of life, then go ahead. There is no harm. I, myself give blessings. People come and say they want to marry this person or that person. I give them full blessings.
Each one, according to his level he must function.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Official Letter from a Oneness University Guide
on Srimurthy and Paduka Deeksha
"AS THE POWER HAS STEPPED UP, NOW WHILE RECEIVING DEEKSHA FROM PADUKAS OR SRIMURTHY, KEEP YOUR HANDS 1/2 INCH AWAY FROM THE PADUKAS OR SRIMURTHY. TAKING DEEKSHA BY TOUCH WILL BE LESS POWERFUL.
This is being imparted in the processes happening in the University and is found to be very effective and powerful.
Further, this is applicable only while you take deeksha. During other times you may touch the Padukas or Srimurthy, like you may hug the Srimurthy, hold the padukas etc.,"
Unique and Beautiful Prayer and Paduka Miracles
110716Unique and Beautiful Prayer and Paduka Miracles
http://www.worldonenesscommunity.com/video/v0829-11-07-11
On the evening of July 10th devotees conducted a "Pulabhishekam" (bathing with milk, honey etc.) to all Padukas in Khammam Temple in Andra Pradesh. After praying, devotees' wrote letters to Bhagavan.The letters were placed in front of the Sri Murthi and all temple doors were locked when they left.
On the following morning of July 11th upon opening the temple doors devotees found two great miracles. One, Bhagavan answered the devotees letters by placing a sacred substance on each letter.
The second great miracle is that all of the padukas had taken a step down from the elevated platform. The main padukas had walked 7 steps forward from the main Sri Murthi. Flowers appeared where the steps were taken.
For the past 33 days daily miracles have been occuring in the Khammam Temple. Bhagavan has been eating prasadams (offerings), giving Kalki Amrutham (sacred substances) to devotees, replying to devotee letters, wearing the clothes offered and walking in the temple.
Thank You Khammam Adbuthala AMMA BHAGAVAN.
(Adbutha = most wonderful creation!)
Gratitude to the devotees of Khamman Temple for sharing these miracles and to Jothi Srinivasan for the original posting.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sri Bhagavan describes the vision or purpose of Oneness University, a university for universities dedicated to the flowering of the human being.
View transcript: http://www.worldonenesscommunity.com/notes/Sri_Bhagavan_Teaching_-_Vision_of_Oneness_University
View video http://www.worldonenesscommunity.com/video/sri-bhagavan-vision-of
See you have got medical universities, engineering universities. So this university is a university for universities. That is, to make you into a true human being. Those universities give you technical knowledge. They give you specialization. But they never make you into a human being, to what you are supposed to be.
Every human being has to be enlightened. Every human being has to be God realized. This university exists to help you become enlightened, to help you become God realized. But down the line, if you've got specific problems let us say you have depression or you are insane or you've got other peculiar problems, we're prepared to delete that also.
Our hope is in course of time many such universities will emerge across the globe to cater to the needs of people all over the globe. It is to make you into a human being.
Like we have youth programs here. Why? Because the schools do not focus on making children into human beings. They only prepare them to qualify for some exams or acquire some specialized skills and in fact in the process destroy the children. Otherwise the world would not be such a bad place unless schools were doing a bad job. How could it be so terribly bad.
We can't set up schools for everybody. So what we have done is children from other schools, from other colleges or universities, they can come here. We will remove the defects that school has put into them and also give them abilities which the school should have given and has not done, and make them fully flower into human beings.
The full flowering of the human being is nothing but the flowering of the heart. Society must be so structured that the heart of the child does not wither away. But the way parents conceive children, bring them up in the womb, the way they deliver them, the hospitals and then the way they bring up the children in the schools, the colleges, societies, everything is there only to murder the child. So there are no human beings. You can use the word human beings but there are no human beings.
There was a great saint once in Madras city a century ago who used to sit in front of his house and he used to go by. He used to say, "here goes a dog, here goes a fox, here goes a pig, here goes a donkey," throughout his life. Only on one occasion he said, "here goes man," and that was for Ramalinga Swami who disappeared into light. Only that man qualified to be called Man by him. All the others were animals.
You see the barbarity in the world. How barbarous we are, how primitive we are. We have divided ourselves on the basis of race, on the basis of nations, cults, what not, on the basis of wealth. All kinds of division and we keep fighting.
In the name of God we divide ourselves and we keep fighting. We see wars. How many wars have we fought. Tribal wars, national wars, world wars. Finally the species has become completely mad who can behave the way we are behaving.
How could you kill a fellow human being brutally and take away his things, and the silent torture that goes on in homes: a man nagging his wife, a woman nagging her husband. Everybody exploiting wanting to dominate the other. The wife wants to dominate the husband, he wants to dominate her. Children want to dominate their parents, they want to dominate their children. Employee or employer, employer or employee.
Everywhere you turn the self is at play. What is hell? There is no other hell. So the question is a simply transformation. Make the heart flower and we'll have heaven here. There will be actually Heaven on Earth. Only then you are a human being not otherwise.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SRI BHAGAVAN TEACHING - WHY GOD NEEDS YOUR HELP TO CHANGE THE WORLD
View Video: http://www.worldonenesscommunity.com/video/avseq09-1
There are certain areas where God could straight away intervene and other areas where he cannot. Here he needs your cooperation.
Surrender and helplessness are not a defeatest attitude. It is to set aside your limiting belief systems and complex emotions seeing that they are a hindrance to grace.
Even if you could do this for a short while, God would have his way. What you must understand is that while God is powerful, you too are powerful. That is the whole problem.
You are an aspect of God. You are a powerful being who is full of defective thoughts, concepts and mental frameworks, so you are God who has gone wrong.
That is why it is not possible to transform the world in one blow. You too need to cooperate with God in helping change the world.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A wonderful and moving video, "A Day with Sri Bhagavan" where he converses with his students about many interesting topics.
http://www.worldonenesscommunity.com/video/a-day-with-sri-bhagavan
Fem förutsättningar mot uppvaknande
110703FEM FÖRUTSÄTTNINGAR MOT UPPVAKNANDE
1) KONTEMPLATION ÖVER ONENESS LÄROR
Varje dag kontemplera över Oneness läror. (Speciellt webbsändningens läror om uppvaknandet varje vecka.)
2) BLI MEDVETEN OM SJÄLVCENTRERING
Självet kan inte lösas upp utan att se och upptäcka att det till sin natur är självcentrerat. Allt som behövs är bara att bli medveten om din självcentrering i varje handling under hela dagen. Det finns ingen anledning att försöka vara icke självcentrerad.
3) SAT KARMA
Göra ett maximum av goda gärningar för att göra största möjliga antal människor glada. Hjälpa djur, människor och naturen. För att detta verkligen ska gagna dig, måste du ta känslan och passionen till hjälp; det kan inte bara vara en fysisk handling.
4) SANT LYSSNANDE
När du lyssnar på den andre är du uppmärksamma på vad som händer inom dig utan att döma. När du lyssnar, kommer du att känna en önskan eller ett behov; det är vad den andra personen önskar eller behöver. Sann medkänsla uppstår naturligt när du gör detta. Eftersom du upplever dig själv som den andre, är dennes behov nu dina behov.
5) ONENESS
Begrunda och inse det faktum att du inte kan existera som en separat varelse, allt liv stöder varandra, allt är beroende av varandra. Du är ett med allt. DU ÄR DÄR PÅ GRUND AV ALLT ANNAT.
TJUGOEN REP
Om dessa 21 tillstånd:
• Uppvaknande är att bli fri ifrån sinnet.
• Dessa 21 punkter är som rep, som håller upp sinnet.
• När du blir medveten om varje punkt, kapas repen, vilket gör att självet löses upp snabbt.
• För alla dessa punkter finns det 3 sätt att hjälpa dig växa:
a. Öva externt dessa villkor i ditt dagliga liv - då det är möjligt.
b. Bli medveten om att du inte har dessa egenskaper. Först då är det möjligt att få dem.
c. Be och fråga AmmaBhagavan/Din Gudomlighet att ge dig dessa egenskaper. (Bön besvaras först när du har ett band till det Gudomliga eller AmmaBhagavan.)
1. BRIST PÅ PASSION
Skillnad mellan passion och önskan: En önskan kan du släppa, men inte passionen. Du lever för detta.
Önskan kan förvandlas till passion om du förstår allvaret och behovet av det.
För att ha passion för uppvaknande, måste du först förstå att du lider.
De tre typerna av lidande är:
1. Fysiskt - när kroppens behov inte är uppfyllda, kommer du att ha fysiskt lidande.
2. Psykologiskt - så länge du har sinnet, kommer du att ha psykologiskt lidande. När något av de 6 behoven hos sinnet förnekas, kommer du att lida:
1. Säkerhet/Trygghet
2. Variation
3. Betydelse
4. Behov av att bli älskad, att älska
5. Växa, utvecklas
6. Bidra
3. Andligt - att existera är lidande. Lidande utan orsak. Känslan av separation är detta lidande. Allt lidande kommer endast från andligt lidande. Det är ett främlingskap mellan människa och människa, människa och Gud. Ekvationen för lidandet är: Andligt + psykologiskt + fysiskt = konstant. Konstanten är inte konstant, och är beroende av hur mycket separation upplever i sitt liv vid en viss tidpunkt.
Konstanten måste komma ner till noll. Det är då lidandet kommer till noll. Konstanten beror på främlingskapet du har till människor eller Gud. När du närmar dig Gud minskar konstanten.
Bli medveten om hur du saknar passion.
2. BRIST PÅ FÖRLÅTELSE
Se att du inte kan förlåta andra som har sårat dig. Förlåtelse är en mycket viktig kvalitet, som du bör utveckla. Genom att bli sårad torterar du dig själv. Att hålla kvar smärtan är tortyr. Se hur det är tortyr för dig själv. Bli medveten om bristen på förlåtelse. Be till AmmaBhagavan att de hjälper dig att förlåta.
3. BRIST PÅ ATT BE OM FÖRLÅTELSE
Du söker inte förlåtelse från andra. Många gånger har du sårat andra, någon gång omedvetet, även när du är medveten förklarar du och ber inte om förlåtelse. Du försöker rättfärdiga din åsikt. Bli medveten om hur du saknar förmågan att be om förlåtelse.
4. KÄNSLIGHET
På grund av sinnets babbel kan inte sinnena uppleva någonting. Vi tänker hela tiden på oss själva och vi är inte känsliga för andra människors känslor och prioriteringar. Bli medveten om din okänslighet.
5. RELATIONER
När helst du relaterar till människor, saker och ämnen, är det livet så länge det är behagligt. När det blir obehagligt avslutar du förhållandet. Sakta blir du som död i förhållande till relationer. Detta kan kallas icke-relation. Bli medveten om bristen på relation.
6. INRE INTEGRITET
Lära sig att vara ärlig mot sig själv. Ljuga för andra är inte en så stor sak, men i det ögonblick vi ljuger i det yttre, försöker vi att ljuga för oss själva i det inre. En lögn i det yttre är tusen lögner i en själv. De lögner du har sagt till dig själv har fört dig bort från ditt riktiga jag. Bli medveten om brist på inre integritet.
7. ÅTERBLICK PÅ LIVET
Börjar se hur du sårar andra. Om en person inte kan se sina fel i livet, och hur de påverkade andra, är det mycket svårt att växa. Så granska ditt liv.
8. KONFRONTERA RÄDSLA
Det finns 2 typer av rädsla - Biologisk - detta är en inbyggd mekanism i kroppen för att skydda dig och du behöver inte göra något åt det. Psykologisk – det finns 4 slag: rädsla för att misslyckas, avvisande, framtiden, det okända. Konfrontera det!
9. GODKÄNNANDE
Kunna acceptera sig själv. Vi hittar alltid någon som är skyldig till vårt lidande. Vänd dig inåt och se vem du är och acceptera det. Då kommer du att vara i fred med allt. Acceptera din roll i samhället eller systemet; hur liten den än kan vara, hur obetydlig den än kan vara.
10. BEGÄR EFTER BETYDELSE
Ett av de största hindren för andlig tillväxt är begäret efter betydelse. Det är självets natur att längta efter betydelse i allt. Bli medveten om begäret efter betydelse.
11. ÖDMJUKHET
Bli medvetna om bristen på ödmjukhet du har i ditt liv. Inse att i livet är du en del av helheten och mycket obetydlig; det skulle hjälpa dig att växa. De flesta människor känner sig som om de förstår allt. Ödmjukhet är nödvändigt för uppvaknande, ty uppvaknande är något du får, inte uppnår. Bli medveten om bristen på ödmjukhet.
12. HELIGHET
Den moderna civilisationen tror att den kan förstå och förklara allt. Detta gör att livet förlorar sitt mysterium, vilket är glädje, vördnad/ respekt och helighet. Mänsklighetens förklaringar har tagit död på livets mysterium och helighet. "Alla Som Är" kan aldrig förstås. Gud är inte möjlig att känna igen. När du kan inse detta, börjar du känna helighet gentemot det Gudomliga och allt i livet. Den största kunskapen är att du verkligen aldrig kan veta något. Bli medveten om bristen på helighet.
13. DET GUDOMLIGAS HAND I LIVET
Bli medveten om hur det finns en Gudomlig hand i ditt liv.
14. BAND/FÖRBINDELSE MED AMMABHAGAVAN
Etablera ett personligt band med AmmaBhagavan. För att komma i kontakt med det Gudomliga fenomenet Uppvaknande, som AmmaBhagavan har tagit ner till den här planeten, behöver du känna samhörighet med AmmaBhagavan. Ju starkare band desto mer Gudomlig nåd upplever du. När du har ett band, kommer saker att hända snabbare. Har du ett starkt band? Bli medveten om bristen på band.
15. BRIST PÅ TILLIT
Bli medveten om bristen på tillit du har till processen och AmmaBhagavan. För att se hur sinnet berättar olika historier om hur ditt Uppvaknande inte kan, eller inte kommer att, ske. Inse att det (Uppvaknandet) sker över hela planeten för tusentals människor, och kommer att hända dig. Bli medveten om bristen på tillit.
16. KAPITULATION
Se tillståndet i sinnet och bli hjälplös. Vet att du inte kan göra något för att komma dit, och du behöver att det Gudomliga hjälper dig. Att ge upp är att inse att det finns inget mer du kan göra åt det. När du är hjälplös hjälper det Gudomliga dig. Om du är desperat är du förlorad. Bli medveten om bristen på kapitulation.
17. BRIST PÅ TACKSAMHET (EGENSKAP)
Vi tar livet för givet och ger det en ram av ansvar och plikt. Bli medveten om bristen på tacksamhet.
18. SEVA
Hjälpa andra. Den största Seva är att hjälpa andra till Uppvaknande. Bli medveten om hur du inte utnyttjar möjligheter att göra Seva.
19. MEDKÄNSLA
Se hur du saknar medkänsla. När du fokuserar på att uppnå något utan att du distraheras, då är det passion. Om du har samma passion för att uppfylla andra personers önskan, då är det medkänsla.
20. ATT PRISA DET GUDOMLIGA ELLER AMMABHAGAVAN
Alla heliga skrifter talar om att prisa det Gudomliga. När du prisar det Gudomliga kommer du att få ett överflöd av nåd.
21. FORMELL TACKSAMHET TILL DET GUDOMLIGA
Många gånger säger vi: "Herre du har gjort så mycket för mig, hur kan jag uttrycka min tacksamhet?". Säger detta flyr vi. Till en av de hängivna, berättade hans Antharyamin Bhagavan för honom att det är sant på ett djupare plan. Du kan inte göra någonting, men på det fysiska planet lever du tillsammans med mig, så uttryck din tacksamhet formellt. Genom att göra detta binder du mig och jag är tvungen att göra dig en tjänst. Din personliga relation växer.
1. Vi är här när Avataren är här på denna planet - uttryck tacksamhet.
2. Att se Herrens fötter är en stor välsignelse, vi får Deeksha från Padukas - människor i Indien anser detta som en god karma som har ackumulerats genom många födslar - uttryck tacksamhet.
3. Vi kan lyssna på föreläsningar direkt av Avataren - uttryck tacksamhet.
4. Bara genom att ropa namnet på Amma Bhagavan får vi, utan problem, nåd - uttryck tacksamhet.
5. Avataren ger oss Mukthi (befrielse) - uttryck tacksamhet.
6. AmmaBhagavan finns för att skydda din familj hela tiden - uttryck tacksamhet.
7. Vi har fått möjligheten att tjäna (Seva bhagyam) - uttryck tacksamhet.
8. AmmaBhagavan löser våra hälso- och ekonomiska problem - uttryck tacksamhet.
9. Vi kommer att bevittna de stora förändringar som kommer att hända på den här planeten - uttryck tacksamhet.
10. För mänsklighetens upplysning behöver AmmaBhagavan all din hjälp eftersom du hjälper. De uttrycker tacksamhet. Att AmmaBhagavan uttrycker sin tacksamhet är en förebild för oss.
Kometerna Honda och Elenin uppfyller Maya-, Hopi- och Kristna Profetior
110702Kometerna Honda and Elenin uppfyller Maya-, Hopi- och Kristna
Profetior, när Maya-kalendern närmar sig sitt slut Oktober 28, 2011
Översättning Åsa Johnsson
Många människor har nu hört om det kommande inträdet till det inre solsystemet av komet Elenin (http://elenin.org) och det finns ett stort antal idéer och spekulationer om vad det kan medföra. Kometer har alltid betraktats som förebud för lyckobådande eller (oftast) illavarslande budskap och detta säkert är inget undantag. Idéer har föreslagits att det faktiskt är en brun dvärgstjärna, ett rymdskepp eller orsakar jordbävningar. Höstens kommande två kometer, Honda och Elenin, senare att följas av avgift, oavsett, anländer skapa en sekvens av himlakroppar i luften (www.youtube.com/watch?v=swhme7X7tWI).
Komet Elenin, som har fått den största uppmärksamheten av dessa, beräknas vara på dess kortaste avstånd från jorden runt 16-20 oktober 2011 nära mittpunkten på den sjunde dagen i den nionde vågen (eller Universal Underworld). Särskilt eftersom detta är precis inför den 13 Ahau kulmens datum i den Maya kalendern (28 oktober 2011), är denna komet, oberoende av särskilda karaktär och roll som den har, ett fenomen för slutet av en period i tiden. Dessa kometer anländer mot bakgrund av den globala politiska fördjupningen och det ekonomiska kaos inom institutionerna i världen, som inte är förenliga med den nionde vågen inkommande enhetsmedvetande. Detta ger vid handen en studie av hur denna komet är relaterade till slut- tidens profetior från olika källor.
Jag skrev i Maya kalendern och omvandling av medvetande (2004):
“At least some minor earth changes may thus result from the high frequency change in consciousness that we are now undergoing. But the reversal of cause and effect to generate a doomsday view where such earth changes are presented as the very purpose of creation is untenable. Any possible physical effects should be seen only as by-products of the consciousness field, and most climatic change will still probably be caused by carbon dioxide emissions rather than some purported insidious divine plan for the destruction of the earth through geophysical changes.”
Detta avser den Galaktiska Undervärlden och det är förmodligen riktigt att säga att det är bara med den Universella Undervärldens energier (se figur nedan), som frekvensen av jordens förändringar har blivit så höga att de inte längre kan klassificeras som smärre. Vad som också kommer fram från detta citat är att jag har försökt att skilja mig från många som endast fokuserar på jorden förändringar, som sådana, utan att beskriva dem i ett meningsfullt sammanhang. Jag har betonat att Maya kalendern är i grunden en medvetandeutveckling och att jorden förändringar antingen betjänar denna utveckling eller är spin-off effekter av det. Jag har således påpekat att den nuvarande nionde vågen av Maya kalendern visar en oåterkallelig riktning mot enhetsmedvetande, som kulminerar senare i år.
Figure 1. The Ninth wave of the Mayan calendar leading up to its end date of October 28, 2011 with indications of: A/ Closest distance to comet Honda, B/ Comet Elenin between the earth and the sun and C/ Closest distance to comet Elenin. (For details about the Ninth wave please see www.mayanninthwave.com ).
Vissa har dock också ifrågasatt hur, trots den höga frekvens den nionde vågen av Maya kalendern har, skulle kunna åstadkomma detta nya medvetande på en sån kort tid. Trots det så uttrycks nu dess dagar i världenhetsrevolutionen med sitt epicentrum i norra Afrika och södra Europa (Kvinnor i Saudiarabien har börjat köra bil). Vi bör också vara medvetna om att dess fenomen alltid manifesterar sig mycket starkare i den andra halvan av en våg än den första delen och att världsenhetsrevolutionen kommer att intensifieras. Dag 4 juli som startdatum för andra kan hälften, innebär att de krav på verklig demokrati som höjs för närvarande i södra Europa kommer sedan också att spridas till USA.
En monetär kollaps verkar dessutom mycket sannolikt att komma någon gång i augusti med tanke på hög skuldsättning och andra faktorer i nyckelnationerna. Den Universella undervärlden uppmanar oss alltmer att bli medborgare i Kosmos och sprida våra för närvarande begränsande nationella gränser.
Jordens höga frekvens av förändringar kommer sannolikt att intensifieras, och vad som är av intresse är här, så är ibland himlakroppar synkroniserade med utvecklingen av den kosmiska planen på ett sådant sätt att de skapar hopp framåt. Detta kan också inom en snar framtid komma att hända genom de annalkande kometerna. Trots allt så är det kosmiska livets träd, som Maya kalendern är baserad på, den synkroniserande faktorn bakom alla händelser i universum och vi vet att himlakroppar har spelat en evolutionär roll i förflutna. Dessutom om sådana finjusterade astronomiska händelser har sitt ursprung i den gudomliga planen skulle det också innebära att de ibland kan vara föregångna av profetior.
Jag skall ge två exempel på himlakroppar som har spelat en stödjande roll för utvecklingen av livet på vår planet innan jag går in på profetiorna. 1. Den nuvarande vetenskapen tror att effekterna av en himlakropp av mars storlek har gett upphov till månen för 4.5 miljader år sedan. 2. En meteor drabbade för 65 miljoner år sedan jorden och gav upphov till den Chicxulub kratern i Mexiko och förmörkade himlen under lång tid. Detta ledde till utrotningen av alla dinosaurier och svanödlor på vår planet. Anledningen, att denna till synes destruktiva meteor kallas mirakulös, är att utan den exakta storlek den hade skulle ha gjort att vi inte hade kunnat tala om det idag.
Dinosaurierna skulle fortfarande ha gått runt och ätit alla däggdjur, som visade löfte om ytterligare utveckling. Om denna meteor skulle ha varit två gånger så stor, skulle allt liv på jorden – inklusive däggdjur – utrotats och vi skulle inte heller vara här nu. Denna inverkan var dessutom mycket exakt, så att den banade väg för de högre däggdjur, som uppstod i början av den sjunde dagen i Däggdjurundervärlden. Dessa händelser, bildandet av månen och utrotningen av dinosaurierna, tjänstgjorde således så att ytterligare utveckling av den kosmiska planen och dess syfte kunde fullföljas. Men hur kunde dessa himlakroppar ha sådan noggrannhet i storlek och bana, så att de kunde få till stånd den fortsatta utvecklingen av liv på jorden, det verkar fortfarande obegripligt för en mänsklig själ.
När det gäller antal kometer, som nu närmar sig jorden, anser jag således att vi bör vara öppna för möjligheten att även detta är frambringat av gudomlig intelligens och att det spelar en särskild roll och kommer att förbereda världen för kulmen på denna tid den 28 oktober 2011. Det bör påpekas att det inte finns något som tyder på, att det skulle vara slutet för allt liv på jorden, antingen på tidigare händelser eller i framtiden. Det kommer däremot inte att bli utan offer.
Att diskutera det fysiska samspel som de två kometerna kan komma att ha med jorden – om någon – är svårt att göra just för tillfället. De data som har utgetts från officiella astronomiska siter pekar på att data är alltför obetydliga både i termer av deras storlek och deras omloppsbanor för att ha någon direkt inverkan på vår planet. (http://www.astrosociety.org/elenin/ab2011-72.pdf). Trots det så undrar man hur exakta dessa parametrar är och eftersom dessa ändras över tid, så förblir det skattningar och i nuläget kan ingen säga med säkerhet de exakta värdena av dessa. Men om inte vissa nya data kommer fram från trovärdiga astronomiska källor ser jag ingen anledning till tvivel om att de är små stycken av is. Oberoende av detta, kan dessa kometer fortfarande spela betydande roller i scenariot som "sluttid". Således anser jag att synkroniciteten av Elenin med slutet av Maya kalendern är så övertygande att det förtjänar att bli undersökt hur dessa kometer kan ha samband med vissa antika profetior.
Innan vi undersöker dessa profetior kan vi notera att några har läst in “Extinction Level Event Niburu Is Near” från namnet ELENIN (från dess ryska upptäckare). En mer lämplig betydelse ges av världens ödesdigra monetära system i andra halvan av Universal undervärlden, och då blir det El + Lenin (förebåda Gud + antikapitalistiska revolutionen). I de pågående diskussionerna har flera förslag också gjorts om att komet Elenin är ett bemannat rymdskepp och att de krafter, som är inblandade i en konspiration, bunkrar byggnader för sig själva och håller sina tillvägagångssätt hemligt för människor i stort. Må vara som det är med det, för även om det ena är sant tror jag inte att det ändras mycket för oss i den nuvarande situationen.
Den för närvarande mest populära idén om komet Elenin är att den är relaterat till Nibiru, som är en hypotetisk brun dvärgföljeslagare till vår sol, omgiven av en Planet X föreslagna återkomst. Förekomsten av Nibiru föreslogs från början av Zecharia Sitchin baserade på hans tolkning av sumeriska texter, men innan han gick bort förra året trodde han inte att det hade något att göra med 2012 och det är faktiskt mycket svårt att förstå varför det skulle ha det. Idén om att Nibiru skulle återvända 2012 eller mer specifikt på 21 december 2012 stöds inte av någon som helst bevisning.
Nibiru har bevakats av miljoner på YouTube och medverkat i en konstig blandning med Sitchins idéer och Mayakalenderns felaktiga slutdatum. Medan förespråkarna för denna idé talar mycket om mörkläggning och konspirationer, finns det faktiskt inga bevis att Nibiru finns. Dessutom är det diskutabelt om 2012 har någonting med Nibiru att göra eftersom ingen forntida Maya profetia antyder dess existens. Nibirus förhållande till 2012 blir sedan ännu mer diskutabelt när du inser att dess förespråkare har ersatt Mayakalenderns diagram av evolution med de föreslagna effekterna av denna hypotetiska planet, som en förklaring till den mänskliga händelseutvecklingen. Personligen ser jag ingen anledning att anamma en idé som saknar grund i modern vetenskap eller antika profetior.
Eftersom det har fått sådan en enorm popularitet, ofta i samarbete med ett föreslaget polskifte och återföring av jorden rotation, är det möjligt att det efterliknar ett annat scenario som faktiskt kommer att ske, men med en annan orsak. Kan det t ex vara så att den kollektivt delade vision inte är sann, utan att det pekar på en annalkande komet och att denna sammanfaller, inte med ett elektromagnetiskt polskifte, utan med en förskjutning av polaritetsmedvetande på ett sätt som vi vet kommer att hända i Maya kalendern? Hopiprofetian är en annan källa att överväga om Elenin (och dess föregångare Honda) eftersom denna komet kan vara den blå stjärnan Kachina – the Eye of God – som är en av dess tecken på slutet av tiden.
"And this is the Ninth and Last Sign: You will hear of a dwelling-place in the heavens, above the earth, that shall fall with a great crash. It will appear as a blue star… These are the Signs that great destruction is coming. The world shall rock to and fro. The white man will battle against other people in other lands -- with those who possessed the first light of wisdom. There will be many columns of smoke and fire such as White Feather has seen the white man make in the deserts not far from here. Only those which come will cause disease and a great dying. Many of my people, understanding the prophecies, shall be safe. Those who stay and live in the places of my people also shall be safe. Then there will be much to rebuild. And soon -- very soon afterward -- Pahana will return. He shall bring with him the dawn of the Fifth World. He shall plant the seeds of his wisdom in their hearts. Even now the seeds are being planted. These shall smooth the way to the Emergence into the Fifth World.”
Min intuition säger mig att Elenin faktiskt är den blå stjärnan, som enligt ovanstående verkar antyda någon slags nära nedslag. För att vara säkra på detta måste vi vänta och se vilken färg den har. Uppmärksamma att det nionde och sista tecken på Hopiprofetian motsvarar vad produceras av den nionde och högsta vågen av Mayakalendern. Kanske denna komet faktiskt också är ett tecken på den rapporterande Quetzalcoatl, plymbefjädrade ormen, aztekiska/Toltek profetians. För det tredje; det finns meddelanden från de kristna profeterna från det senaste århundradet (http://olrl.org/prophecy/daysdark.shtml), som säger att i slutet av tiden kommer att finnas tre dagar av mörker. Detta ger en intressant parallell med vad Maya äldste säger och för detta kan du kontakta ett videoklipp av Maya äldre Don Alejandro Oxlaj (www.youtube.com/watch?v=vcaez8jn2Zg). som en del av Shift of the Ages-filmen (www.shiftoftheages.com), där han talar om dessa kommande tre dagar av mörker. Jag har tidigare varit mycket skeptisk till denna idé, eftersom det har känts utanför av vad som är fysiskt möjligt, men eftersom samma vision har kommit från andra, helt oberoende källor, blir det lättare att acceptera. Det kan också finnas en mekanism som kan förklara det nu. Några YouTube klipp har således att föreslagit att, när kometen Elenin passerar mellan jorden och solen (www.youtube.com/watch?v=Afhmhfzjiho), som förväntas ske runt 25 september 2011 kommer att finnas tre dagar av mörker.
Jag tror inte att denna förutsägelse åtnjuter stöd av professionella astronomer, och trots det, saker kan komma att ske på ett sätt som är för närvarande svårt att förstå. Det är trots allt när vi kommer till slutet på de nio Undervärldarna den 28 oktober 2011, som omfattar totalt 16 miljarder år av evolution, som dessa tillsammans manifesterar "i deras fullständiga regalierna" i enlighet med Tortuguero monumentet. Jag anser alltså, att vi har anledning att förvänta oss att skaparen kan ha några överraskningar, som väntar oss till slut för att förvandla denna värld till en av harmoni.
Dramatiken kring scenariot av det kommande slutet av Mayakalendern belyses av det faktum att det finns två kometer, som blir synliga i den andra halvan av den nionde vågen. Före Elenin, kommer kometen Honda att vara på dess närmaste avstånd (0.077 AU) från jorden i början av den femte natten den 17 augusti 2011. Det som gör detta intressant är att det finns flera profetior som talar om två kometer som signalerar, och spelar en unik roll, i slutet av tiden. Helen Tzima Otto har skrivit en viktig trilogi av böcker (varav den sista kallas A Five Year Plan in the Divine Economy: The Timing of the Divinely-Ordained Events, The Verenikia Press, 2011) som kan vara absolut nödvändig för vår förståelse av det kommande scenariot.
Dessa är seriösa böcker att även lägga till kritiska argumentet mot popkulturen slutdatum Maya kalendern: 21 december 2012 (hon påpekar att det starkaste argumentet för dess förespråkare verkar vara att de flesta människor tror att detta är slutdatum). Trilogin beskriver de relativt utbredda sluttidsprofetior från nyare kristna profeter, där de beskriver tillkomsten av ett par av kometer. (Anmärkning; dessa profeter är inte amerikanska televangelister, utan människor, ofta av ödmjukt ursprung, som tillhör de katolska eller grekisk-ortodoxa traditionerna. Det förtjänar också att påpekas att dessa profetior hänvisar till kometer och inte till planeter eller bruna dvärgar.) Vi bör notera att Ottos böcker skrevs utan kunskap eller omnämnande av det faktum att kometen Elenin ens hade upptäckts den 10 december 2010 eller att kometen Honda skulle föregå det för att inse vikten av dessa profetior. Hennes omfattande redovisning av profetior i två olika kometer skrevs alltså inte att förklara den ganska ovanliga situationen vi råkar vara i just nu precis som Mayakalendern är närmar sig sitt slut. För två kometer ska visas i sådan närhet till detta är naturligtvis ett betydligt mer osannolik fenomen än för bara en att göra detta.
Budskapet från dessa profetior är att ett par av två kometer kommer att signalera en brådskande överlämnande till och omvandla till Guds vilja innan det är för sent. Eftersom jag har tidigare hävdat att syftet med den nionde vågen är att få en förändrad relation till Gud, enhetsmedvetande, kommer detta inte som en överraskning. Enligt med dessa profetior kommer den första kometen att vara associerad med upplysningens medvetande som ett tecken på att en övernaturlig natur kommer att börja visas. När den andra kometen far förbi, kallas tuktandets komet, kommer att de tre dagarna i mörkret inträffa. Mot bakgrund av vad vi vet om Mayakalenderns kulminerade den 28 oktober 2011 verkar det uppenbart att de två kometerna Honda och Elenin är allvarliga kandidater att uppfylla dessa profetior.
Ovan rekommenderas sluttidens profetior människor att stanna i sina hem med välsignade ljus och inte titta ut genom fönstren när dessa kometer drar förbi. De insisterar på ständig bön i tre dagar medan vi överväger hur vi kan ha förolämpat Gud. Detta blir meningsfullt om vi skall kunna bli helt öppna/tranparanta och uppnå enhetsmedvetande, så kommer vi att behöva lysa upp de mörka delarna av vår varelse och alla negativa åtgärder från vårt förflutna. Det är då intressant att notera att Mayaäldern Don Alejandro Oxlaj, i en intervju jag gjorde med honom för fem år sedan, rekommenderade att de tre dagarna i mörker bör ägnas åt kontemplation och meditation. Hur mycket av dessa profetior som är metaforer är svårt att säga, liksom vad som menas med "dagar", men mestadels gäller det som ett mycket bokstavligt fysiskt scenario. Vi måste förbereda oss andligt för detta genom att göra vad vi kan för att ställa saker och ting till rätta, men enligt olika profetior också behöver vi förbereda oss på ett mer praktiskt sätt.
Om Elenin är denna andra komet skulle det innebära att många människor, vid tidpunkten för dess närmaste avstånd från jorden, kommer att vara rädda. På samma sätt som Hopi talar om den stora reningen sägs det i dessa kristna profetior senare att endast de som är rena kommer att överleva den här händelsen genom inte bli underkuvade av fruktan. Flera profetior talar om någon form av störning av jordens position och stora jordbävningar så att en stor del av mänskligheten inte kommer att leva för att befolka jorden. Man säger emellertid också att vi inte ska vara rädda för dessa händelser och ha tro på att världen kommer att fortsätta. Det finns omfattande beskrivningar på Internet som läsaren kan konsultera om sådana profetior om tre dagar av mörker och det kommer att vara upp till varje individ att besluta hur man ser på dem. Det här kan nog låta hemskt, men kan det också betraktas som en möjlighet att rensa mörkret från oss, något som är en nödvändighet om en ny värld med människor i harmoni skall kunna födas av det kaos som nu kommer att fördjupas ytterligare.
Jag ser tre olika möjligheter hur dessa tre dagar av mörker kan frambringas i samarbete med Elenin. 1. Kometen har en så stor svans att det täcker solen (mindre troligt). 2. Kometen kommer så nära att det destabiliserar jorden (även mindre troligt). 3. Det mest sannolika kräver en viss ytterligare bakgrund till varför det finns geologiska jorden ändringar till att börja med: jordbävningar visas på grund av kontinentaldriften på ytan av jorden, som har sitt ursprung i konvektionsströmmar i dess magma. En betydande kontinentaldrift syftar till att skapa en global hjärna, som människorna måste vara i resonans med för att manifestera den kosmiska planen. I mina böcker Solving the Greatest Mystery of Our Time (2001) and The Purposeful Universe (2009) beskriver jag hur uppdelning av världen i två kontinentala block är korrelerade med förändringar i Mayakalendern (i den 2:a vågen). Vi vet också att vissa vågor, som sjunde och nionde, inleddes av stora jordbävningar (9.2) i Lissabon och Japan år 1755 och 2011, respektive. Jag anser att de sistnämnda jordbävningarna skett eftersom justeringar har skett i kärnan i jorden för att anpassa sig till en ny polaritetsmedvetande vid aktivering av nya vågor med högre frekvenser. Det står alltså klart att kontinentaldrift och jordbävningar i en mycket allmän uppfattning följer Mayakalendern. Det är bara att detta hjälper oss inte att förutsäga många små jordbävningar eller deras exakta placering.
På grund av behovet av en sådan justering för överföringen av enhetsmedvetandet misstänker jag att seismisk aktivitet kommer att fortsätta med en intensiv hastighet under hela den nionde vågen. Men, om flera vågor har sett stora geologiska omvälvningar på sina inledande 7:e dagar, bör vi inte förvänta oss större förödelse också omkring tiden när alla nio vågorna samtidigt kommer att förverkligas den 28 oktober 2011? Detta kulminerande på Maya kalendern kan innebära ett behov av en dramatisk justering av den jordens inre kärna och följaktligen massiv seismisk aktivitet på jordens yta.
Ankomsten av Elenin, den möjliga blå stjärnan, skulle sedan helt enkelt "råka" förekomma i synkronicitet med jordbävningar, som i själva verket är resultatet av en finjustering av den globala hjärnan för att skapa resonans med det nya fältets enhetsmedvetande. Den geologiska aktiviteten som förväntas när kalendern tar slut skulle generera så många utbrott och gaser så att himlen skulle bli förmörkad under tre dagar. Den justerade kärnan i jorden prioriterar automatiskt de som har en högt utvecklad resonans med fältet enhetsmedvetande och styrs av det. I det här scenariot uppdykandet av den blå stjärnan synkroniseras bara med jordbävningen och fungerar som en budbärare, men inte spela någon orsakande roll för det.
Denna modell kan vara svår att förstå för dem som vill ha mer mekaniska förklaringar till jordens förändringar som till exempel Elenin, Nibiru, HAARP eller bara slumpmässiga händelser. Ännu, bevis för skapandevågor Mayakalendern finns där för alla att studera i mina böcker och det finns en anledning att Maya kallar sin kalender heliga. Anledningen är att den beskriver en gudomlig plan, som utvecklas genom nio processer i sju dagar och sex nätter. Vad vi bevittnar nu är kulmen på denna gudomliga plan, en kulmen, som kan förväntas vara ganska spektakulär och det är därför som vi kan hitta viktig information för Mayakalendern också i Bibeln och Koranen. I slutändan är det Gud, som är dirigenten, som osannolikt skulle vilja se världen i katastrof (eller gå under) efter 16 miljarder år av evolution. Det beror på att Mayakalendern beskriver en gudomligt iscensatt plan, som jag misstänker att sluttidsscenariot åstadkommer exakt vad det är avsett för och det är inte slutet av livet på jorden. Utan sådana kunskaper, att livet på jorden är resultatet av en gudomlig plan, kan grunden för tron på mänsklighetens framtid lätt försvinna.
Det kan hävdas att det inte är så viktigt exakt vilken mekanism – komet, space ship, Nibiru eller kosmisk plan – som utlöser detta sluttidsscenario. Vad som kanske är det viktigaste, är hur vi relaterar till det och omvandlingen av det mänskliga sinnet som det innebär. Det blir dock en konstig praktisk konsekvens, om du tror på inverkan från space eller processer inneboende i skapandet, när det gäller hur du förbereder dig själv. Om det kommer att finnas en risk för att en himlakropp störtar är den logiska konsekvensen att söka skydd under jord. Om å andra sidan det blir jordbävningar då de evolutionära processerna kommer till ett slut, som jag har föreslagit, är det logiskt att söka skydd i bergen eller ute på havet. De, som är i resonans med enhetsmedvetandet som överförs av kärnan i jorden, vet vad de skall göra.
När vi kommer till den 28 oktober 2011, kommer dualitetsfältet på en kosmisk nivå att vara trancenderat och en övergång till enhetsmedvetande kan mycket väl vara en förutsättning för överlevnad i den nya världen. De profetior som är associerade med de två kometerna tycks vara i linje med några av de slutsatser, som jag tidigare har gjort, när det gäller den nionde vågen. Det kan vara t ex att vi flyttar de energier som betjänar våra egon till att betjäna den gudomliga planen och att vi verkligen måste åta oss att göra det för att en harmonisering av världen att äga rum. Detta är också anledningen till att de åren, som jag har genomgående betonat den medvetandeaspekt av Maya kalendern, att säga att det oåterkalleligt går mot enhet och ljus, eftersom om den viktigaste aspekten i kalendern ignoreras, det verkligen skulle vara mycket lite hopp för mänskligheten.
De profetiska betydelser, som jag här har tilldelat dessa kometer, är möjligheter och inte vetenskaplig visshet. Jag känner ändå intuitivt, att något viktigt kommer att hända relaterade till dessa kometer, vilket ingen just nu kanske kan förstå helt eller ha en saklig grund att analysera. Om vi kombinerar vår kunskap om den evolutionära modellen i Mayakalendern med olika sluttidsprofetior, så blir det inte konstigt att de två kometerna är budbärare av omvandlingen av gamla och födelsen av en ny värld. På detta sätt kan vi se en perfekt samstämmighet mellan profetior med ett varierat ursprung och Mayakalenderns modell för att de nio Undervärldarna och de tretton himlarna kulminerar den 28 oktober 2011 (13 Ahau). Med denna kunskap är frågan i huvudsak hur vi skall använda kunskapen och detta kan behöva diskuteras grundligt tiden framåt.
Enligt Hopiprofetian skall Kachina stoppa sin dans och lyfta sin mask när den blå stjärnan visas för Den Stora Reningen. Detta tror jag anspelar på vad jag under många år har sagt hela tiden i alla mina föreläsningar. När filtret (maskerna) försvinner, kommer vi inte längre att vara den gudomliga planens marionetter (Kachinas) och vi kan fritt och skapa utan att vara underordnat de gudomliga evolutionära processer som beskrivs av Mayakalendern. När en ny värld är född kommer efter 28 oktober 2011, kommer livet ögonblick för ögonblick för människor nu att vara fria att skapa verkligheten i enlighet med deras nyligen förvärvade enhetsmedvetande. Detta är födelsen av en ny värld av fred, som är lika mycket en del av dessa profetior som de svårigheter som kommer att föregå det.
Carl Johan Calleman
Seattle, June 23, 2011 (3 Ben)
Carl Johan Calleman is the author of Solving the Greatest Mystery of Our Time: The Mayan Calendar (Garev 2001), The Mayan Calendar and the Transformation of Consciousness (Bear and Co, 2004) and The Purposeful Universe (Bear and Co, 2009). His web site is www.calleman.com. See also www.mayanninthwave.com and www.treeoflifecelebration.com.
Comets Honda and Elenin fulfill Mayan, Hopi and Christian Prophesies
110623Please feel free to post translate and disseminate in its original form!
Dear Friends,
I have written a new article entitled "Comets Honda and Elenin fulfill Mayan, Hopi and Christian
Prophesies as the Mayan calendar approaches its end on October 28, 2011" that you can find on my web site: http://www.calleman.com/content/articles/Comets_Honda_Elenin.htm
Greetings
Carl Johan
Transcript from Sri Bhagavan on Preparing for Weekly Meditation Webcasts
110614Transcript from Sri Bhagavan on Preparing for Weekly Meditation Webcasts:
Your role is to feel helpless and my role is to raise your kundalini. Once the kundalini is raised, all things will naturally happen. You have been sufficiently programmed. For example, if you have sufficiently contemplated on the teaching given to you and then feel helpless, then when I raise your kundalini, that teaching will become your realization. If you have not done your homework, you may not get much. The kundalini will still rise, but would not give any great result. That's why we give you one week's time to contemplate on the teachings. You must almost commit it to memory. Then as you feel helpless, the moment you feel helpless I'll be able to raise your kundalini and the teaching will become your insight, your realization.
Teachings for Weekly Meditation Webcasts:
June 12 -June 18
The Awakened One is one with the what is. The unawakened one is one with the what should be.
June 5 -11
The awakened one sees the many as the one. The unawakened one sees the one as the many.
May 29- June 4
The awakened one lives in the mystery that life is. The unawakened one tries to understand what life is.
May 22 - May 28
The awakened one whether does or does not do, does not try. The unawakened one whether does or does not do, does try.
May 15 - May 21
The awakened one has no mind. The unawakened one has a mind. The awakened one, having no mind works with the mind of others. The unawakened one having a mind, struggles the mind of others.
May 8 - May 14
The awakened one allows to happen. The unawakened one tries to make things happen one's own way.
May 1 - May 7
The Awakened One is constantly unlearning and therefore continuously unburdened, lives in freedom. The unawakened one is constantly learning and therefore continuously burdened and does not know whatfreedom is and hence what living is.
April 24- April 30
The awakened one does not know or understand, but sees.The unawakened one knows and understands, but does not see.
April 17- April 23
The Awakened One has nothing to defend and therefore does nothing to feel secure. The unawakened one has a lot to defend and therefore must do things to feel secure.
April 10- April 16
The Awakened One sees the imperfect as perfect in itself; and hence rejoices in the way things are. The un-awakened one sees imperfection everywhere; and hence he is unhappy and dissatisfied with the way things are.The un-awakened one must therefore work to change things. This too is perfect for the Awakened One.
April 9-10
The Awakened One has no sense of being and doing. The Awakened One has no vision or goal in mind. There is just doing. The Awakened One is humble, and does not practice humility.The unawakened has a sense of being and doing, and therefore must have a vision or goal in mind. The unawakened must practice humility.
April 2-3
When One is not Awakened One must not behave like one. When One is Awakened One practises nothing. One is just Awake.To be Awake is not a means to an end.To be Awake is an end in itself. When One is not Awake, One must practise goodness. Where there is no goodness One must practise virtue.
Where there is no virtue One must practise ritual conditioning.
March 26-27
Thoughts are subtle, divisive and elusive; and an expression of the self. They wander as they like. They create judgment and a troubled and disturbed mind. They prevent Awareness from happening. The unawakened must learn to direct, to control and to quieten thoughts by ruling over them. The Awakened One has moved beyond judgment, for he has gone beyond thought; as he is always 'Aware'.
March 19-20
The Awakened One does nothing; but leaves nothing undone; for all things are happening all the time around and through the Awakened One.
March 12-13
The Awakened One neither suppresses nor ignores, neither resists nor justifies what is there, inside or outside; but merely is aware of the what is.
March 5-6
The Awakened One does not perceive anything as good or bad; or as right or wrong; and hence has no preferences; and therefore does not try to change the way things are.
February 26-27
The Awakened One achieves nothing; for there is nothing to be achieved.
The Awakened One understands nothing; for there is nothing to be understood.The Awakened One knows nothing; for there is nothing to be known.
February 19-20
The Awakened One knows that there is nothing to learn; what is needed is only to unlearn.
February 12- 13
The Awakened One has no fixed plans and no destination.
The Awakened One accepts oneself; and the world accepts the Awakened One.
The Awakened One knows oneself; and hence has wisdom.
The Awakened One has no conflict with oneself; and hence has true power.
The Awakened One embraces death; for there is no death for the Awakened One.
February 5-6
The Awakened One sees things as they are, and doesnt try to control or shape them. The Awakened One doesnt try to convince others. The Awakened One knows that what is to happen will happen; and what is not to happen will not happen; and that the universe is forever out of control.
January 29-30
The Awakened One does not try to change the world. It is perfect and sacred to the Awakened One.
January 22-23
The Awakened One has no will and no illusions. The Awakened One merely dwells in reality.
January 15-16, 2011
The Awakened One sees the world emerging from the void; therefore accept the world as it is. As the Awakened One accepts the world as it is, the Awakened One is established in the primal Self.
January 8-9, 2011
The Awakened One is open to all people and all situations and flows with them.
January 1-2, 2011
The Awakened One journeys without journeying.
December 25,26 2010
The Awakened One remains unmoving till perfect action arises by
itself. The Awakened One is free of all views and concepts; is One
with the what is.
December 18, 2010
The Awakened One is one with that which was there before the universe was born. It is the one which is eternally present, the unborn and the undying, one without a beginning and an end, ever unchanging, solitary, empty, infinite, blissful, the eternal 'I'.
December 11, 2010
The Awakened One is open to everything and everything falls into place.
December 04, 2010
The Awakened One remains unmoving, and action arises by its self. The Awakened One allows things to come and go like clouds in the sky. The Awakened Ones sustains all beings without trying to.
November 27, 2010
The Awakened One sees the world as himself or herself. Loves and cares for the world as one's self. To the Awakened One all things are perfect as they are.
November 20, 2010
The Awakened One is detached from all things, and hence, is one with everything. Detachment when practiced leads to indifference which is not detachment.
November 13, 2010
The Awakened One is empty and therefore capable. One should not try to empty one's self.
November 06, 2010
The awakened one, acts without doing anything, this cannot be practiced.
October 30, 2010
When judgment stops of its own accord, there is oneness with all that is.
October 23, 2010
When stepping back from your own mind occurs, there is an understanding of all things.
October 16, 2010
Be Yourself.
October 09, 2010
See your self in others, see others in you.
October 02, 2010
Fear is the greatest obstacle on the spiritual path; confront your fears.
September 25, 2010
By being grateful for all that has happened and to the people involved in one's life, one enters the spiritual path.
The shift from Mind to Heart Consciousness
120207THE SHIFT FROM MIND TO HEART CONSCIOUSNESS
Kiesha Crowther "Little Grandmother"
greatmystery.org/events/glastonbury2011.html
There are two great ancient civilizations that today hold the key to living from the heart—the Mayans and the Aboriginal people. They still live from the heart and they are the ones who are teaching us now to start living from the heart again. Since the fall of Atlantis, human civilization has developed in a particular way. We have developed the capacity of our rational minds to the extent that we have made great cities and inventions, and in very recent years have made a huge leap in our discovery of new technologies. We have done some amazing things. But the problem is that we have left the heart behind. We stopped acting from and making decisions from the heart, and from a feeling of connectedness to all of life and to Mother Earth. We have overvalued the rational logical mind, and believe in only what we can see and experience with our bodily senses. This was never how it was intended to be. We are being asked now to start living from the heart again—and this is one of the messages I have been asked specifically to help share and teach.
It is a universal law that I have been taught—that the more loving you are, the more intelligent you become. If you can imagine everything we have created from our minds in the last ten years even—all the advancements and technologies. Yet we still cannot solve some of the most urgent problems facing us today. The largest problem is how to heal what we have done to the Earth already, and how to stop doing what we have been doing to her ever since human beings forgot their connection in the web of life. If we have been able to create so much using just our minds, imagine what we might create if we were operating from the heart! Mind would not be inactive or unused—it would grow much more powerful, because it would be in right relationship to heart—to the source of being, and to creation. If we stop operating from an ego-driven, mental consciousness, we stop striving for meaningless things that gratify only the smallest part of who we are. We stop wasting our mental energy and can start directing every ounce of our hearts and minds to healing the earth and creating bounty for all beings. We could create a paradise on earth, unlike anything we have seen before.
I have been taught by Spirit that Mother Earth is sacred and that human beings will not be allowed to kill her. She is sacred to all life forms in the universe, not just to human beings. If human beings will not be allowed to kill her—then we need to raise our vibration high enough so that we can shift with her into a higher being, because we have been causing her great harm for so long that something major must happen to correct the path we are on, to help her to breathe again. For human beings, the situation is urgent. We must shift into a higher consciousness if we are to remain on planet Earth as her children.
greatmystery.org/events/glastonbury2011.html
JOIN LITTLE GRANDMOTHER ONLINE
Join Little Grandmother from the comfort of your own home. Her workshop and her conference presentations will be available via online video streaming and the sessions will be archived and you can watch anytime at your convenience.
greatmystery.org/events/glastonbury2011virtual.html
The Comet Elenin Carl Johan Calleman
110528Dear Friends,
The comet Elenin is about to enter the inner solar system and it seems to be synchronized with the Mayan calendar as shown in the YouTube presentation by Katihe Bechmann. I do not personally believe that this comet has anything to do with earthquakes on our own planet. I think we should keep our focus on the socio-spiritual transformation that the cosmic evolution scheme is now compelling us to take part in. Nonetheless, the fact that the orbit of this comet is synchronized with the Mayan calendar and its end date of October 28, 2011 may allow for a convergence of prophecies such as the return of Niburu and the three days of darkness that possibly now may come to make sense. I do not necessarily endorse the quality of science in these YouTube clips (if indeed anyone could at this point). Yet, I think the comet Elenin (what is in a name?) may serve to add a cosmic dimension to the evolution of consciousness that the Mayan calendar describes, which we may now want to ponder or reflect upon: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bK21TCNZ5fI.
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Afhmhfzjiho
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=CVs7glXfXzM
After all comets have been seen as harbingers of messages in the past and maybe this is the role also of this one.
These are the times for my teleconference at the midpoint of the third day:http://www.timeanddate.com/worldclock/fixedtime.html?msg=Live+Broadcast+-+5%2F29%2F11+Carl+Calleman+Telephone+Conference+-+Ninth+Wave+Events&iso=20110529T10&p1=234&ah=2 Phone number: (424) 203-8075 code 822940#
Carl Johan
3-4 juli mittpunkten av Nionde Vågen, Carl Johan Calleman
110527Var god sätt upp och sprid!
Vänner,
Om cirka 6 veckor, den 3-4 Juli 2011, kommer vi till mittpunkten inte bara av den Fjärde dagen utan i själva verket av hela den Nionde vågen. Ett utmärkt sätt att fira detta och förverkliga denna vågs inriktning på frihet och enhet är att delta i
The Jerusalem Hug den 3e Juli: http://www.jerusalemhug.org/ som jag också har skrivit en artikel om (på engelska): http://mayanninthwave.com/midpoint-of-the-4th-day/. Den grundläggande idén för Jerusalemkramen är mycket enkel, nämligen att vi genom att uttrycka vår kärlek för denna stad, utan att ta ställning för någon sida i den långvariga konflikt som existerat där, kan hjälpa till att bryta ner de murar, fysiska såväl som mentala, som separerat människor i detta centrum flera religioner.
En del människor kommer att vilja åka till Jerusalem för att vara med om att hålla händer runt dess gamla stad, men vi andra kan också mycket väl delta genom att skapa världsomfattande cirklar, medicinhjul som tjänar som ett deltagande på ett andligt plan och som uppbackning för dem som faktiskt befinner sig på plats. Jag tror att tiden har kommit för oss att låta denna event bli känd och börja organisera events som fungerar som ett deltagande i global skala. Kanske är det så att skapandet av ett Nytt Jerusalem är något som angår alla eftersom det har en sådan omedelbar koppling till fred på jorden. The Jerusalem Hug kommer sedan att upprepas vid Venustransiten den 6e Juni 2012 vilket man kan se som ett sätt fira att vi kommit fram till andra sidan av Mayakalendern, vilket förmodligen kommer att bli en mycket stor event. I Sverige kommer denna event ju också att få en speciell betydelse eftersom den infaller på den 6e juni och innebär en möjlighet att representera nordriktningen i det planetära världsträdet.
Hälsningar
Carl Johan
Tribe of Many Colors - Little Grandmother
110527Dearest Family, my beautiful Tribe of Many Colors,
I know there has been much concern about my being away for the last month or so and many of you have written to find out if I am ok. I'm doing wonderfully! There has been so much work for me trying to finish my forthcoming book, Message for the Tribe of Many Colors, and I’m so happy to say that the book is now finished and going to the editor and will be ready for the public by August 15th! (The book will be available for purchase through my web site as soon as it is released, so check back in). I apologize for my absence—“grandma” has been working so hard!
There are many beautiful things happening on the planet right now from the discovery of an ancient civilization living within the earth in Brazil to the amazing arrival of many star beings all over the planet. The Kogi Mamos also are coming out of the jungle of South America to America as well for the opening of sacred energies here. I will be speaking of these things in my workshops around the world.
I have just arrived back from a personal trip abroad and am now preparing for the tour in Australia beginning next week, so there has been a lot on my plate to say the very least, but please know all is well and I look forward to being more present for all of you very soon. Please know how much I love you all and I am still committed to praying with you each day at 12:00 noon Mountain standard time for the healing of our Mother and our hearts. This is a great time to be alive and to celebrate our lives here on this magnificent planet; it truly is a magical time in which we can see miracles happen all around us. Remember how divine you are, how blessed you are, and remember to have great love in your hearts for each other and your own divine, sacred higher selves...I love you all so very much.
Little Grandmother
Little Grandmother will be visiting Australia, Austria, Egypt, Glastonbury, England and tentatively Holland, Berlin, Germany, Hawaii this year.
The Third day of the Ninth Wave (Universal Underworld)
110524Practically the whole world strongly experienced the frequency increase associated with the beginning of the Ninth wave (Universal Underworld, May 9th, 2011) as this manifested in the earthquake in Japan and the ensuing events. But what is this Ninth wave about? It is easy to see the “chaos” and “catastrophes,” but maybe not so easy to see the overall direction of the process that it carries. I have previously only described the direction of the Ninth wave in very general terms saying that it is about unity consciousness, but exactly what is unity consciousness and how will this manifest through this wave?
To understand this we may begin by studying the Seventh wave that began in 1755 and brought an endarkened unity consciousness to mankind. The Ninth wave also brings a unity consciousness, but one that is enlightened. We have already found a significant parallel between these two waves in that they began with huge Earthquakes, although those as is reasonable, occurred at opposite sides of the Earth, in Lisbon and Japan respectively. Another parallel is that the two waves have started with revolutions to topple existing systems. While the Seventh wave began with the American and French revolutions, whose anti-monarchic nature gradually has spread throughout the world, the revolutions of the Ninth wave have not only rejected monarchic rule, but the phenomenon of dominance and rule over others as such. Thus the Oneness field of consciousness (see below) carried by the Ninth wave will not allow for systems where people give their power away to someone they have elected every four years or so. A deeper freedom based on the sovereignty of all souls is now being called for.
Moreover, the Oneness field of consciousness will not allow for an economic system where the power to print money determines what activities people spend their lives with. The world revolution carried by the Ninth wave potentially develops a much deeper freedom and oneness than either the monarchy of the sixth wave or the democratic institutions of the seventh wave. The driving force behind the world revolution of the ninth wave is the divine guidance that the unity consciousness allows. What is happening in the world today could thus be described equally well in religious/spiritual terms or economic/political. The chief point to realize is that ultimately the course of events, and the breakdown of dominance, is a result of a cosmic plan that has been described by the nine levels of the Mayan calendar with their different polarities (see figure below). Since no human being has any power to change these polarities the overall direction of the cosmic time plan is irreversible.
This consciousness of the Ninth wave was as expected first evident around the midline of the planet at the 12th longitude East between East and West. The opposing polarities of consciousness generated by the 6th and 8th waves led to the collapse of dominance along this line already at the beginning of the seventh day of the Galactic Underworld on November 3, 2010 and two months later the processes surfaced in Tunisia and Egypt. The revolutions there were much aided by the social media networks that had been developed by the Eighth wave, but also showed the emerging role of women and a unity between Muslims and Christians in Egypt where people were singing “we are all one” in Kairo. (That some of this might have been temporarily reversed does not change the overall direction of where things are going).
Different forms of rule generated by the
Yin/Yang-polarities of the different waves
9th Wave - Divine quidance, Eternal Law
8th Wave - No rule
7th Wave - Democracy, Republics
6th Wave - Monarchy, Written Law
5th Wave - Tribal Egalitarianism, Oral Law
This oneness revolution is now spreading notably to a few European nations such as Portugal, Greece and Spain. At first sight this may not seem to be part of the oneness revolution as the demands raised by people are mostly economical and directed against austerity plans determined by the EU and/or IMF/World Bank etc. Yet, the economic system of the world is far from based on oneness and separates people in haves and have-nots and many are now finding this unacceptable. These European nations are also, like Arab North Africa, located around the planetary midline and so they are participating in the process at a relatively early point of the Ninth wave. As the Ninth wave continues more and more aspects of our world that are inconsistent with oneness will be highlighted and events, sometimes forced upon us by catastrophes like the one in Japan, will trigger calls for radical change. Technologies, which are not based on unity with the Earth will increasingly come to be rejected. The Ninth wave will however not generate a linear process of change towards oneness and people in the far West (like the US) and far East (China) are going to be affected in ways that are different from what happens in Europe or the Arab world.
Regarding the West here are currently discussions going on as to when a very likely collapse of the value of the US dollar will take place (which may be looked upon as part of the Oneness revolution) and some people think that it is natural that it will happen in the Fifth night (August 18 - September 4). My own view is however different and I tend to think that a dollar collapse may come to happen in steps during days 3, 4 and 5. Since such a collapse is not destructive from the perspective of Oneness it seems logical to me that it would manifest in a day or a series of days. I instead tend to think that the fifth night may come to carry a temporary return to the old monetary system in some form, which from the perspective of the Earth is what is dangerous.
Assuming that we are approaching a collapse of the value of the dollar and the world’s monetary system (with the immense distress it would probably mean) it is truly time to think about what this should or could be replaced with. Understandably, many people ask how they should protect themselves as individuals from such a collapse and find ways of investing constructively. This may or may not be possible even if there are suggestions as to how to do it on the Internet. The deeper question is to ask how to respond as a planet to a monetary collapse in a situation where the new consciousness of oneness will not allow dominance based on money to return, at least not in the long term. This is by definition not a discussion that the mainstream media will bring up since it would risk precipitating the events that it seeks to avoid.
On my own part I essentially see three different systems that could replace the current use of money if there is a monetary collapse. The first is that all people go on and continue to do what they already have been doing and ignore the fact that there is no exchange of money between them. The farmers continue to produce food, the truck drivers continue to deliver it to the cities, people stay in their homes without paying rents or mortgages, etc without any exchange of money taking place between them. This is probably the best response to a monetary collapse, but it would hardly be consistent with existing laws and contracts based on lower levels of consciousness. It would naturally also create problems for many people who have primarily been working with handling money if this is no longer used and it is naïve to believe that such a shift could happen without much conflict. A second alternative way to deal with a monetary collapse would be to create a system of food stamps or rationing that would allow for everyone to have a secured access to the necessities of life. A third alternative is to create local currencies as a basis of exchange. The problem with this is that it would not include the many people that are too young or old or are sick or disabled to be able to offer exchangeable services. There may be other alternative ways to handle a monetary collapse and these are only a few hints in a discussion that I think is now necessary as to how to respond to a such with a perspective of serving the whole.
The above remarks also have as a consequence a very different definition of oneness than many currently have and give more emphasize to its practical manifestations than to the mental or spiritual state of an individual. This is not to say that methods that may help individuals attain states of unity consciousness would not be valuable. In fact I believe that to be successful the world revolution that has not started must be divinely guided, and be based on a desire by its participants to serve the divine plan. Yet, this definition of oneness does imply that a world of oneness cannot be created without a practical collective effort. After all, who we are is largely defined by our relationships and so only by transforming the nature o our relationships with others in a very profound and practical way can a world in harmony be born. No one knows how this world oneness revolution will play out in its details, but we know that it is irreversible and that it is likely to intensify as we approach the culmination of the Mayan calendar on October 28, 2011. This incidentally is the time when the comet Elenin is at its shortest distance from Earth and if nothing else this may serve to guide us to cosmic consciousness in a spiritual sense, which ultimately is what this political and economical change provides a basis for. The completion date of the Mayan calendar however only means that the “final field” of consciousness is then established on our planet. It does seem likely that it will then still take some “time” after this date until a harmonious world settles, but “time” will then never again be the same.
Carl Johan Calleman,
Seattle, WA
On the day 10 Alligator and the third day
of the third day of the Ninth wave (May 22, 2011)
World Oneness Day - May 20th 2011
110519Namaste,
On the occasion of World Oneness Day - May 20th, We invite all the Trainers and Deeksha Givers to join us for a Global Deeksha. The World Oneness Day is a special day that leaves behind a profound impact on human consciousness in world history. Each one has a significant role in this Divine scheme of things.
On this magnificent day let's all come together and share the Deeksha with the whole of humanity from where we live. Sri Amma Bhagavan will be blessing us with enormous Deeksha power whereby our consciousness level would be elevated and we would be thereafter able to help the humanity by giving more powerful deekshas than ever before.
On this day the Oneness Community across the planet will be gathering at 10 am and 10 pm IST on May 20th 2011 and will be transferring the Deeksha to the whole world. Each one of your sincere participation, prayers, deekshas and love would go a long way in creating more human beings filled with divine consciousness.
Procedure:
1. Invoke the Presence of Sri Amma Bhagavan by chanting the moolamantra 7 times.
2. Take an intent for global awakening.
3. Visualize the globe in front of your eyes and give deeksha.
4. Express your gratitude for being a part of this vision.
Note:
1. Deeksha can be given as an individual or you could gather as a group.
2. You could give deeksha either of the times mentioned or both(10 am and 10 pm IST)
Lets all join together to make a difference!
Thanks,
Oneness University
Sri Bhagavan Teaching - The four Factors of Success
110513SRI BHAGAVAN TEACHING - THE FOUR FACTORS OF SUCCESS
View video http://www.worldonenesscommunity.com/video/the-four-factors-of-success
There are four factors that are essential for the success of an individual. First and foremost you need a clear vision. A life without a vision is like a journey without a destination. Every one of you has an option: either to drift along like a dry leaf carried hither and tither by the winds, or fly like an arrow towards its goal, and the universe would help you reach where you want.
The universe is like Aladdin's magic lamp. It will give you whatever you seek.
Secondly, you need to have a focused mind, a mind that is capable of attention, that is capable of hard thinking.
Thirdly, you ought to have excellent relationships within the family.
A strong civilization stands on the foundation of a strong family.
In a world of accelerated change it requires a very loving relationship between children and parents to keep ourselves sane. If your relationship with your parents is set right all problems whether with your academics or your career would be solved miraculously.
Ultimately, you need to live in a state free of conflict, a state of existence where you feel connectedness and love.
Sri Bhagavan Teaching - How should I relate to the Divine
110513SRI BHAGAVAN TEACHING - HOW SHOULD I RELATE TO THE DIVINE?
View Video http://www.worldonenesscommunity.com/video/how-should-i-relate-to-the
First of all the divine you must cast the divine in a human mold, like father, mother, brother, sister, friend or whatever you like.
So, the divine must be cast in a human mold. And then suppose you've cast the divine in the mold of a father. You must relate to the divine as you would relate to your father.
Suppose you've cast the divine into the mother's mold. Then you must relate to the divine as you would relate to your mother. The relationship you have with your mother or your father that is the way you've got to relate.
It is very important that you cast the divine in the best relationship you have.
Suppose your relationship is very good with your mother, then the best thing is to cast the relationship in your mother's mold. Suppose the relationship is very good with your husband. Better to cast the divine in the husband's mold. Suppose the relationship is very good with your friend then you would cast the divine in a friend's mold.
And then start relating to the divine as you would start relate to them. You must start with conversations you could ask your questions, you could ask for help.
Initially, you might get the answers in the form of a thought or insight. But as it grows, it will be a real communication.
Then how are you to be sure it's the divine who's talking? You must ask to solve problems, to get you out of difficulties and you must ask for blessings. If it happens then you must be sure that you are in touch with the divine and in case the divine is not answering your prayers, then you should ask for an explanation as to why yours prayers are not being answered.
If you are really in touch with the divine, the divine would then show you why your prayers are not being answered. That is the way, slowly you have to build up your bond with the divine.
Sri Bhagavan Teaching - Definition of Mukthi
110513SRI BHAGAVAN - DEFINITION OF MUKTHI
View Video http://www.worldonenesscommunity.com/video/defintion-of-mukthi
Mukthi could be defined in various ways. The general definition which I give for mukthi is the liberation of senses. Now, when you see, you do not see without the interference of the mind. If you can see without the mind interfering, that is mukthi. If you can hear without the mind interfering, that is mukthi. The same applies to smell, touch and even thought. Thought also can be observed without you getting involved with a thought.
Now, what is happening is when you are thinking, you think you are thinking. But, it is actually possible to see thoughts flow as though they are independent of you. This is a physical reality. Actually you can see thoughts. Any kind of thought would be coming to you and would be going out of you and you can watch them.
So, this is the state of mukthi. That is, the complete liberation of the senses from the control of the mind.
It's only such a being who is actually living. Wherever the mind is in control you are not living. When the mind is not there, then you are actually living.
That's why when people ask me, "What is the purpose of life?", my answer is, "if you are living you wouldn't ask that question." The purpose of life is to live. What does that mean? To live the life of the senses. The senses must be independent and free of the mind.
Now what's happening is you are not at all experiencing reality. Reality to you is what is flowing through the senses. Now, all the time you are interpreting whatever data is coming into you. You look at a tree and you say it's a big tree, small tree, green tree, mango tree, this, that. All the time comments are going on.
When you sit down to eat food, you are not eating food. You start worrying about your office or your family or this or that, or comment on the food itself. The food is not being experienced.
That's why I've said in the mahavakyas (great sayings), if you experience reality as it is, then you will just experience bliss. You will see this whole creation is perfect. It's the most beautiful thing and that you are already in heaven. You have made it into a hell.
It is possible to liberate the senses from the clutches of thought. So, thought is necessary when required, otherwise why should thought interfere. There is no need for thought to come and interfere. It's an actual experience.
Now, when the senses become free of the control of thought or the mind, then we say you have discovered unconditional joy, unconditional love. Such is this joy that you will feel that you are connected with everybody. So, you'll discover true love. So, this true love and this true joy are not separate things. They're all one and the same and this is a natural occurrence. That is what you are designed to be. That is what human being is supposed to experience all the time.
Since you do not experience that, your lives have become miserable and to escape that misery you have created various escape routes through which all the time you are escaping from your misery, which misery itself is because you are not experiencing reality. That is why people take to alcohol or to drugs, or sex or whatever that is, because otherwise what is there in your life. It becomes meaningless.
So, the whole attempt of this movement is to help you experience reality as it is. When that happens you'll discover unconditional love and unconditional joy. You'll feel connected with everything and everybody. You do feel you are a separate individual. You do not live for yourself alone anymore, because the yourself has become everybody. You live for the sake of humanity.
This is not a concept or some imagined thing. This is a day-to-day reality once you become enlightened, or you become a muktha (awakened or liberated being), and thousands of people have already got into this state. Even right now there are a few people sitting here who are in this state.
Sri Bhagavan Teaching - Loving Oneself
110513SRI BHAGAVAN TEACHING -Loving Oneself
Video Link:
View Video: http://vimeo.com/22878657
Bhagavan, it was said that, one should love oneself. What is the need for us to love oneself?
When we say love yourself, see all of you have got what we might call a negative self also. There is a negative side to all of you, which western psychologists will call the 'Shadow Self'. We will call it the negative side, because there is a slight difference in the term and contents. Now each of you, for example have you not spoken lies? So many lies, average lies per day is sixty- any human being. But would you like to accept that you are a liar? No.
And sometimes planned lies, because survival. I am not blaming you. I am just telling what is happening there. But then would you like to see that? You don't like to see it. Would you like that aspect? No, you don't like it. And you say oh I love you so much. I wish all the blessings for you; inside, full of hatred. So inside there is lot of fear, but appear to be very brave. You talk very bravely, but only fear inside. So for all the so called images that you are giving, there is a negative counterpart.
There cannot be anything without a negative counterpart. You have jealousy, anger, hatred, violence, lust. You put it into the most peaceful man in the world, while you will be plotting his death and secretly hoping a lorry will go over him, he will be destroyed. But say, I wish you good luck. This negative side, you have put under the carpet and it is hiding there, which is unconscious. There it is stinking. From there it is creating all the trouble for you. When we say love yourself, we are telling love 'That'. Love that ??? no? the terrible thing. You are hating it. You are hating it, you are afraid of it, you dislike it, you pretend it's not there. It is like getting married to some lady somewhere and saying, I don't know about her, she is not my wife.
Similarly it is all there, this side is yours. No human being can be on this planet without this negative side. It is just not possible. So who are the great people? The Mahatma Gandhis and let us say the Ramanas, the Budhaas. What is their basic journey? They know it is there and they accept it and they love it. Whereas you, you don't see it, you don't accept it, you don't love it. You are running away from it all the time or pretending it is not there.
So the journey on spirituality is the first and most important journey is you dig up all these things. Remove the carpet, bring it out. It is so, that's all. You are helpless, powerless people. Nobody has got any power anything. We only imagine we have got. It is there. It is dominating you. It is crushing you. So, that is what is happening. So, you must dig up and come to terms with it. We can't do anything about it because that contamination is there. The air is contaminated, consciousness is contaminated. It is there. You are only pretending as though it is not there.
And the journey of spirituality is you first say yes, I am this and confront it. And then you see a miracle will take place. That miracle you find out what it is. So this is what we mean when we say love yourself. All this dirt, this muck, which nobody likes- when you don't like it, when you are even afraid of it, how will you love it? But then it is possible to love it and say yes, it is so. It is there, what can you do about it? You can't do anything about it. So that is what we mean by saying love yourself.
Audio webcast teaching with Sri Bhagavan
110430Audio webcast teaching for week of April 24th - 30th with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One does not know or understand, but sees.
The unawakened one knows and understands, but does not see."
---
Audio webcast teaching for week of April 17th - 23rd with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One has nothing to defend and therefore does nothing to feel secure.
The unawakened one has a lot to defend and therefore must do things to feel secure."
---
Audio webcast teaching for week of April 10th - 16th with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One sees the imperfect as perfect in itself; and hence rejoices in the way things are.
The un-awakened one sees imperfection everywhere; and hence he is unhappy and dissatisfied with the way things are.
The un-awakened one must therefore work to change things. This too is perfect for the Awakened One. "
---
Audio teaching for April 9th /10th webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One has no sense of being and doing. The Awakened One has no vision or goal in mind. There is just doing. The Awakened One is humble, and doesnot practice humility.
The unawakened has a sense of being and doing, and therefore must have a vision or goal in mind. The unawakened must practice humility. "
---
Audio teaching for April 2nd/3rd webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
"When One is not Awakened One must not behave like one.
When One is Awakened One practises nothing.One is just Awake.
To be Awake is not a means to an end.
To be Awake is an end in itself.
When One is not Awake One must practise goodness.
Where there is no goodness One must practise virtue.
Where there is no virtue One must practise ritual conditioning. "
---
Audio teaching for March 26th/27th webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
"Thoughts are subtle, divisive and elusive; and an expression of the self. They wander as they like. They create judgement and a troubled and disturbed mind. They prevent Awareness from happening. The unawakened must learn to direct, to control and to quieten thoughts by ruling over them. The Awakened One has moved beyond judgement, for he has gone beyond thought; as he is always 'Aware'. "
---
Audio teaching for March 19th/20th webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One does nothing; but leaves nothing undone; for all things are happening all the time around and through the Awakened One. "
---
Audio teaching for March 12th/13th webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One neither suppresses nor ignores, neither resists nor justifies what is there, inside or outside; but merely is aware of the what is. "
----
Audio teaching for March 5th/6th webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One does not perceive anything as good or bad; or as right or wrong; and hence has no preferences; and therefore doesnot try to change the way things are."
------
Audio teaching for February 26th/27th webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One achieves nothing; for there is nothing to be achieved.
The Awakened One understands nothing; for there is nothing to be understood.
The Awakened One knows nothing; for there is nothing to be known."
------
Audio teaching for February 19th/20th webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
" The Awakened One knows that there is nothing to learn; what is needed is only to unlearn. "
-----
Audio teaching for February 12th/13th webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One has no fixed plans and no destination.
The Awakened One accepts oneself; and the world accepts the Awakened One.
The Awakened One knows oneself; and hence has wisdom.
The Awakened One has no conflict with oneself; and hence has true power.
The Awakened One embraces death; for there is no death for the Awakened One."
------
Audio teaching for February 5th/6th webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
" The Awakened One sees things as they are, and doesn't try to control or shape them.
The Awakened One doesn't try to convince others.
The Awakened One knows that what is to happen will happen;and what is not to happen will not happen; and that the universe is forever out of control."
-----
Audio teaching for January 29th/30th webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
" The Awakened One does not try to change the world. It is perfect and sacred to the Awakened One. "
----
Audio teaching for January 22nd / 23rd webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One has no will and no illusions. The Awakened One merely dwells in reality."
----
Audio teaching for January 15th / 16th webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One sees the world emerging from the void; therefore accept the world as it is. As the Awakened One accepts the world as it is, the Awakened One is established in the primal Self."
----
Audio teaching for January 8th / 9th webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One is open to all people and all situations and flows with them."
---
Audio teaching for January 1st / 2nd webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One journeys without journeying."
---
Audio teaching for December 25th / 26th webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One remains unmoving till perfect action arises by itself. The Awakened One is free of all views and concepts; is One with the what is"
---
Audio teaching for December 18th / 19th webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One is one with that which was there before the universe was born. It is the one which is eternally present, the unborn and the undying, one without a beginning and an end, ever unchanging, solitary, empty, infinite, blissful, the eternal 'I'."
---
Audio teaching for December 11th / 12th webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One is open to everything and everything falls into place."
---
Audio teaching for December 4th / 5th webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One remains unmoving, and action arises by its self. The Awakened One allows things to come and go like clouds in the sky. The Awakened Ones sustains all beings without trying to."
---
Audio teaching for November 27th / 28th webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One sees the world as himself or herself. Loves and cares for the world as one's self. To the Awakened One all things are perfect as they are."
---
Audio teaching for November 20th / 21st webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One is detached from all things, and hence, is one with everything. Detachment when practiced leads to indifference which is not detachment."
---
Audio teaching for November 13th / 14th webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One is empty and therefor capable. One should not try to empty one's self."
---
Audio teaching for November 6th / 7th webcast with Sri Bhagavan:
"The Awakened One, acts without doing anything, this cannot be practiced"
Jose Arguelles Passes On
110325Jose Arguelles | Cisternino, Italy Sept. 2009
Watch a video of Jose Aguelles
Copy down below:
www.greatmystery.org/nl/josearguelles.html
On the Beam: Crossing the Rainbow Bridge - the Harmonic Convergence of 2012
Recorded on his birthday, 25 Janaury 2010 at 2012 Tipping Point · The Prophets Conference Cancun
Please pass this on and share. (patience is required with the download - but well worth it!)
One of his last public appearances.
Old friends Cody Johnson, founder of The Prophets Conference and Jose celebrating Jose's birthday in Cancun
Last night we received a message that our dear old friend Jose Arguelles (Valum Votan) had just passed. His partner Stephanie South told us a couple of days ago that he was channeling the planetary shifts through his body. We are heartbroken. May his prophetic teachings be our guide into something wonderful. He is surfing the rainbow bridge.
Valum Votan/Jose Arguelles departed this Planet on Solar Moon 17 (March 23), Red Spectral Moon, at 6:10 a.m (the exact same time that he was born in 1939 in the Red Spectral Moon year).
After a short illness, he slipped away in complete peace. We are asking for those who loved him to hold a synchronized vigil and/or ceremony on his behalf at 12-noon (Pacific daylight time) on March 25, Solar Moon 19, Kin 91. Send him your prayers, light and blessings to continue his spirit journey – and also visualize the rainbow bridge and the Return of Light.
Red Spectral Moon (solar seal 9, tone 11 - 9.11)
I dissolve in order to purify
Releasing flow
I seal the process of universal water
With the spectral tone of liberation
I am guided by my own power doubled.
Solar Moon 17 began vinal 13: Closing the equivocating part and entering a trance.
Note that he departed 58 days after his 72nd birthday. Kin 58-White Rhythmic Mirror-is the excarnation date on the tomb lid of Pacal Votan. Between his (Jose/Votan's) birth kin (11) and his death kin (89) there are 78 days. 78 (6 x 13) is the sum of the tones of the clear signs on the tomb of Pacal Votan. Note: the tomb lid of Pacal Votan was closed and sealed a few moons ago in Palenque, a clear sign.
The message that he wanted me to convey to kin is that everything is now the responsibility of the people who have heard the message. There is much work to be done. He said to tell all kin: "EVERYTHING IS PERFECT!!! Love everyone. Hate no one. God bless everyone." He will now be assisting the closing of the cycle from the other side of the veil.
"Perfect was my time of coming. Perfect was my mission. Perfect was the time of my going. Perfect is the discovery of my prophecy ." Telektonon 11.67
I extend all of my love to everyone in this most heartbreaking (but miraculous) time,
Love Red Queen/Stephanie/Kin 185
Where were you on Harmonic Convergence?
José Argüelles was the initiator of the Harmonic Convergence global peace meditation of 1987 and is the one who first introduced the date December 21, 2012 into mass consciousness with The Mayan Factor: Path Beyond Technology. Argüelles is also the founder of the annual Whole Earth Festival (1970) in California, and one of the originators of the Earth Day concept.
Up until this moment Jose was director of the Noosphere II project of the Foundation's Galactic Research Institute, inclusive of the First Noosphere World Forum, a project that involves creating a dialogue that unifies a network of organizations working to promote a positive shift of consciousness by 2012 with the vision of the whole earth as a work of art.
Immediately following the 2012 Tipping Point: The Prophets Conference Cancun Jose Arguelles was honored with The Nicholas Roerich Medal, the highest award of the International Committee of the Banner of Peace, NonGovernmental Organization of the United Nations.
We love you Jose and you will be greatly missed. Our spirits are with you as you make your journey on the rainbow bridge.
Love,
Robin and Cody
Message from Sri Bhagavan
110318
This is the message from Sri Bhagavan:
"Japan would soon overcome the present crisis and emerge stronger in all spheres of human endeavour.
The crisis would also help Japan emerge as an Awakened nation. Prayers are going on at the Oneness temple to help the victims of the crisis as well as for the liberation of those who left us.
Oneness deeksha givers in Japan should, with the help of deeksha liberate people from the traumas caused by the crisis. One can feel the tremendous love of people from all over the world for the very lovable Japanese people."
From Arkady:
Deekshas for a favorable resolution of the situation in Japan
occurs at 6 am Japan time [This would be 2:00pm PDT - and of course recommended to send deeksha any time]
Mayacal Update, C J Calleman
110316Was the Japan earthquake related to the Mayan calendar?
In the discussions about the meaning of 2012, there have commonly been suggestions that we would be approaching a time filled with so called Earth Changes and natural disasters of different kinds to the point where it has sometimes been presented as if this would be all that the Mayan calendar is all about. Especially in the light of the terrible disaster that has struck Japan only a few days after the beginning of the Ninth Wave, it then becomes natural to ask if this was predictable based on the Mayan calendar and if there would be more such to expect for instance in the Pacific Rim of Fire.
Earthquakes have their origin in the continental drift, which is caused by convection streams of heated magma rising from the hot interior of the Earth. As these convection streams cause tectonic plates to move, these will--on the surface of the Earth experience--create tensions between these plates. When these are released, enormous energies will create disasters--especially so when densely populated areas are hit.
As I have presented both in Solving the Greatest Mystery of Time: The Mayan Calendar (2001) and The Purposeful Universe (2009), the continental drift in general has its origin in the alautun shifts of the Mayan calendar that was behind this drift in the Mammalian Underworld. In this very general sense you might say that all earthquakes (and volcanic eruptions) have an origin in the kinds of shifts that the Mayan calendar describes.
Given that an alautun is 63.1 million years long, this has hardly allowed us to give any basis for any detailed predictions as to when and where an earthquake may strike given how large the geological structures are that are affected by the continental drift. To my knowledge, no one has been able to provide a convincing pattern relating Earthquakes to the Mayan calendar even though serious attempts have been made (see for instance William C. Treurniet's website).
There are many complicating factors involved and so, for instance, while some sources claim that there has been an increase in earthquakes over the past decades for quakes 3.0 and above on the Richter scale, the US Geological Survey maintains that the number of quakes of 7.0 (which are potentially of a disastrous nature) has remained constant over several decades. I see no reason to question their general assessment even though today with the high population density all over the world there is always a very serious risk that large numbers of human lives will be lost.
Nonetheless, I tend to believe that the terrible 9.0 quake that hit Japan was directly related to the beginning of the Ninth Wave. There are some reasons that I believe this to be the case.
The first is that already on March 9, 2011, a very unusual pattern was observed by Frank Zweers regarding the printouts of global seismographs. This observation was thus made before and lasted until, the actual quake in Japan, and showed that something was in the works already, as the energy of the Ninth Wave started to come in.
The other reason to believe that the quake and tsunami in Japan was actually related to the beginning of the Ninth Wave is the astonishing parallel with the great Lisbon Earthquake in 1755. Both of these quakes, and the tsunamis that followed, happened as a new wave in the Mayan calendar began, the one in Lisbon at the beginning of the Planetary Underworld and the one in Sendai at the beginning of the Universal. The one in Lisbon hit several months (on All Saints Day) after the day on which the new wave was activated, but given that this had a much lower frequency this is what you would expect if you saw it as an immediate effect of this. The strength of both has been estimated to 9.0, and there were also many aftershocks in both cases. They occurred at exactly the same latitude and not far from opposite longitudes on the planet and this is again exactly what you would expect if they were related to the shift in the Mayan calendar.
The logic here is that as a new wave is activated changes need to take place in the interior of the Earth in order to create a new form of resonance to the human beings. While the Seventh Wave favored the back side of the planet (where Lisbon is located) the Ninth Wave is expected to favor the front side of the planet (where Japan is located). If this reasoning is true we would look upon these two quakes as reflections of adjustments in the interior of the Earth that are necessary to mediate the information from the Cosmic Tree of Life to the human beings.
The Lisbon quake in 1755 had enormous repercussions of a philosophical nature and so, for instance, Voltaire argued that the creator overseeing this world could not be benevolent as he allowed this disaster to destroy a whole capital of Europe taking more than 100,000 lives in several different countries. In a similar way I know some people are now asking if the Ninth Wave that seemed to be designed to bring unity consciousness will bring many natural catastrophes such as earthquakes.
Is there a benevolent plan behind this? Before we place judgment on the intelligence that created this cosmic plan I feel we should be aware that it is not necessarily an easy thing to do to manifest such a plan with all that it entails. I do not see any evidence that it would be a punishment either, but something that came out of a necessity to create the resonance with a new wave. Yet, I believe this is a time when we need to show our solidarity with the Japanese people and offer help in the ways that it is in our power to do.
My own view is that we should continue to focus on the transformation to unity consciousness and praying for and sharing the experience of the Japanese people is exactly an expression of this. I do not believe that there will necessarily be an increased frequency of strong quakes in the time to come (there was for instance not such an increase after the Lisbon quake) and while we always have a choice as to how to look upon reality, I believe that what will lead us forward is the light. Maybe the Earth is now adjusted to mediate unity consciousness to the human beings, which remains our highest purpose and presumably that of the cosmic plan.
6th day of the Ninth Wave
March 14, 2011, 6 Eb
Carl Johan Calleman
Oneness Bhakti Yoga kurs
110223Oneness Bhakti Yoga kurs
Jag rekommenderar varmt alla Deeksha givare att börja ge Oneness Bhakti Yoga kurser. Bhakti Yoga kurser bygger på gamla indiska ceremonier och kärlek till det Gudomliga inom dig. (Bhakti betyder Kärlek och Yoga Förening).
Alla vi, som har varit i Indien, Golden city, och gjort någon av upplysningsprocesserna har fått erfarenheten och kunskapen att vidareförmedla denna ”gåva” till andra! Håll kursen på det sättet som känns naturligt för dig och ge deeksha.
Syftet med Oneness Bhakti Yoga kurs är att hjälpa andra och oss själva att komma i kontakt med det Gudomliga inom oss! Vi kan repetera vissa läror (49 minuter) som Sri Bhagavan, för en tid sedan, gav utryck för, läs mera ingående på nedanstående webcast United Kingdom February 12, 2011.
Du har total frihet att skapa din egen Gud och dina egna ritualer: “So, you have complete freedom to invoke anybody you like. The only thing is that person must be Awakened or God realized”... “The rituals, it’s not that you've got to do these rituals or these bhajans. We are doing this because it is the only thing we know. We want you to observe this and then create your own rituals based on your culture, and your conditioning and your background. You have total freedom”.
So remember, Oneness is there to set man totally and unconditionally free. That must be borne in mind. That is why we are being very, very careful in releasing this process for fear that it could be made into a cult. So that's why it's taking a long time and some precautions, and taking the necessary steps. We are giving this to you; it is your responsibility to see that this does not become a cult” Sri Bhagavan.
Jag har under åren som Deeksha givare instruerat många in i dessa övningar där vi arbetar för att öppna upp vårt hjärtchakra. Ett öppet hjärta är ett måste, en nödvändighet, för att vi ska kunna träda in i ett upplyst tillstånd där separation och själviskhet inte längre dominerar våra liv. Oneness (enhet) handlar om att vara i förening med allt och alla i total kärlek. Du behöver inte vara Trainer för att göra detta! Det är upp till var och en att skapa sitt eget kursinnehåll och ge ut det du har i ditt hjärta i syfte att hjälpa andra i deras väg mot upplysning. Kurserna skall vara öppna för alla som vill komma i kontakt med det Gudomliga inom sig! Att utesluta någon eller bara inbjuda en viss grupp av människor till kurserna visar att kurshållaren ännu inte är ”en ren kanal” för det Gudomliga att verka, och har därmed inte kommit särskilt långt med sin egen process. Att utesluta vissa och bygga upp hierarkier där man själv står på topp är värsta sortens hyckleri och högmod. Det är just detta Sri Bhagavan varnar oss för! ”Gör inte Oneness till en sekt”!
Om man känner att man måste åka till Indien, Golden City, för att ”lära sig” kursinnehållet, visar tydligt att tidigare gjorda processer inte har haft så stor verkan i personen ännu! Att lära sig att utantill rabbla upp vissa meningar för att sedan samla grupper och återigen rabbla upp dessa meningar ger ingenting! För det du ger ut skall komma från ditt hjärta! Insikterna, upplevelserna, den inre sanningen, den integrerade kunskapen skall komma naturligt från ditt innersta väsen!!! Det är bara den personliga mognaden som kan åstadkomma detta! Därför är det mycket viktigt att titta inåt, se sin egen fulhet (girighet, självförhärligandet, arrogans, högfärd, behov att sprida lögner etc., för att visa några), att rannsaka sig själv och sitt beteende gentemot andra, att utveckla den inre integriteten och sluta att leva i en illusion!, som Sri Bhagavan så ofta nämner.
När man har den rena inre styrkan och integriteten då har man inget behov av att göra process efter process för processandets skull (eller är det för sin egen marknadsföring?!); lika lite som en fullt upplyst person har behov av att göra en fördjupnings process i Indien. För är man upplyst då är man ”där”, man bara ”är”, då finns det inget behov att fördjupa någonting!
Upplysning är, som vi alla numera känner till, ett neurobiologiskt fenomen. Det är ett medvetandetillstånd där vi upplever villkorslös kärlek och gränslös glädje, ett tillstånd av inre stillhet och harmoni, där vi upplever verkligheten som den är. Deeksha är en mycket kraftfull initiering av gudomliga energier som överförs direkt till varje deltagare. Deekshan förstärker din förening med den universella gudomligheten inom dig (ditt högre jag) och hjälper dig att leva i total harmoni med allt och alla.
Eeva-Kaarina
Webcast with Sri Bhagavan: United Kingdom February 12 2011
110222Audio Link: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=w74d4UYrtBM
(No video available.)
1. Some of us still struggle to feel comfortable with a personal divine connections with you. For many westerners, we find it difficult to worship a living person. How can you help us with this?
Yes. It must be understood that Oneness is not a cult. If it were a cult then we would say only relate to one being, a particular teaching, a particular ritual. That is not the case here.
The Sri Murthi of Ammabhagavan is there, what you have got to do is, you have to invoke that teacher, that master, that God with whom you could relate and you have got to invoke his teachings. Now for example let us say, you have focused on Christ's teachings and you would like to discover the truth in his teaching 'love thy neighbour as thyself', then you've got to chant that particular teaching 49 minutes. When you chant for 49 minutes, the teaching enters the deeper levels of consciousness, which in turn gets programmed. Then you've got to take a Deeksha. If that is the teaching you are going to make use of, you must chant that teaching, then you've must invoke Christ in the Sri Murthi, not AmmaBhagavan, and relate to Christ the way you are expected to relate to Christ, or the way you have been relating to Christ. If you do it correctly you will actually see Christ in the Sri Murthi. If you are touching the padukas, you should be aware that you are touching the Divine feet of Christ. So that is how we are going to go about it.
So let us say you were to invoke the teaching, 'all things' are empty'; that of course is a Bhuddist teaching, in which case you've got to chant the teaching for 49 minutes, and invoke the Buddha, and you will see the Buddha in the Sri Murthi. Same thing applies to the padukas, and the same thing applies to Islam, or in case you are with a Taoist teacher, the same thing has to be repeated.
So it is not that you have got to invoke AmmaBhagavan, no. AmmaBhagavan Sri Murthi is there, the padukas are there. What we have done is an ancient what is called Avahanum whichs is impregnating our consciousness in the Sri Murthi and the Padukas, thereafter how ever many copies you make of the Sri Murthi, they have the same power, that's all.
Now in case you want to invoke our teaching, for example our teaching is 'love yourself', you will say 'I love myself', I love myself, 49 minutes, you keep repeating, in that case you have to invoke AmmaBhagavan. So if you are using our teachings, you've got to invoke Amma Bhagavan. The best way to relate to AmmaBhagavan is as mother & father, or as a friend. So you have to choose a personality in the divine.
The Divine itself, if you are to invoke Divine, divine, divine... nothing is going to happen, because who are you? There's no person there. There are only personalities. What is there is 'existence, consciousness, bliss.' Similarly, the divine too, there is no person there, there are only personalities. The divine also is 'existence, consciousness, bliss.' Since you are 'existence, consciousness, bliss', the Divine or God is 'existence, consciousness, bliss', you and God are one and the same. The only difference is in the personalities.
Not what are the Lord's personalities, or God's personalities? All the awakened beings from the beginning of time, and all those who are God realized, they are the personalities of the divine. If you are to remove all those things and say 'divine, divine God, God', universal energy, universal love, nothing is going to happen. Just like if I were to invoke Homo Sapiens, Homo Sapiens, Homo Sapiens - nothing will happen.[Laughter.] There is no personality. So, you have complete freedom to invoke anybody you like. The only thing is that person must be Awakened or God realized. It could have happened 100 years earlier, or 100 million years ago, that's not a problem. Every one of those people have become the personality of the Divine. You have the right to choose, but you must choose their teaching.
The rituals, its not that you've got to do these rituals or these bhajans. We are doing this because it is the only thing we know. We want you to observe this and then create your own rituals based on your culture, and your conditioning and your background. You have total freedom.
So remember, Oneness is there to set man totally and unconditionally free. That must be borne in mind. That is why we are being very, very careful in releasing this process for fear that it that it could be made into a cult. So that's why it's taking a long time and some precautions, and taking the necessary steps. We are giving this to you, it is your responsibility to see that this does not become a cult.
So if you make these changes, I don't you'll have any difficulty in the Sri Murthi. You can invoke AmmaBhagavan there, you can invoke the being with whom you could relate and it would work very, very beautifully, and you'll be able to see that divine, the way they were on this planet. You'll see that.
2. Is it assured that we will move into the Golden Age at this time? and if that is so, is there any point in continuing to work on environmental protection?
Yes! It is very, very important because as we move into the Golden Age, more and more people will be working for the environment. Right now we do not see a majority of people working for the environment. And once the Golden Age comes, everybody will be involved in this important work. That's what it means. So the Golden Age does not mean you stop all environmental work. In fact you'll be more aggressively involved in it.
3. I really feel that we are back on track in the UK. Do you feel that too?
Looking at you all I really feel that we are back on track!
4. In the last few weeks I've experienced some huge shifts and now I walk around and see the beauty in everything - the worms, the birds, the clouds, the trees, everything. But I still feel separation from people. Why is this?
Normally it is very easy to feel connected to animals, plants and other living creatures. It is becomes quite difficult when it comes to man. But if this were to happen, normally it takes about 3-6 weeks before you'll get this connection too. So you don't have to have to do anything special because it will very naturally and automatically happen.
5. I am still not able to let go of my past, even though after trying to be with the suffering or pain. What other approach can I use to handle this?
It is not a question of your giving up the past or letting go. It must drop of its own accord, like a dry leaf falling of its own accord it has to fall of its own accord. You should not try to give it up. The very trying to give up the past will make you hold on to the past. So become aware of the fact that you are trying to give up the past. Once you take Deekshas, they will do the job. You cannot do anything about it except becoming helpless. Your job, your effort is to see that you are helpless. That's all. All effort ends there. The only effort is to see that you are helpless. Then the process begins, the deeksha takes over and it naturally happens.
6. Yesterday I felt overcome with the divine and this felt a bit scary. Please comment and help.
This will only be scary if your God is a very punishing God. [Laughter in the audience.] Otherwise there should be no problem at all. You must check about your concept about God and if you elect to have a very friendly God this problem will cease. Check out about your concept about God.
7. How can we know that we are awakened? Is talking to you like my best friend, hearing your voice as guidance for everything a path to awakening? I sometimes get intuitions about dates and literally that thing happens that day.
The awakened person knows that one is awakened. However, we have been giving teachings every week to tell you what it is like to be awakened. Now, in case if there is a little doubt, the teachings will help you to realize that you are awakened. But that's not so important. What is important is these teachings will help you realize that you're not awakened. [Laughter.]
8. I feel I have surrendered many times to the divine, but nothing seems to happen. Please can you help?
It looks like you're trying to surrender to the divine but that won't help. Surrender is, you've got to realize that there is nothing more you can do about it. It's like ???? you give up. Because you know, there is nothing much you could do. The moment that happens, the process begins. But if you are trying to surrender nothing is going to happen.
9. While so much has changed in my life by your grace, but I am experiencing a lot of crying this weekend and at other times. Please help me with this.
Well this kind of crying is a good sign, and it's part of the process which means you are very close to becoming awakened. It's a very good sign. It is a classical sign.
Mayakalendrarna och nio plus nio-dagarsräkningen
110221Mayakalendrarna och nio+nio-dagarsräkningen
Man talar ofta om Maya-kalendern, som om det var något konstant och evigt som har varit densamma genom tiderna. En sådan uppfattning är långt från sanningen eftersom de kalendrar som Mayafolket har använt ändrats beroende på deras egna skiftande perspektiv. Detta i sin tur har berott på hur nya medvetandepolariteter har förändrat uppfattningen av verkligheten också hos Maya på samma sätt som i resten av världen. Enligt min mening är Maya inte en speciell ras begåvad med en överlägsen kalender-gen, men ett folk på vår planet som bebodde en speciell plats (ekvatorn väst) och som därför under vissa perioder har utvecklat en starkare känslighet för de vågor av medvetande som har drivit utvecklingen av vår planet.
Denna starkare känslighet var särskilt tydlig under den så kallade klassiska perioden (200-900 e.Kr.) när Mayakulturens kalendariska kunskaper kulminerade och i mina ögon är det dessa som vi i dag särskilt behöver använda oss av. Det var i denna kultur som den Långa Räkningen fick sitt genombrott och nio nivåer av Bolon Yokte Ku beskrevs. Ett exempel på hur Mayakalenderns system påverkades av olika kosmiska energier är hur den Långa Räkningen förlorade sin roll efter den klassiska periodens fall (den äldsta inskriptionen med ett datum för den Långa Räkningen är från 32 f.Kr. och den senaste från 909 e.Kr. och förekommer endast sporadiskt i texter från senare århundraden). De post-klassiska Maya började då istället för den Långa Räkningen med tretton baktuns (394 år) att använda sig av så kallade Korta Räkningen med tretton katuns (19,7 år). Detta var i sig en mycket betydande kalendarisk förändring. Vad som är intressant att notera om detta är att när frekvensen ökade tjugofaldigt (då planetära undervärlden började göra sig gällande) ändrade Maya sitt kalendersystem så att det återspeglade denna frekvensökning. Det är mycket likt vad den förestående frekvensökningen för den nionde vågen tycks tvinga oss att göra i denna tid. Så småningom, speciellt med ankomsten av européerna, följde även andra kalendariska förändringar och den Korta Räkningen och 52-åriga kalenderperioden gick ur bruk.
Dessa förändringar i kalendrarna är reflektioner av hur tänkesättet hos Maya (liksom för resten av mänskligheten) har förändrats då det har kommit in nya energier från kosmos så som det beskrivs i deras kalender. Detta är helt naturligt, eftersom det inte skulle finnas någon mening med att följa en profetisk kalender (som både Långa och Korta Räkningen var) om den inte återspeglar den faktiskt dominerande frekvensen av kosmisk energiskiften. Övergivandet av den Långa Räkningen till förmån för Korta Räkningen för omkring tusen år sedan är för övrigt också anledningen till att de flesta nutida Maya-åldermän tvekar att sätta ett exakt datum för slutet på den Långa Räkningen, eftersom den information de har om detta kommer från arkeologer och inte från en egen kontinuerlig användning av denna Räkning. Medan andra kanske diskuterar om den slutar 2011 eller 2012 så säger vissa Mayaåldermän att det kanske handlar om 60-100 år i framtiden.
Den enda specifika Mayakalender som kontinuerligt har spelat en betydande roll under mycket lång tid är 260-dagars tzolkin. Dess äldsta kända inskrift finns i Monte Alban från 550 f.Kr. och det har varit i bruk fram till nutid. Även omfattningen av användningen av denna kalender har genomgått stora förändringar genom tiderna och under den planetära undervärldens förmörkade medvetande kom den att begränsas huvudsakligen till bergsbyarna i Guatemala. Därför har också användningen av tzolkinkalendern påverkats av medvetandeskiftena som skett bland Maya och på andra håll. Så till exempel ca 550 f.Kr., vilket är mittpunkten av Långa Räkningen, hade en känslighet för de andliga kvaliteterna i tzolkin utvecklats i västra hemisfären av vår planet och vi har skäl att tro att redan i detta skede blev personer associerade med kvaliteterna hos sitt dagtecken vid födelsen. Samtidigt, återigen mittpunkten av den Långa Räkningen, är utan tvekan också tiden för födelsen av den mänskliga individualiteten på vår planet, och då särskilt i Grekland.
Vad jag menar med födelsen av mänsklig individualitet är att innan 500-talet f.Kr. är de människor som vi känner till från historien antingen kungar eller delvis mytiska figurer, såsom Imhotep, chefsarkitekt för de egyptiska pyramiderna, eller Homeros, skalden som gav upphov till Iliaden, vars personliga karaktärer försvinner i den forntida världens dimma. Det är svårt, om inte omöjligt, för oss att verkligen identifiera oss med dem som individer. Runt 500-talet och 400-talet f.Kr. börjar dock personer, som Sokrates och Perikles att dyka upp och även de persiska kungarna, framstår som mänskliga individer. Därför kan det hävdas att den förändring som ägde rum vid mittpunkten av den Långa Räkningen inte bara gav upphov till framväxten av tzolkin, en kalender som förser individer med särskilda egenskaper, men den gav också i en annan del av världen upphov till den mänskliga individualiteten och ett nytt ego. I global skala var därmed medvetandeförändringen som ledde till uppkomsten av mänsklig individualitet synkron med framväxten av tzolkin. De kalendrar som användes av Maya var således relaterade till det härskande medvetandet inom en undervärld och faktum är, som nämnts ovan, att tzolkin nästan dog ut under planetära undervärlden.
Det är i detta perspektiv det blir intressant att spekulera i vad konsekvenserna kan bli av användningen av en 9+9-dagarsräkning och dess överskridance av tzolkin. Det verkar som om detta överskridance då skulle vara kopplad till den överskridance av vår individualitet och särskilt egot, som föddes i den dualistiska nationella undervärlden. Detta verkar innebära precis vad jag har sagt tidigare om de olika polariteterna i undervärldarna, nämligen att nu i den nionde vågen kommer enhetsmedvetande att överskrida dualiteten. Egot kommer då inte att dödas, men förpassas till en mindre roll i tjänst hos Alltet snarare än det som styr våra liv som mycket ofta är fallet med människor för närvarande. Jag tror att den nionde vågen handlar om att helt kapitulera inför Alltet och dess syfte med skapelsen. Denna kapitulation är det viktigaste att göra för att lyckas ta klivet och kunna bevittna "nedstigandet av Bolon Yokte Kuh" den samtidiga manifestationen av alla vågorna. Då 9+9-dagarsräkningen i nionde vågen blir aktiv 9 mars, 2011, och även tidigare kommer vi i viss mån att konfronteras med ett val huruvida vi ska följa 260-dagars-tzolkin med dess olika individualitets-genererande dagtecken eller 234-dagars vågen av enhetsmedvetande. (En extrem form av ego-genererande dagtecken ges av Dreamspell-kalendern som uppfanns av Jose och Lloydine Argüelles, vilken ger individer identiteter som "Vit kosmisk krigare", etc). Eftersom egot är en produkt av samma våg som tzolkin kan man anta att vi då till viss del ställs inför ett val mellan individualitet och enhetsmedvetande. Den traditionella tzolkin kan beskrivas som individualitetens kalender, medan den nu framväxande nio-dagarsräkningen är kalendern för högre medvetande, som också överskrider nationella och etniska gränser som man skulle förvänta sig av en universell undervärld.
Period Varaktighet Mittpunkt Steg i Processen
Dag 1 Mars 9 – Mars 26 Mars 17-18 Sådd
Natt 1 Mars 27 –April 13 April 4-5
Dag 2 April 14 – Maj 1 April 22-23 Groning
Natt 2 Maj 2 – Maj 19 Maj 10-11 Reaktion
Dag 3 Maj 20 – Juni 6 Maj 28-29 Spirande
Natt 3 Juni 7 – Juni 24 Juni 15-16
Dag 4 Juni 25 – Juli 12 Juli 3-4 Bladbildning
Natt 4 Juli 13 – Juli 30 Juli 21-22
Dag 5 Juli 31 – Aug 17 Aug 8-9 Knoppning
Natt 5 Aug 18 – Sept 4 Aug 26-27 Förstörelse
Dag 6 Sept 5 – Sept 22 Sept 13-14 Blomstring
Natt 6 Sept 23 – Oct 10 Oct 1-2
Dag 7 Oct 11 – Oct 28 Oct 19-20 Fruktbildning
Detta skapar en fantastisk möjlighet för oss att välja våra vägar i framtiden baserat på vilken kalender vi använder. Detta är verkligen ett fritt val, eftersom de lägre vågor inte kommer att försvinna bara för att den nionde vågen är aktiverad. Dock skulle steget till den nionde nivån innebära att tonvikten läggs på 18-dagars-räkningen även om vi också följer tzolkin. Man kan rimligen anta att för att Bolon Yokte Ku ska framträda med full regalia är det nödvändigt att en betydande del av mänskligheten faktiskt väljer att klättra till nionde nivån, vilket då också innebär att följa 9+9-dagarsräkningen. Den tidacceleration som denna räkning innebär kommer också av sig själv att driva oss till att leva allt mer i nuet. I denna process kommer vi att släppa många av de särskilda individuella egenskaper som har varit så viktiga för våra egoidentiteter och när detta händer kommer vi att öppna oss för den villkorslösa kärleken i Alltet.
Carl Johan Calleman
New Video Little Grandmother´s Message on 2011
110213Vill du ta del av en ny video av Kiesha Crowther där hon berättar om år 2011 så kopiera följande länk
http://littlegrandmother.net
Länken till Kieshas hemsida hittar du också under "länkar" i min hemsida.
Klicka vidare på "New Video" så är du där.
Egna forntida sägnerna av Carl Johan Calleman
110204Vänner,
I den viktiga fas mänskligheten nu går in i med den nionde vågen kan det i Sverige vara viktigt att se kopplingen mellan de egna forntida sägnerna och den universella kosmologi som vi kan formulera utifrån Mayafolkets kalender. Marcus Gullberg har gjort mig uppmärksam på Valans Spådom (2a versen) som i detta sammanhang är intressant:
Jättar, i urtid
alstrade, minns jag,
som mig fordom
fostrat hava;
nio världar jag minns,
och vad som var i de nio,
måttgivande trädet
under mullen djupt.
Jättar i den fornnordiska världsbilden är detsamma som man i många andra kulturer skulle kalla "gudar" och som vi idag skulle kalla kosmiska energier. För att förstå ovanstående vers är det dessutom viktigt att veta att "mått" i forntiden betydde vad vi idag skulle kalla gräns eller linje. "Måttgivande trädet" betyder alltså världsträdet som definierar de fyra linjerna, eller riktningarna och skapade de nio världarna. Man kan ju då också påminna sig om att Mayas Hunab-Ku brukar beskrivas som "den ende skaparen av mått och rörelse," dvs. Världsträdet.
Hälsningar
Carl Johan
News by Carl Johan Calleman
110128Dear Friends,
As part of the Cruise into 2012 a number of Mayan elders will be gathering with the participants for a fire ceremony in Puerto Vallarta, Mexico on March 9, 2011.
Elizabeth Araujo, one of the indigenous grandmothers and co-spokesperson (with Don Alejandro Oxlaj) for the Mayan Council of Elders will also be joining the cruise Surfing the Ninth Wave
(see http://www.divinetravels.com/CruiseSpeakers.html) and be part of this.
Plans are under way to broadcast this ceremony globally.
For those considering joining the cruise there will be a tele-seminar giving more information on Sunday, February 8th:
6:00- 8:00 pm: Pacific time
9:00-11:00 pm: Eastern time
Dial in to (661) 673-8600. Access code: 802175#.
Best
Carl Johan
Forward email
The Great Shifting by Kiesha Crowther "Little Grandmother"
110124For Love of Mother Earth:
The Great Shifting
by Kiesha Crowther "Little Grandmother"
We are all living at a very profound time on our planet. Mother Earth is going through a shift she has never gone through quite like this before. We are living on the planet in a time that has never been before. The planet is going to start shifting and changing and moving into her High Self. She will change into her own kind of heaven. This is the time of great change that all indigenous peoples have been speaking about for hundreds and hundreds of years, and since the great fall of Atlantis, a very real civilization that existed here. A great shift happened then, when the poles shifted. Long before that shift they had been a highly developed and beautiful people—They knew how to use and utilize the energies of crystals, water, sound, of light and color. They knew how to listen to Mother Earth, and how to work side by side with our brothers and sisters from different places in the universe, the star beings. They interacted with them side by side.
I use the term “star beings” because in my experience a majority of them are loving beautiful beings. They have been here since the beginning of time. They have always been coming and going here, and as our energy attunes to a higher frequency we will be able to see these light beings, who are of a higher frequency. Soon all of humanity will be aware of their presence. At the time of Atlantis, we human beings worked side by side with the star beings, and we lived on Mother Earth as we should, for a long span of time in the history of that civilization. But then the great shift happened, and the ice melted that covered up much of the land, and we as human beings had to start over, spiritually speaking. We hear the story in the Bible of the great flood. You can hear this story in many indigenous cultures on the planet as well, because it did happen. But not everyone was wiped away. The people who knew it was coming got into their boats and dispersed out to other countries, taking some of the sacred Atlantean crystals with them.
Some of the Atlanteans went to South America—these are the roots of the Mayan people today.
Some went to North America. There were already indigenous peoples living here, but there are some tribes whose ancestry goes back to the Atlanteans. Another very advanced civilization that existed in our ancient earth history were the Lemurians. These people eventually dispersed and settled on the different islands and are now the ancestors of the Hawaiian people and the Waitaha in New Zealand, even more ancient than the Maori. These peoples today survive and carry within them very ancient teachings and wisdom, some of it from the star beings.
As a wisdom keeper, one of my sacred duties is to return some of these sacred ancient crystals to the earth, at the time of this current shift that Mother Earth is going through. I have in my care several very special crystals from the time of Atlantis; other wisdom keepers have others that they have been entrusted with, to return to Earth. I am told where they need to go by my elders and by Spirit. So far I have placed crystals in the Earth in sacred ceremony in Santa Fe, New Mexico, the ancient land of the Anasazi; in Sweden for the lands of the North and the Nordic countries, in Hawaii for the sacred lands and people there, in the Redwoods of California, those “grand elders” of the planet, and in the crystalline lands of Arkansas on 10-10-10, to connect in with the awakening of Atlantean crystals buried there, and to heal the sacred waters. These crystals have been prayed over, watched over, and kept safe for this time. There are many more crystals to be placed back into the earth. Soon one of the crystals in my care will return to the Waitaha people in New Zealand, and they will place their crystal back into their sacred lands. These crystals are not placed just anywhere, but are placed in sacred areas where two ley lines cross. They must be placed at very specific locations, to strengthen the energy grid of Mother Earth, those places where the energy goes back into Mother Earth, and links up with the energy of the other crystals in place. So the energy of the crystal placed in Hawaii connects to the Redwoods, to New Mexico, to Sweden, and so forth. This grid of energy is Mother Earth’s arteries and veins, if you will. These crystals must be in place before the great shifting of the Earth happens. I have four more crystals to be placed… though I do not know yet for where they are destined. When the time is right, I will be told where each must return.
The Shift from Mind to Heart Consciousness
There are two great ancient civilizations that today hold the key to living from the heart—the Mayans and the Aboriginal people. They still live from the heart and they are the ones who are teaching us now to start living from the heart again. Since the fall of Atlantis, human civilization has developed in a particular way. We have developed the capacity of our rational minds to the extent that we have made great cities and inventions, and in very recent years have made a huge leap in our discovery of new technologies. We have done some amazing things. But the problem is that we have left the heart behind. We stopped acting from and making decisions from the heart, and from a feeling of connectedness to all of life and to Mother Earth. We have overvalued the rational logical mind, and believe in only what we can see and experience with our bodily senses. This was never how it was intended to be. We are being asked now to start living from the heart again—and this is one of the messages I have been asked specifically to help share and teach.
It is a universal law that I have been taught—that the more loving you are, the more intelligent you become. If you can imagine everything we have created from our minds in the last ten years even—all the advancements and technologies. Yet we still cannot solve some of the most urgent problems facing us today. The largest problem is how to heal what we have done to the Earth already, and how to stop doing what we have been doing to her ever since human beings forgot their connection in the web of life. If we have been able to create so much using just our minds, imagine what we might create if we were operating from the heart! Mind would not be inactive or unused—it would grow much more powerful, because it would be in right relationship to heart—to the source of being, and to creation. If we stop operating from an ego-driven, mental consciousness, we stop striving for meaningless things that gratify only the smallest part of who we are. We stop wasting our mental energy and can start directing every ounce of our hearts and minds to healing the earth and creating bounty for all beings. We could create a paradise on earth, unlike anything we have seen before.
I have been taught by Spirit that Mother Earth is sacred and that human beings will not be allowed to kill her. She is sacred to all life forms in the universe, not just to human beings. If human beings will not be allowed to kill her—then we need to raise our vibration high enough so that we can shift with her into a higher being, because we have been causing her great harm for so long that something major must happen to correct the path we are on, to help her to breathe again. For human beings, the situation is urgent. We must shift into a higher consciousness if we are to remain on planet Earth as her children.
If you listen, none of the indigenous elders or wisdom keepers on our planet are saying, “Now you must go and do something.” They are saying, “Be.” They are telling us to be the change, to focus on “being” rather than on doing, for once. If enough of us can connect with our hearts and the Love that is there, the Love that is all around us in nature, and understand the beauty and sacredness of this life we are given—we will flip the ruling consciousness of the planet from mind, to heart. We are sparks of the Divine consciousness. Each of us has a “Great I AM,” which sent a spark of us here to experience and learn from being in a human body and from having this amazing human heart. I am here to help you to remember.
By living from love, and being in the heart, we remember that most sacred truth that we are all brothers and sisters and children of one mother—Mother Earth. We are not separate from each other, or from any other life form. What happens to one of us, happens to all of us. Because human energy is identical to Earth energy, what happens to Mother Earth also happens to us, and vice versa. Yet we are capable of changing this world we live in. There is a prophecy in many indigenous cultures that at the time of the great change on earth, in this time we are living in, humanity would unify as one family, one tribe… and that this tribe would be made of “many colors.”
When I was initiated as shaman and told that I was a “wisdom keeper,” I was told that my tribe was to be the “tribe of many colors.” I know now that my Great I AM sent a spark of me here at this time to help the children of planet Earth to remember who they are, to love our Mother Earth, and that “we are the ones that we have been waiting for.” We are the Tribe of Many Colors, the strongest of strong souls who chose to be on Earth at this time, to fulfill the tremendous task of shifting the consciousness on the planet back to the heart and to Love. We must unite under the banner of Love and show our most sacred Mother how much we love Her, how we are willing to do anything to save Her, and to continue on as Her children here on Earth. We are capable of creating a beauty we have barely glimpsed on earth. And we will.
Kiesha Crowther "Little Grandmother" video clip www.youtube.com/watch?v=FFPu26BJreY
"When birds fall from the sky and the animals are dying, a new tribe of people ...shall come unto the earth from many colors, classes, creeds, who by their actions and deeds shall make the earth green again. They will be known as the warriors of the Rainbow." — Hopi Prophecy
800 Year History of the New Srimurthi
110111800 Year History
of the New Srimurthi
Compiled by Michael Milner
(Shared with Permission)
New Srimurthi
Clockwise Left to Right:
Sri Swami Samarth
Sri Paada Sri Vallaba
Sri Dattatreya (Brahma, Vishnu, Shiva)
Sri Anagha Lakshmi (MahaSawarswathi, MahaLakshmi, MahaKali)
Sri Narasimha Saraswathi
Sri Shirdi Sai Baba
Inside the Golden Ball of Grace (Adi Parashakti):
Sri Kalki AmmaBhagavan
In the background:
The Sri Yantra which is inlaid in marble in the floor at the center of the Meditation Hall on the the top level of the Oneness Temple
800 Year History of the New Srimurthi
Who do the Indian people say that Sri AmmaBhagavan are?
First, we need to understand how the Divine can Manifest:
1. Theophany- The Divine makes things appear for you. It may feel like a dream, but it is very real.
2. Epiphany- The Divine appears to you. Jesus might drop by and have a chat with you. This too may feel like a dream.
3. Manifestations- The Divine physically manifests to you, and you can touch it exactly like a human being. The Divine can manifest and live for 100’s of years in this form.
4. Incarnations and Avatars- This is when when the Divine is born to a human mother and lives like a human. When the Human species needs to be guided in a certain way, the Divine may come in an incarnate form to help, such as Rama, Krishna, Christ, or AmmaBhagavan to name just a few.
Adiparashakthi- The One God- Unmanifest (symbolized by the Golden Ball of Grace)
When the Divine Manifests, It becomes Three: Creator, Protector and Destroyer - Brahma, Vishnu, Shiva - One energy becomes three.
When all three of them unite as One, this is called Sri Dattatreya Swami, the Male Aspect of the Divine.
The Male Aspects also have female counterparts: MahaSawarswathi, MahaLakshmi, MahaKali (or MahaParvathi) Also creator, protector and destroyer.
When they unite as One they are called Devi Anagha Lakshmi….Female Aspects Together…
In this Iron Age (Kali Yuga), in 1149 AD, Sri Dattatreya first manifested as an 8 year old boy standing under a banyan tree. There was a witness to this. He lived as a "manifestation" for many years, doing miracles, guiding people and teaching, focused on awakening.
In 1320 AD, Sri Dattatreya was born as a human incarnation for the first time in the current Iron Age as Sri Paada Sri Vallaba, in Pitapuram. He began to do miracles at age 1, and at 5 he started discoursing on nuclear physics
At age 15, he wanted to leave house and go out and help people. His parents asked him to get married. He said: “I cannot get married. I am already married to Mukthi (= Liberation or Enlightenment).”
In 1350 in Karnakta, at the age of 30 he entered Mahasamadhi.
In 1378 Sri Paada Sri Vallaba was born again as Sri Narasimha Saraswathi in a place in Maharastra. He did not speak until the age of 5. At 5 He asked to be initiated, and after it was done started to recite the Vedas. At the age of 9 he became a Sunyasin, a monk.
In 1458 Narasimha decided to go and do some "penance" (=intense spiritual practice), like meditation, so he left home. Before this was guiding people towards Mukthi. He went Kadalivanum and meditated for around 150 years. After this he went to the Himalayas and meditated another 250 years. This is not unusual in the Himalayas where there are people 300-400 years old.
While meditating, he was buried under an ant hill. After 250 years he was disturbed. A person cut into the ant hill with a sickle and the blade hit Narasimha's body. When the sickle came out he saw blood and removed the ant hill. To his surprise Narasimha thanked the man for disturbing him. “Thank you for awakening me. It is time for me to return. I have work to do in the world”.
In 1856 he came to Alcocot in Maharastra. It's same body, but now he is called Swami Samarth. He was born in 1378 and came here in 1856 with a physical body nearly 500 years old. He lives another 24 years until 1878, then he takes Mahasamadhi.
Sri Shirdi Sai Baba was a disciple of Swami Samarth. Sai Baba is an incarnation of the monkey god, Hanuman. Swami Samarth said "When I take Mahasamadhi, I will enter into your body and begin to work through you". Shirdi Sai Baba was already Hanuman and now he becomes the instrument for Swami Samarth. This is why so many miracles came through him. Many followers of Swami Samarth and Shirdi Sai Baba are now followers of Oneness.
Sri Paada Sri Vallabha told a prophecy about the future. A person named Shankarat noted all of this in a book called “SRIPADA SRIVALLABHA CHARITAAMRUTAM”. At 16, a disciple named Venkaya said I want to be closely related to you. Sri Paada Sri Villaba said "When I come back at the end of the iron age I will marry your daughter. She will be called Padmavathi, and she will be Anagalakshmi who will born to you. She will be born in Simuloor," which is called Nellore today. So, he gave this promise.
He also met Hanuman during this time and told him. "You will come back as Shirdi Sai Baba" All this was recorded in the book. He said this book should only be released after 33 generations, which was 2001. In 2001 the book was released. He said in the book “I will come back as Kalki, and I will help people move into the Golden Age”.
Amma’s name is Padmavathi, her father is named Venkaya, and she was born in Nellore exactly as prophesied!
This whole phenomenon is called "Kalki". This time when Kalki came He did not come alone. The Hindu tradition tells of Kalki coming at the end of the Kali Yuga with an army of 64,000.
Sri Bhagavan was born in 1949, exactly 800 after the first manifestation of Sri Dattatreya as a young boy in 1149.
Barathgiri Maharaj (“Bapu”) was a fellow disciple of Swami Samarth with Shirdi Sai Baba. In 1949 in Gujurat while in Samadhi Bapu had a vision of Kalki, who said “I have taken birth on this planet.” 25 years ago at Rakisha Ashram Bapu met with a group of people telling them “Kalki is already here. The freedom of India was to prepare the way. After more than 5,000 yrs Kalki has come. He is the Lord God, unifier of 14 Lokas, vanquisher of Kali (Darkness), the most powerful being in human form on this planet. Whatever happens never leave Him!"
Bapu himself was a Divine Being, the manifestation of Astrology, Narda, the close friend of Vishnu. He spent his life after 1949 searching for Kalki. He came to Satyaloka in 2001 after being invited to Satyaloka by Amma in 2000, then well over 120 years old (no one is sure of his exact age). He met Bhagavan and in August of 2001 entered his Mahasamadhi. (The story is contained in the DVD: Oneness Vol 3, which is currently not available in English).
At the age of 3, Sri Bhagavan was already totally focused on helping to liberate Humanity from suffering. He never played and only spent his time thinking of Humanity. Bhagavan was always sitting thinking about the future. His mom joked you should marry the seat. The Golden Ball appeared to him at the age of 3.5 years, and he chanted into it for the next 24 years. Amma too was always austere and devotional. Sri AmmaBhagavan’s life was always one of sacrifice. They have always spent their time only helping people. They taught all the monks about connection and perception and about the Divine.
PERSONAL POSTSCRIPT: In 1999, a number of years before I had even heard about Sri AmmaBhagavan and the Oneness phenomenon, I met Shri Punitachariji Maharaj, of the State of Gujarat in India, (affectionately known as 'Bapu'), the founding saint of Girnar Sadhana Ashram, at the foot of sacred Mount Girnar outside of Junagadh, and also of the Datta Ganga Ashram on the banks of the Ganges in Rishikesh. This was Bapu's first and only trip to the USA to visit his devotees there. It was then that I learned Bapu is a direct disciple of Sri Dattatreya. I had never heard of Sri Dattatreya before. The mantra Sri Dattatreya gave Bapu for meditation is "Hari Om Tatsat Jai Guru Datta". As I meditated with Bapu the night we met, the only time I ever saw him, I had many amazing Divine visions including one of being completely enfolded in a beautiful Golden Ball while Lord Vishnu appeared before me. When I related this experience to Bapu, he seemed to know all about me and told me that I must pray to remember my former lives in India and return to India as soon as possible, because I had unfinished work there. I did pray as Bapu asked, but I remembered nothing at all about any previous lives at that time. 11 years passed.
In October 2010, the day I arrived at the Oneness University for the 28 Day Deepening Process, a friend of mine who lives and works at the Oneness University took me to the Oneness Temple where I saw the new Srimurthi for the first time. It was like lights coming on inside of me! As my friend related to me the 800 year story of Sri Dattatreya's intervention during the current Kali Yuga, I began to have vivid flashbacks, memories of past lifetimes and places I have been before with my Beloved AmmaBhagavan. The puzzle pieces of my life came together, and I could clearly see the hand of the Divine at work through it all, the unbroken chain of coincidences and miracles of Grace that tell the story of my life! I was overwhelmed and flooded with Love and Gratitude for my dear Divine Friend. Sri AmmaBhagavan. It was on this very night, after our visit to the Temple, that the Srimurthi began to miraculously pour forth streams of Divine honey that continued to flow for several days!
Coincidence after coincidence has given way to miracle after miracle too numerous to name. I am so grateful. Everything and everyone I see is you, Bhagavan. I am you and you are me! I am inundated and intoxicated with your love. All I see is you everywhere I look. You have become my closest and dearest Friend who is always with me, always talking to me, teaching me, playing with me, showing me your love and your miracles.
AmmaBhagavan Sharanam!
Aum Shreem Kreem Kleem Hreem
Sree Maha Laxmiye Namah
How to control Anger
110111Bhagavan, I lose my temper very often especially with those who are close to me. What should I do? How to control Anger?
VIDEO LINK: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6MVT--PXF40
"Anger is a primary natural emotion experienced by all humans sometime or the other. It can mobilize psychological resources for collective action. But, unfortunately anger has become an irrepressible response to many. Normally, people try to control their temper. But, exerting oneself to restrain anger can only aggravate the feeling. Hence, one has to develop an entirely different perspective to deal with it. An intemperate anger is basically a symptom of deeply routed charge which is stored in your unconscious and what is a charge? it is an incomplete experience of your past that tense to be repetitive. Hence, people driven by charges develop a very narrow outlook to life. Every situation, relationship becomes platform for their charges to express or manifest and consequently they get to be highly susceptible to reactions. If you have the get rid of anger, then work on silencing the roaring daemons of your conscious. Resolve the unsettled issues of your past or relationships or problems with your own self and you would certainly feel a change in your response. You get to experience anger without spite. It is a state that can very well be described as anger less anger which leaves no residue."
Question to Sri Bhagavan: Why do avatars come in human form?
"Avatars come in human form because, that is the only way to incarnate the God within man. The Avatar takes the human form and behaves in a human way so that humanity can feel kinship with divinity. At the same time he rises to godly heights so that mankind also can aspire to reach God. 'The realization of the indwelling God as the motivator of life' - is the task for which Avatars come in human form.
Previous Avatars like Rama and Krishna had to destroy a few individuals who could be identified as enemies of the godly way of life and thus restore the dharmic path.
Today, however, wickedness has tainted so many that humanity itself sands under the threat of destruction. Therefore, in my present Avatar, I have come armed with the fullness of the power of formless God to correct mankind, raise human consciousness and put people back on the right path of truth, righteousness, peace and love to divinity".
What should I do to discover causeless love and limitless joy?
"One of the most important teachings of the dharma is that the content is not important. How you experience the Content that is important. What ever is happening in your life, you must learn the art of experiencing it. That is the true 'art of living'. The true art of living is to experience fully, totally and completely whatever is going on.
So, mostly what is going on is human interactions, your friends, your relatives, your boss, your children and your family. You are all the time interacting with them because life is relationship. Without relationship you don't exist. So, in this relationship you are transacting some kind of interaction. You may get hurt, you may get provoked, and you may get back some memories, all these are happening.
Whatever is happening, if you can experience fully, as I was speaking earlier, then you will find there is limitless joy. Now, what happens when there is so much joy? It doesn't stop there. It becomes love. Only a happy and joyous person can truly love. An unhappy person cannot love. That love is nothing but attachment, possession...true love comes only when there is true joy and true joy comes only when you experience what ever is going on inside. It is not very difficult.
Practice this for 21 days, if you keep trying it will become natural. What is not natural, what is not easy, I don't teach. There is no point in teaching that. Only what you can do I am teaching. The brain must learn a new pattern of functioning. It takes 21 days for that. After 21 days of practice you will find it becomes easy. It becomes like alcoholic addiction or drug addiction. Why are you addicted? Because it gives you so much joy or happiness or freedom. Same thing happens here also. Only thing is there are no negative side effects. There are very good effects on the other hand. You discover love, compassion. All these things happen.
So basically you must start with pain. You hold that pain like you hold a newborn baby. So carefully you must hold that pain you must know that it is a blessing. You must hold it, you must not condemn or judge it and strangely you'll find it is very painful. It will become pain in the chest region but slowly you'll find, you'll discover a freedom, joy and that will become love. That is the way to get this causeless love and limitless joy."
Nobody in this world is free of sufferings. To be free from sufferings what should be done?
"That is very simple. Please follow seven truths to be free from suffering:
1. Everything comes from a single source. It could be God or Energy. There is no beginning and end to life.
2. If you identify this source, you'll not differentiate between good, bad, right or wrong. All these things are our views. Everything came from one source.
3. Life is nothing but your search for "SELF". In your life, things that happen to you, people you see, everything reflects your "Self". If you are suffering from poverty, it means there something wrong within yourself. You have to correct this to get out of poverty. If you have hatred, then who ever you see will exhibit the same quality. If you have evil thoughts, people you meet will also have evil thoughts. Try to understand yourself first.
4. Realize that anything you experience in this Life is by God's grace. Supposing you slip while walking, try to realize that as God's grace too. If you see God in everything, your life will become wonderful.
5. Realize that anything you experience in this Life is just a "test" for you by God. It is not a bad experience. If it is considered as a bad experience then it would mean that God is not compassionate. If you experience a problem, consider it an opportunity for you to face it and come out of it. You've been given people, wealth and confidence to face challenges. If you understand this, your confidence will improve. Just to test your confidence God gives you a test.
6. If you realize that anything you experience is a test for you by God, then you'll be able to think deep about the problem and handle it in a better way. You'll understand its result. Then you'll have no fear.
7. If you understand the above 6 truths, then there will be an enormous transformation in your body. From then on, you'll not only have compassion, but you'll become that 'compassion'."
Nordpolens rörelser drabbar flygplatser DN 20110107
110108Nordpolens rörelser drabbar flygplatser
Publicerad 2011-01-07 21:53
Flygplatsen i Tampa i Florida har fått stänga en av sina startbanor sedan den magnetiska nordpolen flyttat på sig lite för mycket. Nu måste banan döpas om och den nya beteckningen målas dit.
Andra flygplatser som ändrar
West Palm Beach, Florida – 2010
St.Petersburg/Clearwater International airport, Florida – 2011
Peter O. Knight Airport, Florida – 2011
Atlanta, Georgia – 2012
Till skillnad från den geografiska nordpolen, som är en punkt på en karta, så flyttar den magnetiska polen hela tiden på sig. Därmed pekar nålarna i våra kompasser inte mot den geografiska nordpolen och skillnaden mellan kompassnålen och nordpolen blir allt större ju längre norr om ekvatorn man befinner sig.
Den magnetiska polens förflyttning kan ställa till en del problem. Inte minst för flygtrafiken.
Med jämna mellanrum tvingas flygplatser stänga sina startbanor sedan de inte längre pekar i rätt riktning. När de en gång byggdes fick de ett nummer som då angav den riktning banan har mot den magnetiska nordpolen.
Nu senast är det Tampas internationella flygplats som stänger en av sina start- och landningsbanor fram till den 13 januari för att måla dit nya markeringar och märka om taxibanor som leder fram till terminalerna. Flygplatsen byggdes mellan åren 1969 och 1971. Den bana som i dag heter 18R/36L kommer om några dagar att heta 19R/1L.
Siffrorna indikerar att det är en bana som ligger i rakt nord-sydlig riktning (18 betyder 180 grader och 36 betyder 360 grader) men att den snart måste justeras till 190 grader och 10 grader eftersom den magnetiska polen flyttat sig för mycket sedan banan byggdes. En liknande justering ska göras också för den bana som går i öst-västlig riktning.
Tampa International Airport, liksom andra flygplatser i världen, anger banornas nummer i tiogradersintervall. När kompassnålen pekar för långt åt sidan så får banan ett nytt nummer.
– Vi målar om banornas nummer eftersom vi nu har kommit närmare 10 grader än 360 grader när det gäller bana 18R/36L, säger Kelly Figley vid Tampa International Airport till DN.se.
– Olika banor har byggts vid olika tidpunkter och därmed påverkats vid olika tidpunkter av den magnetiska polens förflyttning. För inte så länge sedan gjorde man det på en flygplats i Boston.
I en intervju med Fox News säger en talesman för det amerikanska luftfartsverket, FAA, att när jordens magnetiska poler flyttat sig mer än tre grader kan det påverka numreringen av startbanorna.
– Eftersom det jordmagnetiska fältet flyttar sig relativt långsamt så är startbanorna markerade i intervall av tio grader, säger Lorne McKee vid den geomagnetiska avdelningen inom Natural Resources Canada till Fox.
– Fältet har svängt från cirka 10 grader öst i slutet av 1600-talet till 25 grader väst i början av 1800-talet för att nu vara cirka 3 grader väst.
Och allt beror på det sätt som vår egen planet fungerar.
Jordklotet roterar i en magnetisk bur som bildas när en flytande yttre kärna av metall roterar runt en solid kärna av järn, i jordens centrum. Den magnetiska nordpolen upptäcktes så sent som 1831 och befinner sig för närvarande ungefär där Ellesmere Island i Kanada ligger. De första rörelserna registrerades 1904 och fram till 1989 har den magnetiska nordpolen flyttat sig med ungefär 15 kilometer per år.
Men 1989 inträffade något i jordens inre som fick polen att öka hastigheten och 2007 uppmättes förflyttningen till närmare 60 kilometer per år. Riktningen just nu pekar mot Sibirien.
I Sverige finns inga planer på att ändra numreringen av några startbanor med anledning av att den magnetiska nordpolens förflyttning. Här finns ett 40-tal flygplatser med regelbunden trafik.
– Jag har inte hört att det skulle vara aktuellt att ändra några beteckningar i Sverige, säger transportstyrelsen presschef Anders Lundblad.
Clas Svahn
clas.svahn@dn.se
A Special New Year Message from Sri Amma Bhagavan
110101Accelerating change has led to uncertainty in every sphere of life. At the individual level there is insecurity with regards to relationships, work and health and on a global level there is anxiety about the fluctuating market economy, precarious ecology and conflict. It is this experience of humanity as a whole that is affecting the individual all the time. Just as the pressure of the entire ocean is exerted on every droplet so does the entire universe impacts every individual.
The assertion of separateness has destroyed our capacity to work together. It is becoming more and more essential, if we are to survive, that there be a spirit of cooperation with the universe. And one possibly cannot cooperate with another, unless one in himself/herself is harmonious, not broken up or in conflict. As long as the mind dominates all our actions, there can be no cooperation.
Awakening is the flowering of the heart from which the cause of a problem and the arising of suffering is seen. Personal suffering is a thing of the past. All feelings arise and cease without any resistance. Emotional hurts are hard to sustain. One is at home even amidst strangers; the world is home. One feels a greater sense of connection to all people and all things.
This is attainable only when one establishes a powerful connection with the divine. It is only then man´s responsibility undergoes a radical change. Awakening is a journey to be made not a destination to be reached. Awakening is a process where you wake up from the dream to reality. Life this way is so ordinary that it is extraordinary. One feels that, that is how one has always been.
This New Year would see more and more people ascending into the Divine and the Divine descending into people.
Svensk översättning:
Accelererande förändringar har lett till osäkerhet i varenda sfär av livet. På den individuella nivån finns det osäkerhet när det gäller relationer, arbete och hälsa och på den globala nivån finns det oro kring den skiftande ekonomiska marknaden, en instabil ekologi och konflikter. Det är denna upplevelse som mänskligheten som helhet har, som hela tiden påverkar individen. Precis som trycket från hela havet påverkar droppen, påverkar hela universum varje individ.
Upplevelsen av separation har förstört vår förmåga att samarbeta. Det blir mer och mer nödvändigt, om vi ska överleva, att det finns en samarbetsanda med universum. Och man kan omöjligt samarbeta med andra, om inte man själv är harmonisk och ej splittrad eller i konflikt. Så länge som sinnet styr alla våra handlingar, kan det inte finnas något samarbete.
Ett uppvaknande leder till hjärtats blomning där problemets orsak och lidandets uppkomst ses igenom. Personligt lidande blir något som tillhör det förflutna. Alla känslor uppstår och avtar utan något motstånd. Känslomässiga sår blir svåra att hålla fast vid. Man känner sig hemma även bland främlingar; världen är ens hem. Man upplever en djupare förening med alla människor och alla ting.
Detta kan enbart uppnås när man har etablerat en stark kontakt med det Gudomliga. Det är endast då som människans ansvar genomgår en radikal förändring. Ett uppvaknande är en pågående resa, inte en destination med ett slutmål. Uppvaknandet är processen där du vaknar upp från drömmen till verkligheten. Livet blir så ordinärt att det blir extraordinärt. Man upplever att, det är så här man alltid har varit.
Detta Nya År kommer bevittna fler och fler människor stiga upp till det Gudomliga och det Gudomliga stiga ned i människor.
Bhagavan, are you God?
101228
Bhagavan: Basically, it is like this. God essentially is unmanifest. That is, He cannot be seen, He cannot be spoken to. But He is there. But since you cannot see, you cannot speak to, He is as good as not being there as far as you are concerned. Then, the God that people normally talk about is the God who you call as Antaryamin. i.e., He can be seen inside, you can talk inside; He can appear to so many and disappear. That's what people normally refer to as God. Sometimes God can incarnate in physical form. That's what is called an Avatar. I am an Avatar. In that sense I am God.
But if you ask me - am I that unmanifest God right now, I am certainly not because I am fully physical. But I am God in the sense that I am an Avatar.
So, God has these three faces. The example I give for this is - steam, water and ice. They are the same thing. As steam, it is everywhere. You can't control it. A liquid is more controlled, but still it is moving. Ice is much more solid. The physical Avatar is something very solid.
So, Miracles happen around the physical Avatar. You can come to me. You can talk to me about your problem. The problem is solved. If you come to me, I can say, "OK, this will happen, that will happen". Many, many miracles will happen. Now, it is very easy to contact me than to contact the manifested God and still more difficult to contact the unmanifest God. That is the advantage. You take my picture and you talk to me. The response comes back. And I am not claiming that I am the only Avatar. There have been Avatars from time to time. The world is full of Avatars through whom God is acting. That's all.
How can we tackle the Ayodhya issue? To me all problems, whether they are economical problems, or political problems, they all emanate from one basic problem. That is, man is not enlightened. So, if one problem disappears, another problem will crop up, if you are not enlightened. Today, it might be Ayhodhya, tomorrow it might be something else.
So the ultimate solution is that man must become enlightened. And I maintain that large numbers of people will become enlightened, starting from June 2004 and by September-November 2012, most of humanity will be enlightened. When that happens? The problem will just disappear. That is my solution to the world's problems. I don't believe in national boundaries. Dividing the world into nations, into countries, into religions - as long as there are divisions there will be suffering. All divisions must go. If all divisions must go, the 'Self' must go. That is Enlightenment.
Unless man becomes Enlightened, there will one problem or the other. Say there is water in the pipe. If you press it here, it will bulge somewhere else. If you press it there, it will bulge somewhere else again. Ayodhya might go, something else might crop up. Where is the end to all this ? So, the ultimate solution is that man must be transformed. If man is going to live the way he is living, he will destroy himself. With all these nuclear weapons, ecological pollutions and other conflicts. We are only racing towards destruction.
Unless there is a transformation in his consciousness and he becomes a totally new being, there is no hope for man. I am interested in man's problem. That will take care of this problem also. Suppose Hindus and Muslims, they can no more see themselves as Hindus and Muslims, where is the Ayodhya problem? But otherwise where is the solution? The same thing can be applied for India-Pakistan also. It also boils down to a religious problem only. And you must out grow religion, which means you must outgrow the 'Self'. So, we need a radical transformation of man, which is possible. I never talk about that which is impossible. I can demonstrate to you that it is possible.
What is the root cause of fundamentalism? How can it be rooted out? You see, fundamentalism is basically because people are not able to cope up with the changes that are happening. The world is moving too, too, too fast. So the old is not prepared to give way to the new. If you are not prepared to give way to the new, then fundamentalism arises. It can be Islamic fundamentalism, it can be Christian fundamentalism, it can be Hindu fundamentalism. But the fact is we cannot stop these changes from occurring. So, more changes are likely to take place and there could be a growth in fundamentalism also. Again and again I see only Enlightenment as the solution, because the world is growing very, very fast. You are not prepared to give up your old ways, which means you have become a fundamentalist. That's what is happening. Islamic world is not able to cope up with the changes that are occurring and that is the root cause of fundamentalism. So, if you must be able to cope up with these changes, you must outgrow the 'Self'. So, ultimately, you come back to enlightenment as the solution.
How can we achieve this kind of Enlightenment? What I am maintaining is - 60,000 people must become fully enlightened. If 60,000 people become fully enlightened, all else is automatic. i.e. Automatically everywhere people will become enlightened. That's all. It's automatic. A natural process. But to trigger it 60,000 people must go into a very high state of enlightenment. If they emerge on the planet, then the whole planet will be in that state. So my work is only to produce those 60,000 people.
So, I believe that by 2012 I will be able to achieve it. Latest is 2012. It could well happen before that. When that happens, their mere presence on the planet brings the transformation. You don't have to know about the movement, come to the movement, nothing. Wherever you are, suddenly one fine morning you will be enlightened. You'll become very calm, loving and peaceful. It's natural. It happens. That's all. That's what we are doing. So we have allotted some numbers to every country. We have people in every country. All are working towards this.
So, if 60,000 people if we successfully reach, it's all over. What is your vision and mission? My vision is that there must be the Golden Age by 2012. My mission is to make 60,000 people enlightened. That's my mission. The way is - I give Deeksha. That's my vision, mission and way. I simply give Deeksha. I am not asking you to do some terrible practice. You simply come and take Deeksha. That's all. You are enlightened. Like this I want 60,000 people.
Kiesha speaks on 2012
101208Kopiera länken och lyssna!
http://vimeo.com/16830337
During her workshop in Zurich early November 2010 Little Grandmother Kiesha Crowther spoke about 2012, the expected pole shift and how we should prepare ourselves. Illustrated with pictures and accompanied by the music piece "Garden of Love" from the CD "Sarastus" by Rija.
Sri Bhagavan India Webcast Transcript - 21 November 2010
101130Sri Bhagavan India Webcast Transcript - 21 November 2010
VIDEO LINK:
http://www.onenessuniversity.org/resources_articles_005.html
The webcast of Sri Bhagavan took place at 11:00 am on Sunday, November 21, 2010. Sri Bhagavan spoke about raising the consciousness of humanity across the globe, the history of the Oneness phenomenon and what is expected in 2011 and beyond. The transcript is now posted at the link above as well as in this e-mail.
There were some words at the beginning of the broadcast that were not captured apparently for some technical reason. The webcast recording begins with Sri Bhagavan speaking about some of the experiences of students at the Jeevashram school, known as the Satya Loca campus in Andra Pradesh, India after the Oneness Phenomenon manifested in July of 1989 with the descent of the Golden Orb of Grace.
.....around 200 children in the age group of 10 to 15. Most of the children very spontaneously moved into higher states of consciousness without anything being done. They were seeing their past lives. They had out of body experiences. They used to fly home and see what their parents were doing. They used to talk to trees and strange phenomena like the clouds following the children, children talking to God, the gods that were worshipped in their homes.
So all kinds of things very naturally happened and they also became very naturally healers. Nobody taught them anything. They could heal themselves, heal others. So many such things very spontaneously happened. This phenomenon later grew into what we now call the Oneness Deeksha or Oneness Blessing as it is known is many countries of the world.
So what is this Deeksha? The Deeksha is essentially a transfer of Divine Energies which in turn awakens the kundalini and the kundalini in turn brings about changes in the brain as a consequence of which there occurs God Realization or awakening or sometimes both.
Along with the rise of the phenomenon also several revelations were received. These revelations gave a road map as to what was going to happen to the phenomenon, as well as, to the world. We have been strictly following and going according to these revelations and more or less it has happened according to the revelations.
The revelations spoke of 13 steps to a great shift in human consciousness. So, we are through eleven steps, eleven steps have been covered. The 12th one commenced on November the 3rd and is likely to end on February the 10th. The 13th and the last and final step until 2012 will be commencing on February the 11th.
Now, what are these revelations? Let's have a look into them. The phenomenon began in '89. That was a year when many things happened: The fall of the Berlin Wall, the fall of communism, strange events in China and many parts of the world whose effects are still being felt by the world at large. The revelations were that 1989 was the year when the New Age was conceived, conceived in the womb, and it said 13 steps later the child would be delivered sometime between October 28th and December 21st , 2012. So, it's about 23 years in the womb and the delivery time is almost from October 2011 to December 2012.
Now, what happens when this child is delivered? According to the revelation a large number of people would be awakened by the end of 2012. How large? The revelation says anything between 60,000 and 70,000 people would be awakened across the planet. What happens next? Now, in 2012 the New Age has taken birth. It's a small child and then it begins to grow. And by 2035 this child is able to walk and talk.
According to the revelation, there will be great inner transformation from the time of the delivery of the child, that is in 2012 to 2035, there will be a great awakening happening in human consciousness. A lot of inner transformation will be happening. This period we normally call Satya Yuga or the birth of Satya Yuga.
From 2035 onwards begins the Golden Age. What happens is this inner transformation then brings about changes in the external world. For example, by 2035 there will be no poverty on the planet. Wars and conflicts could have ceased. The environment will be very, very clean. People will be filled with unconditional love and unconditional joy.
There will be tremendous transformation in all aspects of human life. There will be changes in the way people are governed, in the way they are educated, in the way they work. Every field of human activity will be touched, will be transformed. So from 2035 begins the Golden Age, and then it goes on to reveal what happens in the next 1,000 years.
By 2035 most of humanity is awakened and the Golden Age commences, a few centuries later, we find that the human body is re-structured. Right now the body is about 8 times the length of our head, but that would become 9 times. That's the first change we notice. All this come as revelations in clear pictures. One can see it as though one were there, and even now it could be seen when you go through a very advanced process. You can see all these things, all that I'm speaking about. These are based on real experiences which anybody could have.
And then a few centuries later we notice we do not have any more of this distinction of male or female. It looks as though man has become bi-sexual, both male and female. And a few centuries later what we notice is we see no buildings, no factories, nothing in fact. We see the whole Earth is a beautiful garden, very, very clean. It's more like Heaven on Earth. People are there, but they do not seem to be working or consuming food the way we do. It looks like they're absorbing from nature all that they want.
Hence, there's no need to work or to have any organized structures in human society. When they do want to travel they 'hang' their bodies on branches of trees and they move around in their consciousness, go wherever they want, and again materialize and talk to people, do whatever they want and again return. Very much like what AmmaBhagavan do very often, they seem to be doing similar things. That's about 1,000 years from now.
So there is a tremendous activation of growth starting with 2012. It grows exponentially in terms of consciousness as also in terms of technology. Amazing technology will be in place. Most of today's technologies will be dead and gone and new technologies would take their place. Amazing technologies which would also help man rapidly grow in his consciousness. They would not be opposed to each other, in fact they might become complementary to one another.
So that's how revelations came through. Very clear pictures of what's going to happen. And now for example it said there will be a shift in consciousness on November the 3rd . It exactly happened like that.
Now what happens when this shift in consciousness occurs? There is either Awakening or God Realization or both.
Now, what do we mean by Awakening? To put it simply, you are gone. There is nobody inside, there is no controller. You are gone. What is there is simply pure existence, consciousness, bliss and all things happen automatically. You actually see that your thoughts are not your thoughts. They come inside you, they go out. You could see it exactly that way.
You also realize that your mind is not your mind. Your mind stands out and keeps functioning. You are emptied of your mind. You've become a witness to your own mind. And later on you find even the mind empties itself of its contents, like jealousy, anger, hatred, violence, conflict, even they are emptied from the mind. It happens a little later. But first you see that your mind is standing out there. It's working on its own. You're a witness to it.
You also realize that your body is not your body. You can go outside your body and witness your body. You could be inside your body and see that your hand is not your hand, your leg is not your leg but it is functioning very, very beautifully. You see an object and you realize that you are that object. The observer is the observed. There is no distinction between the observer and the observed. There is a Oneness. These things happen very naturally.
Now, if you try to do these things nothing would happen. We do give teachings in order to prepare people for this awakening. But they are not to be put into practice. There are teachings which should be put into practice. There are teachings which should not be putting into practice.
Then why do we give these teachings? We give them because when the awakening does happen initially you're not able to make any sense of that, and sometimes you do become confused. In order to cope with the awakening we give you these teachings. They are not to be applied, they are not to be practiced. For example, we would tell you the awakened one his mind is empty. You cannot try to make the mind empty. If you do try to empty yourself you would become full. These teachings are merely tools to help you cope with the awakening.
Then what happens? You suddenly discover there is unconditional love. There's unconditional joy. You're no more moved into the past. You're no more moved into the future. You are in the present, not because you are trying to do something. It's just happening all the time. And suddenly you find that the world is changed. Nothing has happened to the world.
You have changed and the world looks very, very different. Where hitherto life had no meaning, no purpose. You were searching for a vision. You were searching for a purpose. Now, you are living now. A living being would not ask: What is the meaning of life? What is the purpose of Life? Because he is Living. This very naturally and spontaneously happens when the awakening does occur, and it occurred to thousands of people.
According to the revelation, these awakenings started happening from 1989 itself and the revelations spoke of the numbers progressively growing until from February 11 onwards it's an explosion to reach the number 60,000 or 70,000. It's not very specific about that. And these awakened people would in turn awaken the rest of humanity, either by directly helping people or their mere presence would also awaken others even without connecting to them directly.
Assume there are 70,000 awakened people, the power generated would be equal to 70,000 into 70,000. That is a huge number. That force would push the rest of humanity gradually into higher states of consciousness where finally by 2035 most people are awakened.
What we would witness in 2012 is there would be thousands of people who would be awakened, thousands of them would be awakened, Thousands would be in higher states of consciousness, and thousands would experience a shift in their perception, and thousands would say nothing has happened to us. That would be the situation towards the end of 2012.
Of course things start moving very fast after that. By the end of 2013 it is very different. By 2014 still different, and it accelerates. It's exponential thereafter, and then there are people who also become God Realized.
Now, whatever God you are worshipping, that God is no more a matter of belief or faith, it is reality. Let us say, your ishta devata is Rama or Krishna, you would not only be able to see Rama or Krishna inside or outside, you could talk to them. You could walk and talk with your God. If you happen to be a Christian you would walk and talk with Christ. So God becomes a reality in your life. So those who are more inclined towards God realization, that would happen. For those who are more inclined towards awakening, that would happen, and those inclined towards both, both would happen.
You would discover your God in your life. You would walk and talk with God. You would no more be the orphan you are. Thus, with that kind of commune with God you can get whatever you want. From the most mundane things, to the most advanced spiritual states, your God would give it to you. That is God Realization.
So, now let us see what are the consequences of either Awakening or God Realization? Awakening or God Realization, the individual becomes completely transformed. There's no more conflict in him, there's causeless love, there's causeless joy. He no more feels separate from the other. So, at the individual level he has no more problems. He's just a happy human being.
When that happens, it affects the whole of his family. This has been already happening. I'm talking to you with what already has happened in the homes of awakened people. The family gets transformed and once the family gets transformed we have noticed, people who come in touch with these families they are getting transformed. In other words it moves into society very naturally, very automatically, and from there it moves on to any other part of the country.
So we can clearly see here individual transformation would bring about a global transformation.
When we say this, we do not mean the world is going to change. What we are saying is people are going to change as individuals inwardly. When that happens, the way you perceive the world completely changes.
Let's take the example of a husband and wife who are quarreling or who are fighting. Well suddenly when the shift occurs what happens is, he develops a completely new perception about his wife and the wife about the husband, and instantly the conflict ceases, and there is tremendous love between them. It does not take time. It's almost instantaneous when the shift occurs.
The whole atmosphere of the family changes. It affects the children. It affects their near ones, near and dear ones. It affects their surrounding. That is how things would start happening in the world. We begin to perceive the world differently. We no more see ourselves as Hindus, Muslims, Christians or Buddhists, Indians, Pakistanis, Chinese, Americans. No. We can't see it that way. All conditioning is de-clutched.
We are functioning from a different level of consciousness. So, that fundamental division of the me and the you, that's gone. With that division gone, all conflict is gone. What is essentially all problems: be it at the individual level, the level of the family, society, nations of the world, all economic problems or political problems or social problems, ultimately all problems could be traced by the sense of separation of the individual. Now once this goes, there's complete Oneness.
With Oneness there how could there be conflict? That is the change we are talking about. The change we are talking about is inner transformation. So, the consequence of God Realization and awakening is there would be a global transformation which would pave the way to gradually remove all human problems. Because all problems emanate from the single basic fundamental division of the you and the me. Once that is gone, all problems will naturally dissolve. So through individual transformation, there would occur global transformation.
Now, let's see what the revelation spoke about the 13th Phase. The revelation said, that starting February 11th awakening would happen very, very fast, and it would spread like wildfire. So, all that is required is passionate seekers who are concerned about the state of the world today, who are concerned about man's condition, who are concerned about the Earth's condition, who are concerned about the suffering of all other species. If that passion were there in you, these are the people who would quickly become awakened.
The purpose of this webcasts is to reach out to such people who are passionate about individual transformation and global transformation, who are concerned about the issues confronting man today. These people would be able to transform themselves very, very fast. After they are transformed, they would have the power to transform others. And not only that, their mere presence, their raised levels of consciousness would help others also to very naturally raise their levels of consciousness.
So these numbers are supposed to be around 70,000 people, anywhere between 60,000 and 70,000 people who would then bring about this global transformation starting with 2013. These 70,000 people would arrive by the end of December 2012 and then they work for the others and they keep working thereafter.
So now, what you have got to do is, we will have these webcasts every Saturday Indian Time, 10:00 in the night, 10:00 pm and Sunday mornings, 10:00 am. You could join these webcasts and meditate with us. You may have to create a dark room in your house which we call the Sacred Space. After this meditation you should move into the dark space or what we call the Sacred Space and start meditating on the teaching we would have given for that week.
That is the way you've got to prepare yourself, and in February we would give you the process. This process you could apply in your own homes, and in your very homes you could become awakened. So, that's what the 13th step talks about.
And there are several models in different faiths of the world which would also help us understand this phenomenon. For example, in Buddhism, Padmasambhava who took Buddhism from India into Tibet, he said, "When the iron birds fly in the air and when pink-faced people come, the world will become awakened." Now, iron birds do fly in the air. We have our modern airplanes flying in the air, and if you come into our campuses you will find a lot of pink-faced people, a lot of westerners there very passionately seeking awakening and God Realization.
So the time has arrived and it says in less than 3 minutes people would become awakened. But every day people are becoming awakened. Of course in February it is going to be much, much faster, and much, much more powerful. And we do notice that a shift is happening in less than 3 minutes. If we have a clock and we closely watch that person shifting, it happens in less than 3 minutes. We see that there.
And in Hinduism they speak of Kalki and an army of 64,000 people, somewhere between 60 and 70, they speak of 64,000 people. Now what does the horse represent? It represents Kalki is supposed to go on horseback with a sword. According to the revelation, the horse represents speed and the sword represents Deeksha. And who is being slain? The sense of self, the sense of individual separateness. The sense of me. That is what is being slain. So, we have very beautiful parallels.
Now if you were to look at Christianity, if you listen to Christ's words, Christ says the Kingdom of Heaven is at hand. And the revelation says the Kingdom of Heaven is from 2012. The similarity is there. And then Christ says, I shall baptize you with fire and here we find kundalini is being awakened and kundalini is fire. And then Christ says, the Kingdom of Heaven is within you. And what is this awakening or God realization? It's something which happens inside you.
And then Christ says, break and the Kingdom of Heaven shall be yours. If you look at our teachings you would notice that we are continuously breaking you inside. When the breaking occurs then the Deeksha becomes very powerful, and the kundalini awakens in a big way. So you have these similarities. And for many other faiths we could go on drawing similarities. There are lots of similarities there.
So it looks that the time has arrived for this global transformation and possibly an end to human problems. So we would like to invite all those people, who are seers about this kind of transformation to join us in these weekly webcasts and participate in these meditations and get ready from February onwards to work on themselves in their very homes and to get awakened or God Realized or both. It all depends on you.
So let us all join together and let's together work for this global transformation. Namaste.
We will now move into meditation for about 7 minutes. Every week Saturdays and Sundays it will be for 15 minutes and it will be gradually stepped up. So today we will just meditate for about 7 minutes.
Sri Bhagavan India Webcast - 21 November 2010 på svenska
101130Vissa ord i början av webbsändningen lyckades inte spelas in p.g.a. tekniska problem.
Sri Bhagavan började webbsändningen med att tala om upplevelserna som eleverna hade i Jeevashramskolan, som senare blev Satyaloka campus, efter att Oneness fenomenet började manifestera sig där i juli år 1989, då den Gyllene bollen, som numera kallas för Oneness Deekshan, steg ned i några av eleverna.
…runt 200 barn i åldersgruppen 10 till 15. De flesta av barnen gick spontant in i mycket höga medvetenhetstillstånd utan att något gjordes. De såg sina tidigare liv. De hade utanför-kroppen-upplevelser. De brukade flyga hem astralt och se vad deras föräldrar gjorde. De brukade tala med träd och andra underliga fenomen som att moln följde efter barnen, de talade med Gud, de Gudar som dyrkades i deras hem.
Mängder av sådana saker hände väldigt naturligt och de blev också väldigt naturligt bra healers. Ingen lärde dem någonting av detta. De kunde heala sig själva, heala andra. Så många saker skedde spontant av sig själv. Detta fenomen blev till det vi nu kallar för Oneness Deeksha, eller Oneness Blessing, som det kallas i flera länder i världen.
Så vad är deeksha? Deekshan är i stort sett en överföring av Gudomliga energier som i sin tur väcker upp kundalinin och kundalinin skapar i sin tur en förändring i hjärnan, vilket leder till Gudsförverkligande eller uppvaknande eller båda.
När fenomenet började fick vi också flera uppenbarelser. Dessa uppenbarelser gav, som en slags vägkarta, för vad som skulle hända med fenomenet, och med hela världen. Vi har följt och gått väldigt strikt efter denna vägkarta och saker har mer eller mindre hänt precis enligt uppenbarelserna.
Uppenbarelserna talade om 13 steg för ett stort skifte i det mänskliga medvetandet. Vi har nu avklarat elva steg. Det 12e steget började den 3e november och förväntas avslutas den 10e februari. Det 13e och sista steget fram till 2012 kommer att börja den 11e februari.
Så vad var det för uppenbarelser? Låt oss titta på dem. Fenomenet började år 1989. Det var ett år då många saker hände. Berlinmuren rasade, kommunismens fall, flera händelser i Kina och många delar av världen vars effekter fortfarande kan ses i världen. Uppenbarelserna sa att år 1989 var året då den Nya Tidsåldern befruktades, befruktades i livmodern, och det visades att 13 steg senare skulle barnet födas någon gång mellan 28e oktober, 2011 och 21e december, 2012. Så det är nästan 23 år i livmodern och förlossningstiden pågår nästan från oktober 2011 till december 2012.
Vad händer när barnet har fötts? Enligt uppenbarelserna kommer en stor mängd människor ha fått ett uppvaknande vid slutet av år 2012. Uppenbarelserna talade om ett antal mellan 60,000-70,000 människor runtom planeten. Vad händer efter det? År 2012 har den Nya Tidsåldern fötts. Det är som ett litet barn som sedan börjar växa. Och år 2035 kommer detta barn kunna gå och tala.
Enligt uppenbarelserna, kommer det ske en stor, inre transformation fr.o.m. barnets förlossning, d.v.s. år 2012, fram till år 2035, det kommer sker stora uppvaknanden i det mänskliga medvetandet. Stor inre transformation kommer att ske. Denna period kallar vi för Satya Yuga (Gyllene Tidsåldern) eller födseln av Satya Yuga.
Fr.o.m. 2035 och framåt börjar den Gyllene Tidsåldern. Det som kommer hända är att denna inre transformation kommer att leda till förändringar i den yttre världen. Till exempel kommer det inte finnas någon fattigdom på planeten år 2035. Krig och konflikter kommer ha upphört. Miljön kommer att vara väldigt, väldigt ren. Människor kommer vara fyllda av orsakslös glädje och kärlek.
Det kommer att ske en enorm transformation i alla aspekter av mänskligt liv. Det kommer att ske förändringar i människans regering, sättet de utbildas på, sättet de arbetar på. Varje sfär av mänsklig aktivitet kommer att beröras, att genomgå en transformation. Så fr.o.m. år 2035 börjar den Gyllene Tidsåldern, och sedan visade uppenbarelserna vad som kommer att ske de närmsta 1000 åren.
År 2035 har i stort sett hela mänskligheten fått uppvaknandet och den Gyllene Tidsåldern börjar, några århundraden senare, ser vi att den mänskliga kroppen har omstrukturerats. Just nu är kroppen 8 gånger längre än huvudet, men då kommer den att bli 9 gånger längre. Det är den första förändringen vi ser. Allt detta kom som visioner i väldigt tydliga bilder. Man kunde se det nästan som om man var där, och även nu kan man se detta om man går igenom en väldigt avancerad process. Du kan själv se alla dessa saker, som jag talar om. De är baserade på verkliga upplevelser som vem som helst kan få.
Några århundraden senare ser vi att vi inte längre har uppdelningen av man och kvinna. Det verkar som om människan har blivit "bisexuell", d.v.s. är både man och kvinna. Och några århundraden senare ser vi att det inte finns några byggnader, fabriker eller någonting. Vi ser hela jorden som en väldigt vacker trädgård, väldigt, väldigt ren. Det är som Himlen på Jorden. Människor finns där, men de verkar inte jobba eller konsumera mat som vi gör. Det verkar som om de absorberar allt de behöver direkt från naturen.
Därför finns det heller inget behov av att arbeta eller ha organiserade strukturer i det mänskliga samhället. När de vill resa så "hänger" de sina kroppar på trädgrenar och förflyttar sitt medvetande, de kan åka var de vill, materialisera sig och tala med människor, göra vad de vill och sedan återvända. Väldigt likt det som AmmaBhagavan ofta gör, människor kommer att göra liknande saker. Det är ca 1000 år fr.o.m. nu.
Så det är en oerhörd aktivering av utveckling som börjar år 2012. Det kommer ske enorma utvecklingar inom medvetandet och också inom teknologin. Fantastisk teknologi kommer att uppfinnas. De mesta av den teknologin vi använder idag kommer vara förlegad och borta och nya teknologier kommer att finnas där. Fantastiska teknologier som också kommer hjälpa mänskligheten av utvecklas i sitt medvetande. De kommer inte motsätta varandra utan komplettera varandra.
Så det var dessa uppenbarelser som vi fick. Väldigt tydliga bilder av vad som kommer hända. Det sades t.ex att det kommer ske ett skifte i medvetandet den 3e november. Det hände exakt så.
Vad händer när detta skifte sker i medvetandet? Antingen uppvaknande eller Gudsförverkligande eller båda.
Vad menar vi med uppvaknande? För att fatta det kort, jaget är borta. Det finns ingen där inombords, ingen som kontrollerar. Du är borta. Vad som finns där är existens, medvetande, salighet och allting sker automatiskt. Du kan se att dina tankar inte är dina tankar. De kommer in i dig och sedan går ur dig. Du kan se det exakt så.
Du inser också att ditt sinne inte är ditt sinne. Ditt sinne fungerar av sig själv. Du är avidentifierad från sinnet. Du blir ett vittne till ditt eget sinne. Och senare märker du att sinnet tömmer sig själv från allt innehåll, som avundsjuka, ilska, hat, våld, konflikt, detta töms från sinnet. Det händer lite senare. Men först ser du att sinnet fungerar av sig själv. Du bevittnar det enbart.
Du inser också att din kropp inte är din kropp. Du kan bevittna din kropp. Du kan se att din hand inte är din hand, ditt ben inte är ditt ben, men det fungerar väldigt, väldigt vacker. Du ser ett objekt och upplever att du är objektet. Den som observerar är lika med det som observeras. Det finns ingen separation mellan den som observerar och det som observeras. Det finns Enhet. Detta sker väldigt naturligt.
Om du försöker att göra dessa saker kommer ingenting att hända. Vi ger ut läror för att förbereda människor för detta uppvaknande. Men de bör inte praktiseras. Det finns läror som bör praktiseras. Det finns läror som inte bör praktiseras.
Varför ger vi då ut dessa läror? Vi ger ut dem för att när uppvaknandet sker så kommer du i början inte förstå vad som händer, och ibland kan du bli väldigt förvirrad. För att du ska kunna hantera detta ger vi ut dessa läror. De bör inte appliceras, de bör inte utövas. Till exempel säger vi att för den som har fått ett uppvaknande är sinnet tomt. Du kan inte försöka göra sinnet tomt. Om du försöker tömma dig själv, kommer du enbart fylla dig själv. Dessa läror är enbart verktyg för att du ska kunna hantera uppvaknandet.
Vad händer sedan? Du upptäcker att det finns orsakslös kärlek. Det finns orsakslös glädje. Du rör dig inte längre in i det förflutna eller framtiden. Du är i nuet. Inte att du försöker vara det, utan det händer hela tiden. Och plötsligt märker du att världen har förändrats, även om ingenting har hänt med världen.
Du har förändrats och världen ser väldigt annorlunda ut. Där livet tidigare inte hade någon mening, något syfte, du sökte efter en vision och ett syfte; nu lever du. En person som lever skulle inte fråga sig själv: Vad är meningen med livet? Vad är syftet med livet? För att han lever. Detta sker väldigt naturligt och spontant när uppvaknandet kommer, och det har redan skett med tusentals människor.
Enligt uppenbarelserna, började dessa uppvaknanden att ske år 1989 och visionerna talade om att antalen skulle öka gradvis fram till 11 februari, 2011, då det därefter sker en explosion för att nå 60,000 eller 70,000 människor. Det är inte helt specifikt hur många. Och dessa människor som gått in i uppvaknanden kommer sedan att påverka resten av mänskligheten, antingen direkt genom att hjälpa människor eller att enbart deras blotta närvaro påverkar andra utan att de tar direkt kontakt med dem.
Om vi säger att det finns 70,000 människor som har fått ett uppvaknande, skulle kraften som genereras vara lika med 70,000 gånger 70,000. Det är ett enormt antal. Den kraften skulle föra resten av mänskligheten gradvis in i högre medvetenhetstillstånd fram till år 2035 då den flesta befolkningen är i uppvaknade tillstånd.
Det vi kommer se år 2012 är att tusentals människor kommer få uppvaknanden. Tusentals kommer gå in i högre medvetenhetstillstånd och tusentals kommer att uppleva ett skifte i deras sätt att uppleva verkligheten, och tusentals kommer att säga att ingenting har hänt med dem. Det kommer vara situationen mot slutet av år 2012.
Givetvis kommer saker att börja ske väldigt snabbt efter det. Mot slutet av 2013, är det väldigt annorlunda. Vid 2014 också, och så accelererar det. Därefter utvecklas det dramatiskt och det kommer också finnas människor som upplever Gudsförverkligande.
Vilken Gud du än relaterar till, den Guden kommer inte längre vara en tro, utan en verklighet. Låt oss säga att du ber till Rama eller Krishna, du skulle inte enbart kunna se Rama eller Krishna inom dig och utanför dig, du skulle kunna tala med dem. Du kommer kunna gå och tala med din Gud. Om du är kristen, skulle du kunna gå och tala med Kristus. Så Gud blir en verklighet i ditt liv. Det finns de som är mer inriktade på Gudsförverkligande, då kommer det hända dem. De finns de som är mer intresserade av upplysning, då kommer det hända dem, och för de som är intresserade av båda delarna, kommer bägge att hända dem.
Du kommer upptäcka Gud i ditt liv. Du kommer gå och tala med Gud. Du kommer inte längre vara föräldralös som du nu är. Med den nära relationen till Gud kan du få vad du vill. Från de mest vardagliga sakerna till de mest avancerade andliga tillstånden, skulle din Gud kunna ge dig. Det är Gudsförverkligande.
Låt oss nu titta på konsekvenserna av dessa uppvaknanden och Gudsförverkliganden? Uppvaknande eller Gudsförverkligande, leder till att individen blir helt transformerad. Det finns inte längre konflikt inom honom, det finns orsakslös kärlek och glädje. Han känner sig inte längre separerad från den andre. Så på den individuella nivån har han inga fler problem. Han är enbart en lycklig människa.
När det händer, påverkar det hela hans familj. Detta har redan börjat ske. Jag talar om saker som redan har hänt i de hem där människor har fått uppvaknanden. Hela familjen förändras och när familjen transformeras, har vi sett att de som kommer i kontakt med dessa familjer också förändras. Med andra ord sprider det sig väldigt naturligt och automatiskt i samhället, och därifrån sprider det sig till andra delar av landet.
Så vi kan tydligt se att individuell transformation skapar global transformation. När vi säger detta, menar vi inte att världen kommer förändras. Det vi menar är att människors inre kommer att förändras. När det händer, förändras ens sätt att se på världen.
Låt oss ta exemplet av en man och hustru som grälar och bråkar. När skiftet plötsligt sker, får han en helt ny uppfattning av sin fru och frun om mannen, och genast upphör konflikten och det finns oerhörd kärlek mellan dem. Det tar inte tid. Det sker direkt när skiftet sker.
Hela atmosfären i familjen förändras. Det påverkar barnen. Det påverkar deras nära och kära. Det påverkar deras omgivning. Det är så som saker kommer att börja förändras i världen. Vi kommer att uppfatta världen annorlunda. Vi kommer inte längre se oss som hinduer, muslimer, kristna, buddhister, indier, pakistanier, kineser, amerikaner. Vi kommer inte kunna se det så. Våra präglingar kommer att tappa greppet om oss.
Vi kommer att verka från en annan medvetenhetsnivå. Den grundläggande separationen mellan "mig och dig", kommer att vara borta. När den separationen upphör, upphör all konflikt. Vad är orsaken till alla problem i grund och botten? Vare sig det är individuella problem, problem i familjen, i samhället, mellan länder, ekonomiska problem eller politiska eller sociala problem, i slutändan kan allt spåras till känslan av separation som individen bär på. När detta försvinner, finns det enbart Enhet.
När det finns enhet, hur kan det finns konflikter? Det är förändringen vi talar om. Förändringen vi talar om är en inre transformation. Konsekvensen av Gudsförverkligande och Uppvaknande är en global transformation som gradvis kommer att undanröja alla mänskliga problem. Alla problem härstammar från samma, grundläggande upplevelse av separation mellan "jag" och "du". När det är borta, löses alla problem upp väldigt naturligt. Så genom individuell transformation, sker en global transformation.
Låt oss nu titta på vad uppenbarelserna sa om den 13e fasen. Uppenbarelserna visade, att fr.om. 11e februari kommer uppvaknanden att ske väldigt, väldigt snabbt och spridas som löpeld. Så allt som behövs är att passionerade sökare som bryr sig om för världens tillstånd idag, som bryr sig om människans tillstånd, som bryr sig om jordens tillstånd, som bryr sig om lidandet för alla varelser; om den passionen finns inom dig, så är du en av dem som kommer att få ett uppvaknande väldigt snabbt.
Syftet med våra webbsändningar är att nå ut till sådana människor som har en passion för individuell och global transformation, som känner för de utmaningar som människan står inför idag. Dessa människor kommer att kunna genomgå en transformation väldigt snabbt. Efter att dem har transformerats, kommer dem att ha kraften att transformera andra. Inte enbart det, deras blotta närvaro, deras upphöjda medvetenhetsnivå kommer att hjälpa andra att väldigt naturligt höja sin medvetenhetsnivå också.
Så dessa antal räknas vara ca 70,000 människor, någonstans mellan 60,000 och 70,000 människor som kommer att bidra till denna globala transformation som börjar år 2013. Dessa 70,000 människor kommer att finnas där vid slutet av december 2012 och sedan arbetar de för att hjälpa andra och fortsätter arbetet därefter.
Vad du nu behöver göra är, varje vecka har vi webbsändningar på lördagar kl. 17.30 svensk tid och på söndagsmorgnar kl. 05.30 svensk tid. Du kan delta i dessa webbsändningar och meditera med oss. Du kan vara i ett rum i ditt hem som du kan mörklägga och använda det som Sacred Space. Efter webbmeditationen går du in i det vi kallar för Sacred Space och börjar meditera på veckans lära.
Det är så du bör förbereda dig själv, och i februari ger vi ut den nya processen. Denna processen kommer du att kunna göra i ditt eget hem, i ditt eget hem kommer du att kunna få ett uppvaknande. Det är var det 13e steget talar om.
Det finns flera olika exempel i olika trossystem i världen som kan hjälpa oss att förstå detta fenomen. Till exempel, i Buddhism, Padmasambhava, som införde Buddhism från Indien till Tibet, sade, "När järnfåglarna flyger i luften och de rosa-hyade människorna kommer, kommer världen att bli upplyst." Nu flyger järnfåglarna i luften. Vi har moderna flygplan i luften och om du besöker vårt campus kommer du finna många rosa-hyade människor där, många västerlänningar som söker passionerat efter upplysning och Gudsförverkligande.
Så tiden har anländit och det sägs att människor kommer få uppvaknaden på mindre än 3 minuter. Varje dag får människor uppvaknanden. I februari kommer det så klart att ske mycket, mycket snabbare och mycket mer kraftfullt. Och vi märker att skiftet sker på mindre än 3 minuter. Om vi har en klocka och vi tar tid på en person som genomgår skiftet, så sker det på mindre än 3 minuter. Vi har sett det här.
I Hinduismen talar man om Kalki och att Kalki kommer på en vit häst med en armé på 64,000 människor, någonstans mellan 60,000-70,000, de talar om 64,000 människor. Vad representerar hästen? De säger att Kalki kommer rida in på en häst med ett svärd. Enligt våra visioner, representerar hästen hastigheten och svärdet representerar Deekshan. Och vem är det som huggs ned? Det separata jaget, individens känsla av separation. Känslan av "jag" och "det som inte är jag". Det är vad som huggs ned. Så det finns väldigt vackra liknelser.
Om vi tittar på kristendomen, om du lyssnar på Kristus ord, Kristus säger att himlariket finns att uppnå. Och våra uppenbarelser säger att himlariket börjar år 2012. Den liknelsen finns där. Sedan säger Kristus att "bli döpt i helig ande och eld", och vi ser att kundalinin skapar uppvaknandet och kundalinin är elden. Sedan säger Kristus också att himlariket finns inom dig. Och vad är detta uppvaknande och Gudsförverkligande? Det är något som sker inom dig.
Så det finns många liknelser och i andra religioner och trossystem kan vi hitta ännu fler liknelser. Det finns massor av liknelser.
Så det verkar som om tiden är här för en global transformation och troligtvis ett slut på mänsklighetens problem. Vi skulle vilja inbjuda alla sådana människor, som är intresserade av en sådan här transformation, att delta i våra webbsändningar som sker varje vecka och delta i dessa meditationer och förbereda sig för februari, 2011, och sedan arbeta på sig själva i sina hem och få uppvaknanden och Gudsförverkliganden eller båda. Allting beror på dig.
Så låt oss alla komma samman och arbeta tillsammans för denna globala transformation.
Namaste.
Webcast of Sri Bhagavan held on 21st November 2010
101127Namaste,
Below is the link to view the webcast of Sri Bhagwan which was held on 21st November 2010,
http://www.vimeo.com/17212453
Also, Below is the link for you where in you can REGISTER yourself to avail these Darshans LIVe on your computer!! :)
http://onenessguests.com/owellwisher.aspx
Thank you....
God Bless.....
MEDDELANDEN FRÅN ÄRKEÄNGELN MIKAEL, November 2010
101125MEDDELANDEN FRÅN ÄRKEÄNGELN MIKAEL, November 2010
"DEN FYSISKA KROPPEN ÄR EN FANTASTISKT SKAPELSE"
GENOM RONNA HERMAN
Kära mästare, allt eftersom ni går framåt på Upplysningens väg, och ni får en bättre förståelse av de kosmiska lagarna och hur universum fungerar, välkomnar vi möjligheten att ibland ge er en bättre förståelse av några av Skapelsens koncept och den fysiska kroppens komplexitet. Därför vill vi ge er en grundlig förklaring av den Eteriska Kroppens sammansättning och hur viktig den är för uppstigningsprocessen. Den Eteriska Kroppen eller Eteriska Nätet, som är av en mycket finare substans än den jordiska kroppen, syftar på den osynliga motparten till den fysiska kroppen. Den Eteriska Kroppen är sammansatt av den fysiska auran, som uttrycker ert fysiska hälsotillstånd via olika färger och distorsioner, eller bristen på dem, i det Eteriska Nätmönstret. Känslor som smärta, lidande och förbittring är tankeformer som hindrar er från att anta och bli de Ljusets Bärare som ni var ämnade att vara. Aurafältet är det osynliga elektromagnetiska kraftfält som omgärdar den fysiska kroppen, och det drar energi till er och strålar ut vibrationella frekvensmönster från er.
Den mentala kroppens aura i det Eteriska Nätet existerar nästan inte i dem som är fångade i de lägre tredje och fjärde dimensionernas begränsningar därför att de ser på världen genom ett filter av illusion skapat av deras gamla övertygelser, tankar och handlingar.
När man existerar i de tredje-/fjärde dimensionernas miljö, är den dominerande kraften i den emotionella kroppen det astrala planet. Därför, styrs en stor majoritet av människorna av sina grundpersonligheter och egots begärskropp, som består av ouppfyllda önskningar från det förflutna, likaväl som emotionella obalanser och känslor av att vara ovärdig och/eller oälskad. En av de mest dramatiska faserna av uppstigningsprocessen är att gå igenom förvrängningarna i det emotionella massmedvetandets trossystem och nå de högre dimensionernas stabilitet, fräschör och harmoni.
Glöm aldrig, rädsla tar bort din kraft. Det generella massmedvetandets trossystem får kraft av negativt, fientligt tänkande och ett motstånd mot nya koncept och förändring. Majoriteten av massorna är fastfrusna i en verklighet av smärta och lidande, men är ovilliga att ta emot nya expansiva idéer, som skulle befria dem från deras självpåtagna fängelse av begränsning.
Det är mycket viktigt att ni förblir fast grundade och balanserade inom den accepterade spännvidden av dualitet medan ni fungerar i den tredje dimensionens verklighet. Ni måste också sträva mot att etablera emotionell harmoni och klarhet i den fjärde dimensionens illusoriska värld när ni söker visdom och försöker acklimatisera er till det mentala planet i den lägre femte dimensionen. Ni måste vara ständigt uppmärksamma på Själens och det Högre Jagets viskningar. Det är också viktigt att ni förstår att ni inte bara har ett Högre Jag, utan många fragment/Gnistor av era Högre Jag utspridda i universum.
Uppstigningsprocessen innebär en gradvis integration och assimilation av nästa högre dimensions frekvensfacett av era Högre Jag. Ni befinner er i en expansionsprocess av ert Ljus och ert medvetande. Er transformation till Själv-mästarskap, och också uppstigningsprocessen, kommer att bli kraftigt accelererad när ni väl har expanderat er personliga livlina av Ljus – en eterisk tub av Ljus – som är er innersta koppling till er Gudomliga JAG ÄR Närvaro. Ni genomgår också en process där ni återetablerar er kontakt till Livets Flod via er personliga Antakarana (Regnbågsbron av Ljus), som innehåller Skapar Essensen kallad Adamantin Partiklar. Under det förflutna, har mänskligheten försvagat kopplingen till Livets Flod/Ljus så att, i de flesta människor, har den blivit endast en liten rännil.
Var och en av er har en sfär av utstrålning som är skapad av de vibrationella mönstren i era aurafält och er Själs Sång. Uppstigning innebär att föra hela det kroppsliga chakrasystemet till balans, vilket kommer att underlätta renandet, förfinandet och balanserandet av den Eteriska Kroppen/aurafältet. Ert mål är att återföra er Eteriska Kropp och aurafält till deras perfekta Gudomliga Plan, vilket är den mänskliga planen för er ursprungliga kroppsform kallad Adam/Eva Kadmon Ljus Kropp. Vi observerar er via färgbanden inom era många kroppssystem, fysiska, mentala, emotionella och eteriska, vilka har skapats av era tankar, handlingar och gärningar under era många liv genom tiderna.
Er Energi Signatur är sammansatt av vibrationella frekvensmönster som ni sänder ut dag för dag via era tankar, handlingar och bedrifter. Era Energi Signaturer kan variera starkt när ni fungerar inom den tredje-/fjärde dimensionens miljöer. Men, allt eftersom ni går framåt på vägen av Upplysning, blir er Energi Signatur gradvis mera harmonisk och melodiös och så småningom blir den en del av er permanenta Själs Sång. Era Själsliga framsteg styrs av er Själs Sång och inte era dagliga handlingar.
Er Själs Sång är sammansatt av den fjärde dimensionens mellersta och högre vibrationella mönster av villkorslös kärlek, visdom, balans och harmoni. Som en Själv-mästare, kommer Energi Signaturen och er Själs Sång att sammansmälta till en Himmelsk Mandala av ljus och färg, genom vilken ni kommer att identifieras i de högre Världarna. Ni känns igen på ert inre Ljus klarhet. Ju mer Ljus Essens som ni inkorporerar i era fysiska kroppar, ju klarare kommer er aura att glöda.
Den Heliga Ande eller era Högre Jag är den insiktsfulla högre intelligensen som övervakar och reglerar påfyllningen av Ljus, och de Andliga gåvor som tilldelas er beroende på nivån hos ert andliga medvetande och era nuvarande behov. Speciella tilldelningar är också övervakade och utdelade av era Heliga Mentala Jag som är mellanhanden mellan er och er JAG ÄR Närvaro/Guds Jag.
Meditation hjälper till att disciplinera det lägre sinnet och egot så att ni medvetet kan tona in på tankar från ert högre sinne. Det kräver tålamod och disciplin att stoppa sinnets tjatter som är normen för dem som är avstängda från sitt högre medvetande. Vi uppmuntrar er att utföra aktiv och passiv meditation. Ett dekret eller en affirmation är en bön med kraft. Det bär vara en koncis, positiv affirmation uttryckt med tillit, och en övertygelse att den kommer att manifesteras i lämplig form och vid lämpligt tillfälle. Om affirmationen sänds ut med kärleksfull avsikt för det allra bästa, allierar ni er vilja med ert Högre Jags vilja; och universell lag kommer att säkerställa att era medskapande tankar och förhoppningar kommer att kombineras med dem som kommer från andra likasinnade. Då kommer de att öka i styrka och kraft. Tyst meditation är att lyssna efter svar från era Högre Jag, er skyddsängel eller den Heliga Ande.
Minns att, en person som är centrerad i sitt Heliga Hjärta och Heliga Sinne kan överföra kosmisk sanning och inspirerade tankar till miljoner människor medan de kärleksfulla vibrationerna från deras aurafält välsignar alla som de kommer i kontakt med.
Frid och glädje är Själens egenskaper. Intelligent kärlek blir resultatet när Själen blir den dominerande inre kraften och egopersonligheten har förts under kontroll. När ni framgångsrikt har upplöst membranen av Ljus som vakar över ingången till ert Heliga Sinne, får ni tillgång till ert personliga lager av Gudomlig Visdom.
Låt oss ge er en översikt över några av de många uppstigningssymptom som ni, de initierade på Vägen, upplever just nu.
Ni märker att ni drar er tillbaka från sociala aktiviteter och evenemang som var njutbara förut. Höga ljud, folkmassor och livliga och stojiga aktiviteter stör er, och ni längtar efter avskildhet och kanske, naturens fridfullhet. När era vibrationella frekvenser höjs och blir mera harmoniska, kommer ni att frigöra er från interaktioner med människor, händelser och platser som sänder ut lägre disharmoniska frekvenser. Ni kommer också gradvis, att ha mindre och mindre gemensamt med vissa vänner och släktingar, speciellt med dem som är negativa, dömande och ovänliga mot andra.
Ni kan ha intensiva utbrott av energi då ni knappast inte kan sitta stilla, och ibland kan ni känna er så lätta inuti att ni knappt känner er kroppsliga form. Vid andra tillfällen, kan ni känna er så nedtyngda att ni nästan sjunker ned i marken, och ni kan uppleva extrem trötthet. Er kroppsliga form går igenom en intensiv metamorfos på en eterisk och cellulär nivå, och en del av de transformativa symptomen är inte trevliga – särskilt för dem som befinner sig en äldre eller en något försvagad kroppsform.
När Kundalini (Den heliga Elden) börjar stiga upp genom er ryggrad (den eteriska Ljustuben), kan man uppleva intensiv inre hetta, medan den yttre kroppen känns kall eller till och med fuktig. Det är skälet till att, i början, är det bäst att sträva efter en gradvis frigörelse av Kundalini Elden som är lagrad i Rot Chakrat vid ryggradsslutet så ni långsamt kan integrera de högre frekvenserna av Guds Ljus. Snabbare och mera är inte nödvändigtvis bättre när man befinner sig mitt i den transformerande uppstigningsprocessen.
För dem i de första stadierna av processen, kommer inte integrationen av de högre Ljus frekvenserna att vara särskilt dramatiska. Men, för de Stjärnfrön som är på god väg i uppstigningsprocessen och som har samtyckt till att bli Världs Tjänare, kan det vara en överväldigande och pågående process när de integrerar högre och högre frekvenser av Ljus att dela med sig av till andra.
Ni kan känna det som om ni befinner er i en emotionell berg och dalbana när ni upplever många emotionella höjder och djup. Ni kopplar er till och frigör mycket sammanpressad energi/disharmoniska frekvensmönster från en djup cellulär nivå, och det är viktigt att låta dessa känslor komma till ytan så att de kan transmuteras till finare Ljussubstans. Det är viktigt att ni lär er att bli en observatör av det som sker, och objektivt ser, processar och med kärleksfullt tålamod och förståelse rättar till det som uppenbaras för er.
Era matvanor kan drastiskt förändras. Vad ni än väljer att äta, följ er inre vägledning och övervaka hur er kropp känns efter att ni har ätit något. Er Kropps Elemental eller inre kroppsintelligens vaknar upp, och om ni lyssnar, kommer den att vägleda er till lämplig mat och diet. Kom alltid ihåg, måttlighet i alla ting är nyckeln.
Ni kan ha många underliga smärtor och värk, för vilka det inte finns någon definitiv diagnos. Det finns många mindre chakran och meridianpunkter i den fysiska kroppen. När de högre Ljusfrekvenserna försöker flöda genom kroppen, kan de möta motstånd vid dessa viktiga föreningspunkter vilket kan orsaka obehag. Ett av de vanligaste områdena där man upplever obehag är i den övre delen av ryggraden, mellan skulderbladen.
Ni kan känna det som om ni förlorar ert förstånd eller åtminstone ert minne. Det finns multi-dimensionella nivåer i hjärnan, så att när ni lyfter era frekvensmönster, blir de lägre nivåerna av hjärnan gradvis förfinad. Därför, kommer ni inte längre att behöva eller kunna få tillgång till mycket av er negativa gamla historia och också mycket av de trivialiteter som ni har lagrat där. Ni får tillgång till de högre nivåerna av hjärnan där ert Heliga Sinne finns. Föreningen mellan det Heliga Sinnet och det Heliga Hjärtat är en viktig del av uppstigningsprocessen.
Kära ni, ni måste erkänna, det är en inspirerande tid att vara i en fysisk kropp, och ändå kämpar er fysiska kropp för att hänga med i de ständigt ökande frekvenserna som ni integrerar stund för stund och dag för dag. Många av er har inte haft förkylningar, influensa eller haft magbesvär under många år men upplever nu dessa försvagande symptom, och en del av er frågar, ”Vad gör jag för fel?” Ni gör inget fel, mina modiga vänner; det är det som ni gör rätt som orsakar några av dessa obehagliga anfall av kroppslig plåga. Vi erkänner faktumet att dessa skeenden inte är behagliga att uppleva. Men, vi vill ge er en annan facett av sanning att fundera på. Många av er som är djupt inne i transformations/uppstigningsprocessen upplever dessa obehagliga symptom som ett sätt att snabbt transmutera de gamla negativa energierna i den fysiska kroppen. Man kan kalla det en transmutation eller ett dop genom eld, ett brännande/frigörande av gamla frekvensmönster för att låta de högre mera förfinade kristallina cellerna av medvetande infiltrera och ta plats i det inre. Inte alla virus är dåliga, det är inte heller alla de obehagliga symptom ni upplever. Se dem som medel till ett slut och tjänande ett högre syfte. Dessa saker kommer också att gå över, kära ni.
Vi ber er att vårda er själva, att som aldrig tidigare vara uppmärksamma på era fysiska kroppar och de signaler eller meddelanden er visa kropps Elemental sänder er. Hur kan ni njuta av den vackra värld av kärlek, glädje och överflöd som ni skapar om era värdefulla fysiska kroppar inte är så livfulla och friska?
Möt oss i vår Pyramid av Ljus, kära ni, och låt oss hjälpa er att gå igenom processen med lätthet, behag och stor glädje. Må vår Fader/Moder Guds utstrålning flöda ned över er och fylla er med det Eviga Livets Ljus. Vet att vi är ständigt nära för att guida och beskydda er.
JAG ÄR Ärkeängel Mikael.
Kiesha Crowther Little Grandmother, one of the 12 young Shaman wisdom keepers
101124www.youtube.com/watch?v=GTsU8bjrgcw
Kiesha Crowther Little Grandmother, one of the 12 young Shaman wisdom keepers to establish the "Tribe of many colors" recently was on a European Tour spreading her message on how to start living from the heart.
This is the 3rd video from the Zurich workshop covering questions from the audience on subjects such as crop circles, star beings, God, UFO sightings, the purpose of crystals and who are the 12 Wisdom Keepers.
Recorded on November 2/3, 2010. Don't worry about the small cuts in the video; it is due to editing out the German translations to make it more compact, keeping only the English original.
Watch the full video on http://vimeo.com/17023911
http://tribeofmanycolors.net
http://littlegrandmother.net
http://crystalsun.ch/en/
http://gandharva.at/
http://www.livestream.com/2012truth
Teaching on Consciousness Witnessing and Living Without Conflict
101119
http://bit.ly/aP3Y6f
Bhagavan, you say we will be watching the mind. Who is it that will be watching the mind if there is no 'self?'
It is consciousness which is witnessing . It is what we call 'chita.' And then it has also great joy that we call 'ananda.' That's why we chant 'Sat chit ananda,' that's what we chant. So these are the properties of cosnciousness and it is also is the ability to witness. It cannot participate, but it can witness. So, it is consciousness which is witnessing the mind which is witnessing the thoughts. And when consciousness witnesses, it does not identify. It just sees thoughts, it just sees the mind, it just sees the actions. So, You are the pure consciousness.
So right now you're identifying yourself with the mind. That's why you're in prison within the mind. But once you jump out, you're free of the clutches of the mind and all that you are doing is witnessing. To witness, you have got to witness, and see what it is like. I don't have to describe that, then you form concepts. Once you get there, it is all very clear. Nobody need teach you anything, you'll know for yourself. You'll get there. Don't worry.
Every week people are getting there now. The process is speeding up now. More and more people are making it across the world and so effortlessly. Then they start laughing because you'll wonder how did I miss this all these years. Such a simple thing it is, as simple as breathing. You'll really be laughing at yourself. All things are witnessed, that is all. It is consciousness which is witnessing. Which is nowhere but everywhere. You can't say it is here, you can't say it is there, it is everywhere. Everything is being witnessed. More if I will talk, you will make concepts out of it. I will leave it like that waiting for you to get there.
Bhagavan, can we do something to breakthrough this 'rat race' of survival?
Right now you are caught up in the mind and you keep doing all these things for the sake of escaping your own suffering. Now when you get awakened. The same things you will do. The same job, the same profession, the same business. But the experience is totally different. Now you are doing what you are doing. Once you become awakened. Let's say you are a carpenter. It's no more work. As you do carpentry, you will love it and you'll experience every moment of it. Let's say you're a clerk in an office. As you put ink to paper and you keep scribbling something, some figures or something, that is enjoyable. It's no more work. Suppose you're say you're a hotelier. It's again enjoyable. All work becomes thoroughly enjoyable. Right now it's drudgery. You have to do it for survival or as a means to escape your own suffering. But It's no more required. The same work goes on. If you are a tailor, you continue to be a tailor on awakening. A barber, yes you continue to be a barber. Or a scientist, you continue to be a scientist. Nothing changes. The same wife, the same children, and the same home. But I all looks very, very different. The experience is very different. It will not disturb your normal life in fact you become very efficient. You become very capable. Because no stress, no strain, no conflict. So supreme efficiency comes out of it. You don't have to worry about it.
Kiesha in Zurich
101118Kopiera länken och lyssna!
http://www.vimeo.com:80/16812713
Kiesha Crowther Little Grandmother, one of the 12 young Shaman wisdom keepers to establish the "Tribe of many colors" recently was on a European Tour spreading her message on how to start living from the heart.
She also speaks about our ancestors, the pole shift, where the extraterrestrials are hiding and what we can do to change our world and heal Mother Earth.
This is a 25 minutes summary of her workshop in Zurich, Switzerland of early November 2010. Two shorter videos on 2012 and various subjects will be published soon. The workshop was held in two languages (English with German translation) but we compiled for you only the English original.
This Friday November 19, 2010, there will be a special program of the channel "2012 and beyond" on Kiesha's workshop in Zurich at 3 pm EST / 9 pm CET, with a live comment and the presentation of the first 2 videos as well as a 3rd one (Q & A in Zurich) which has not yet been published! Here is the link of the channel: livestream.com/2012truth
Other videos on Kiesha:
NEW: Kiesha speaks on 2012: vimeo.com/16830337
One with Nature: vimeo.com/11191065
Interview with Mayanist Mark van Stone
101117Dear Friends,
For a long time the professional Mayanists, the academic scholars studying the ancient Maya, have been silent about the calendar and its upcoming so called end. Professor Mark van Stone has however now written a book on the topic, compiling all ancient Mayan sources regarding our own time: 2012 - Science and Prophecy of the ancient Maya, which may allow us to separate the modern urban legends about the Maya from what the old sources are actually saying.
In this You Tube interview that I have made with Mark we are also discussing the Long Count end date and its origin and I feel listening to this is a must for anyone seriously interested in understanding the Mayan calendar:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OSu-SWJILQU
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=owLqAoxC2cA
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=67-aQv_BzW4
For those interested in my own view of the descent of Bolon Yokte Ku I refer to my
article on the Tortuguero monument:
http://www.calleman.com/content/articles/the_tortuguero%20_monument.htm
Best
Carl Johan
Berlin, 5 Ix (November 16, 2010)
'novem' meaning nine ...
101117November may well indeed be the eleventh month on the Gregorian calendar, but it actually gets its name from the Latin word 'novem' meaning nine.
According to the Feng Shui pantheon and many other numerological ones, the number nine is considered the single most powerful of all the single digit numbers.
When someone or something is surrounded by the vibration of the number nine, it's also believed to be represented or symbolized by energies that have reached their fullest potential, as well as their highest vibrations.
Nine represents and symbolizes the ability to manifest Health, Happiness and Prosperity, or what are called the Three Great Blessings in the Feng Shui tradition.
Ellen Whitehurts
Five different types of Luck
101116One of the many theories accorded to the Feng Shui philosophy says that there are five different types of luck that each of us can experience.
The first of these is called 'Heaven Luck,' or what we might call astrology. This luck speaks to the position that the sun, the moon and the planets were in at the exact moment that we were born. Many believe that those planetary positions can influence and greatly impact our destiny. If you've ever researched or read your own horoscope, then on some level you buy into this theory.
The second kind of Feng Shui luck is 'Man Luck,' or the kind that allows you to scratch off a lottery ticket and win five bucks right on the spot. This is the kind of luck that has you pulling into a crowded parking lot at the exact same time as someone in the closest possible parking space is pulling out.
The third type of luck is education: Knowledge is power, after all. This luck speaks for itself. The more you know, the more opportunities you create that potenti ally bring great fortunes and good luck.
The fourth kind of Feng Shui luck speaks to the energy of this day, 'National Philanthropy Day.' This day is dedicated to giving something of yours away, but Feng Shui defines the term philanthropy in a much more broad perspective and views it as any sort of service to community. After all, whenever you give whatever it is you have to give, it's priceless because it comes from you. Charity really does begin at home.
The fifth and last kind of luck dovetails off that idea of philanthropy as it reminds us that what goes around comes around. It's Karma, the ages old idea that whatever you give out, whether good, bad or indifferent, you'll get back in spades. So why not reach out and give something to someone who is less fortunate that you? Money. A cup of coffee. A smile. Love, my friends, makes the world go 'round, but you can make it spin a little nicer, a little happier, a little less anxious. You have that power. And if you ask me, that's pretty darn lucky and philanthropic!
Ellen Whitehurts
Update for Sadhana with New Commandment
101115 Update for Sadhana with New Commandment
Amma Bhagavan...
Raghavanji has conveyed Sri Amma Bhagavan's latest message for the awakening processes which has accelerated ....
Bhagavan has stated there is a going to be a sea of changes beginning 26 November
Lots of people will have visions of their personal Gods...
There will be God Realisation happening to lots of devotees...
Bhagavan has always maintained Awakening may not assure God realization but, God realization ensures Awakening...
Amma Bhagavan has added one more commandment to the existing one...
INNER INTEGRITY...
Now there are eleven commandments.....
Amma Bhagavan is so Dynamic; they are leaving no stone unturned to ensure the awakening to their dear children....coming out with new solutions for the challenges thrown...
If found necessary Amma Bhagavan may come out with one more commandment....
Amma Bhagavan has asked us to sit in front of the Srimoorthy and contemplate on each of the commandments and see where we are lacking. Do this for 21 minutes. Ask Amma Bhagavan to help in that area and chant "AmmaBhagavan" twenty-one minutes and take deeksha.... This will ensure the awakening!
AmmaBhagavan has asked to contemplate on the Inner Integrity as that will help see all those area where we are falling short...
To see the Satya (Truth) we have to see the Asatya (Untruth)
These areas are the roadblocks to the awakening...
Once these blocks are removed with this Sadhana, one will automatically become awakened...
Amma Bhagavan has asked to start this Sadhana with immediate effect and to continue till February 12th 2011....when a new and final process will be initiated for "PERMANENT AWAKENING".
But to have the full effect of this process one should be free of all the blocks which is hindering the Awakening....
Come February 2011, and the world will come to know who Amma Bhagavan is and the power of AmmaBhagavan...
These Sadhanas and process will determine who will be in the final Seventy Thousand Awakened souls to meditate with Amma Bhagavan for the awakening of the MANKIND....
Let us all take this Sadhana seriously and help Amma Bhagavan help us to get awakened and the help them get the world awakened..!!!
PRIVILAGED CHILDREN OF THE DIVINE THAT WE ARE!
Nandesh
----------------------
Sadhana Originally posted on October 27, 2010.
Amma Bhagavan Sharanam...
Dear Oneness brothers and sisters...
This sadhana comes through Rhagavanji's sharing with Nandesh
He said wonderful things are happening after the Navarathri homa...
Energies have been high and people are getting awakened very easily...
During his meeting with Amma, the divine mother said things are on fast track... changes are going to happen in a flash....in a moment. People are going to be simply awakened...
There is one simple Sadhana to be performed for the hastening of Awakening..
Sri Bhagavan has given ten commandments. Sri Bhagavan has asked the devotees to contemplate on each of those commandments and see where we are lacking...(Inner integrity will help here in seeing the inauthentic self's patterns.)
Then one should sincerely pray, plead, request , command or demand as per our bond to our beloved Amma Bhagavan...
1. Talk/Contemplate with the Srimurthi for twenty one minutes about the contents on the list below.
2. Chant Amma Bhagavan ...Amma Bhagavan ..Amma Bhagavan....for twenty one minutes daily..
This will get that issue resolved and take the devotee one step ahead towards Mukthi..
AMMA BHAGAVAN has released the phenomena last Sunday that is on 24th October 2010...
This was supposed to happen in November 3rd it seems..but our beloved parents have released it earlier..
Amma Bhagavan has urged the devotees to take advantage of the current times, energy waves and focus on the MUKTHI...awakening..
The biggest hurdle is people are preoccupied with Artha (finance ) and Kaama
(Desires)...and the energy is getting dissipiated..
Amma Bhagavan wants everybody to focus on Mukthi and get awakened as rest all other things will follow automatically..( ARTHA , KAMA and DHARMA)
Following are the Ten Commandments which when worked and contemplated on will reveal our lacking and will help in seeing it..Each time you do this practice, focus on each of these and see which ones resonate to spend time with in contemplation or conversation with Sri AmmaBhagavan
1. PASSION.
2. SIGNIFICANCE TO MINIMUM.
3. SACREDNESS.
4. SURRENDER.
5. BOND WITH SRI AMMA BHAGAVAN.
6. GRATITUDE. ( to all that is...parents,body,mind, masters and the divine)
7. EMOTION. (Balance of Emotions)
8. FORGIVENESS. ( Self and Others )
9. KARMA ( law of action and reaction....earning of Satkarma -- doing good actions in the world)
10. SENSITIVITY TO OTHERS FEELINGS
Summary: srimurthi for 21 minutes to resolve it...then chant 21 minutes..Amma Bhagavan ..Amma Bhagavan...Then take blessing from padukas or sri murthi. Lie in Savasan for some minutes.
-------------------------------------
Videos on the topic of the Seventh Day
101020Dear Friends,
Here are a two links to interviews made with me regarding the
upcoming Seventh day. The first is an audio interview made by Bianca at the Nightfall Project: http://www.nightfall-project.com/radio.html.
And the second is a video made by Shana Ting Lipton:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yN-PEiw1dVg
Shana Ting Lipton has also made an interview about unity consciousness and
the upcoming Ninth wave:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=qxh8vEcOrcQ.
I think it may be a point in trying to understand what is unique in each wave.
In my view, the Seventh day of the Eighth wave provides the balancing that is a
necessary foundation for the ninth wave.
If you are planning or hosting an EVENT in honor or celebration of SEVENTH DAY and would like to announce it on the Tree of Life Celebration calendars, send your information (below) to keeper@tlckeepers.com.
DATE(S)/TIME/LOCATION
Name of Event
Description (1-2 sentences maximum)
Contact for Connecting or More Information
(can be a person/phone/email or website)
If you have a downloadable invitation, send us the link to send people to for download of PDF/printing
Regards
Carl Johan
Dasara, an Eastern festival begins, 101017
101018Sunday, October 17
Today begins Dasara, an Eastern festival that commemorates the victory of the gods over the demon, light over darkness and knowledge over ignorance.
Dasara, also called Navaratri, is among the most important festivals celebrated in India, as that culture holds the vision that the forces of good will overcome any forces trying to prevent mankind's progress towards spiritual light.
There are many popular rituals associated with Dasara, with most of them thousands of years old.
One of these rituals calls for a complete cleaning of the house, inside and out, during these ten holy days.
Once done, the celebrants often decorate the entrance of their homes with torans and flower-studded strings.
This proactive step welcomes the light of knowledge into the home and closely resembles the Feng Shui cure of putting a red flowering plant outside the front entryway of your house in order to invite fortune to your door.
Placing any flowers or flowering plant outside the front entryway, at the left of the door as you look at it from the street, is also believed to usher in Health, Happiness and Prosperity, the Three Great Blessings according to Feng Shui.
So assess your own front door area and make it come alive with potential, possibility and, of course, Divine light!
Ellen Whitehurst
Celebrate the beginning of the Seventh Day
101016Please disseminate, post and translate!
Dear CoCreators with the Mayan Calendar,
All over the world people are planning gatherings to celebrate the beginning of the Seventh Day of the Eighth wave (Galactic Underworld) on the days November 3-7.
The background of these events will be the balancing and unification of East and West, Intuition and Rationality and maybe most importantly Feminine and Masculine.
The Cosmos is inviting us all to align with this shift. In this article I have described what I see as the energetic background of this event from a Mayan calendar perspective: http://on.fb.me/auno2b.
On the same facebook page
http://www.facebook.com/group.php?gid=116031818451125&ref=ts
you will find a description of a balancing process suggested by Petter Barve and you are welcome to there post your ideas of how to best download this new cosmic energy shift on the highest level.
I am convinced that the transformation of consciousness is not something that will just fall down on us from the sky on some particular date, but is something that will require our active participation as cocreators in alignment with the true energy shifts of the Mayan calendar.
In the case of the beginning of the Seventh day I feel we have an opportunity for healing as well as for having fun and enjoying our own creativity.
Thus, I encourage you all to find the means to do so and spread this message to the extent possible. If there is someone who feel called to work with our new web page
http://www.treeoflifecelebration.com
please contact Haley at haley@tlckeepers.com.
In Lak'ech
Carl Johan Calleman.
New Sadhana 20101011
101012Sadhana sent via Sri Raghavanji,Teachings on Relationships and Freeing Ourselves from Suffering,
Composite Video/Music with Audio Teaching from Sri Bhagavan
New Sadhana
Dear Amma Bhagavan devotees,
I happened to speak to Sri Raghavanji earlier today. He was very excited about the wonderful things going to happen to all the Amma Bhagavan devotees. Awakening is hundred percent and also the solution to all the material as well as spiritual problems.
Among other things he informed me of one Sadhana which the Lord has directly given to Raghavanji which I am sharing it with you all my dear brothers and sisters of Oneness family....
He met Bhagavan this Friday and this was given on that day...
Raghavanji has asked me to give this to all the children of Sri Amma Bhagavan...
I am sending to all on my address list. Please forward it to as many people as possible...
The Sadhana is as follows...
Sit in front of Amma Bhagavan Srimoorthy and chant Moola mantra three times, invoke the presence. The presence as we all know takes us into altered states where the mind goes background.
Take ONE MAJOR problem ....
Identify and visualize the ideal solution to that problem...
Please do not state the problem or cry about the problem.
Visualize the ideal solution and feel happy about the solution and ask Amma Bhagavan to make it happen....( Depending upon your bond with Amma Bhagavan you can demand, command, request , intimidate or coax our beloved Amma Bhagavan to make it happen.)
Chant Amma Bhagavan, Amma Bhagavan, Amma Bhagavan TWENTY ONE MINUTES (21 minutes)
After twenty-one minutes stretch your hands towards Srimoorthy and take blessings from the Srimoorthy.
Amma Bhagavan Anugraheethosmi (Blessings)
Amma Bhagavan Aishwaryasthomi (Prosperity)
Amma Bhagavan Arogyaasthomi. (Health)
Take deeksha from the Srimoorthy or Padukas.
Mahadeeksha devotees (Blessing Givers) can exchange deekshas.
This can be done as individually, family or as in groups...
The group can also take sankalpa for one devotee and do this sadhana and give collective deeksha to that devotee...
Do this regularly for twenty one days without break...
I thank on Sri Raghavanji on behalf of all the oneness family members for reaching this message from Bhagavan to us...
In all gratitude.and humility..
Lots of love..
Nandesh
11.10.10
Why Relationships at ALL?
101012Sri Bhagavan Teaching - Why Relationships at All?
video link: http://www.worldonenesscommunity.com/video/why-relationships-at-all
Question: If we are in love there is a fear of losing the dear one. If we are not in love then we suffer from loneliness. Then why should there be relationship if it's going to cause suffering?
You are in love precisely because you have the fear of losing it. You'd never value a thing if you do not have the fear of losing it. So everything in this universe is a paradox.
If there is a front there is a back. If there is a high then there is a low. That is how the universe is structured. Unless you have a fear of losing your friend or your spouse or your children, for some reason or the other, you would not be able to love them. And there is loneliness, so you have got to love.
This love is sustained by the threat that you are going to lose the person either through sickness or whatever it could be. That's all there is to life, and the beauty of life is if you could see this and the inevitability of the situation you would start accepting it and in fact, you would fall in love.
Actually, there is no problem with a given situation. The problem is you are not able to accept the "what is." The "what is", is whatever is there at that point of time and nothing can be done about it. So once you realize that, you would accept it and when you accept it, love spontaneously arises in your heart.
Cultivating a virtue is of no use except helping you fit into society. Trying to be good, to be kind, to be generous all this would not help you in becoming awakened because it is not true to you. That's why we often say if you are not awakened do not behave like one. If you are not a mahatma do not behave like a mahatma. You don't have to compare yourself with Gandhi, Christ or a Buddha.
There is no need for you to feel bad out it. You are you and there is nobody else like you. You are unique with all your jealously, your anger, your hatred and whatever else is there. You should be able to see your own anger, your own jealously like you see an object.
That is possible when you become non-judgmental. Then everything would remain as it is. It would not be what you think they are. Remember these things are put there by the universe. The flow of the universe has produced you. You have to go with it, live with it, experience it and enjoy it.
An awakened person is one who is not trying to be anybody else. He is himself. The problem with you is you are trying to change. It is like trying to straighten up a dog's tail. You'll never be different.
When you actually see the improbability, accepting yourself and loving yourself happens. You don't accept or love, it just happens.
Seven Truths to be Free from Suffering
101012Sri Bhagavan Teaching - Seven Truths to be Free from Suffering
Question: Nobody in this world is free of sufferings. What should be done to be free from suffering?
Sri Bhagavan: That is very simple. Please follow seven truths to be free from suffering.
1. Everything comes from a single source. It could be God or Energy. There is no beginning and end to life.
2. If you identify this source, you'll not differentiate between good, bad, right or wrong. All these things are our views. Everything came from one source.
3. Life is nothing but your search for "SELF". In your life, things that happen to you, people you see, everything reflects your "Self". If you are suffering from poverty, it means there something wrong within yourself. You have to correct this to get out of poverty. If you have hatred, then who ever you see will exhibit the same quality. If you have evil thoughts, people you meet will also have evil thoughts. Try to understand yourself first.
4. Realize that anything you experience in this Life is by God's grace. Supposing you slip while walking, try to realize that as God's grace too. If you see God in everything, your life will become wonderful.
5. Realize that anything you experience in this Life is just a "test" for you by God. It is not a bad experience. If it is considered as a bad experience then it would mean that God is not compassionate. If you experience a problem, consider it an opportunity for you to face it and come out of it. You've been given people, wealth and confidence to face challenges. If you understand this, your confidence will improve. Just to test your confidence God gives you a test.
6. If you realize that anything you experience is a test for you by God, then you'll be able to think deep about the problem and handle it in a better way. You'll understand its result. Then you'll have no fear.
7. If you understand the above 6 truths, then there will be an enormous transformation in your body. From then on, you'll not only have compassion, but you'll become that "compassion".
The Conscious Co-Creation Continues 100826
100826Please feel free to post, translate and disseminate!
The Conscious Co-Creation Continues:
Celebrating the return of harmony between the feminine and masculine as we enter the Seventh Day
About 5100 years ago, at the beginning of the Mayan Long Count (6th Wave or National Underworld) a polarity of consciousness was introduced that created a separation between the masculine and the feminine. The result has been a suppression of the intuitive and feminine aspects of the human mind and soul. The pain associated with this separation has created a long-standing conflict between men and women that has resulted in often unbalanced, twisted and distorted relationships between them. With the beginning (November 3, 2010, 1 Imix) of the Seventh day of the 8th wave, (Galactic Underworld) a polarity shift in consciousness will support humanity in the co-creation of a new, balanced and more harmonious, relationship between the masculine and feminine. For the two days November 6-7 women and men all over the world are invited to locally co-create processes and ceremonies designed to restore the sacred relationship between the feminine and masculine. The intention of these ceremonies is to co-create balance and mutual respect between the genders and the freedom for all individuals to embody any combined expression of the sacred feminine and masculine. In the first of these two days members of each of the two genders are encouraged to develop healing processes of its own, while in the second day processes and unifying ceremonies may be performed, which serve the mutual recognition, honoring and celebration of the divine feminine and masculine in all of us.
Events are already being planned in several locations in the world for this shift in consciousness and the process has started to create a unified web presence for these.
Carl Johan Calleman
SriAmma Bhagavan's Message on Day of Love August 15 2010
100816Teachings Sent for Day of Love-Amma's Birthday: August 15
The absence of love is the root cause of all problems. And the cause is not very far. It in fact lies within each individual. It is the inner condition of the individual that is resulting in the condition of the collective. Every endeavour in life is only a pursuit for love. As a child one was unhappy, because he/she wanted someone to love him/her alone. Much later the search continued in school with teachers, spouse and then with one's children. So life has remained one long process of waiting. Often one tests his/her near and dear ones for what one calls real love and lands up feeling dissatisfied and angry.
What people think of as love is merely asking, craving, and imploring for love. This 'asking' for love is what one thinks is love. The consequence is frustration, annoyance and desperation.
Every individual has void inside. To fill the void one uses relationships. The person constantly needs to feel loved whereby he/she tends to be possessive in relationship. Where love is possession there is always the fear of losing it. One destroys his/her freedom and everybody else's freedom. An act of fear is claimed to be love. The truth is people don't love themselves and relationship is a means to love oneself. They try to fulfil themselves through relationships.
All love could only begin with love for oneself. Know that you could do only to others what you do unto yourself. Contemplating on it one would discover that the way one relates to oneself internally is exactly the way he/she relates to others. If an individual condemned and criticized himself for every thought, word /deed of his, he would certainly do the same to others also. If one was obsessed and disturbed with his/her own shortcomings, then he/she would trouble others as well about their shortcomings too. When one stops warring with oneself and accept himself/herself as he /she is, then one is in love with oneself. One has made peace within and hence with the world. One would discover that love is the essence of this universe. It's one's true nature.
As cited from http://www.onenessuniversity.org
Rättelse av Carl Johan Calleman på Chandras uttalanden om medvetande och Mayakalendern
100629Chandra är en av hjälparna vid Oneness University, Indien. Han svarade felaktigt, vid en telefonkonferens, på frågor angående Carl Johan Callemans teorier om medvetande och Mayakalendern.
Nedan kan ni läsa Carl Johan Callemans klargörande.
Response to Mr Chandra regarding the Conscious Convergence
I read some very surprising remarks by Mr Chandra regarding my own work, the Mayan calendar and the Conscious Convergence that express an ignorance of the matters involved that it seems necessary to respond to them. First of all let me start by saying that the Mayan calendar is the only calendar of our planet that is based on the premise that consciousness is primary to matter. All other calendars are based on astronomical cycles. Take for instance the Hindu system of the Yugas, which takes its beginning with a certain astronomical constellation of planets in 3102 BC or the frequent use of the precessional cycle in Chaldean-European astrology and Buddhism. These are examples of expressions of the mind set where matter, in this case celestial bodies and their cycles, is primary to and determines consciousness. Likewise, the Gregorian, Muslim and Jewish calendars are all based on the Earth’s and the moon’s cycles and are hence connected to materialist philosophies. The astronomical basis of other calendars is the reason that the Mayan calendar alone points to the year 2012 and no other calendar system, including the Vedic, ever mentions this year.
This should be a cause of tremendous respect for the ancient Maya who developed the only non-astronomically based calendar system of our planet and also a cause for studying it seriously before it is discussed. For those that are serious about understanding the timing of events in the time ahead there is no way around actually studying the Mayan calendar and how the waves of consciousness that it describes are generated. In the recent year especially, when a hype has been created around the year 2012, this is all the more important since not everyone treats the Mayan calendar as the unique source of knowledge that it is. More often than not, people are trying to squeeze it into their already existing box of thinking and then miss the whole point. Especially since the Mayan calendar is not based on astronomical cycles it becomes imperative to understand how and when consciousness shifts take place according to this system.
Based on the study of the nine waves of evolving consciousness that the Mayan calendar desribes I have then personally become known throughout the world as a scientist who has demonstrated a model for the evolution of the cosmos in which, unlike in practically all other scientific models, consciousness is primary to matter. This was true both for my earlier books on history and even more so for The Purposeful Universe, which rewrites science to offer a logical and factually based model for all of evolution, including biological, in such a way that consciousness is primary to matter. Consciousness is a relationship with the divine expression of the Cosmic Tree of Life, which is not a physical structure but a Platonic three-dimensional organizer of space-time, what the Maya called the Heart of the Heavens. It is through the influence of the shifts between different states in the Cosmic Tree of Life that consciousness evolves. This happens according to a pre-set plan for such changes from the so called Big Bang about 15 billion years ago until October 28, 2011. Human consciousness evolves because we are created in the image of this Tree of Life and so are in resonance with its shifting quantum states. Some have talked about The Purposeful Universe as “probably the most important book written” (http://www.mindheartmedia.com/2c), but regardless of whether this assessment is shared or not I think it is a simple fact that it is not a book that can be ignored by anyone with a serious interest in science and spirituality. Mr Chandra’s claim that “we” differ from Mr Calleman, who thinks that consciousness is an epiphenomenon of matter is so absurd that I feel an apology is in its place and if nothing else it shows that he talks about things of which he knows nothing. How could consciousness evolve according to the pre-set plan of the Mayan calendar if it were an epiphenomenon of matter?
This brings us to the topic of the Conscious Convergence on July 17-18, 2010 (see
www.theconsciousconvergence.com), which seems to have triggered his remarks.
At this event, people all over the world will be gathering to set up the intention of manifesting unity consciousness in line with the incoming ninth wave of the Mayan calendar (Again, this is not a material phenomenon, but an altered relationship with the Heart of the Heavens timed according to the Mayan calendar). In this event the planetary Tree of Life will also be recreated ceremonially through the participation by groups in the four corners of the world. For the fist time ever some of the most well-known and respected elders of the Maya: Don Alejandro, Don Rigoberto Itzep and Hunbatz Men among others, will be signaling through their ceremonies in the West that “it is time.” In the East there will be a Chinese-Hindu convergence in Singapore and Bali. In the North people in Scandinavia will be gathering and in the South, at the roots of the global Tree of life will Bushmen, representatives of the oldest existing culture of our planet, for the first time ever be participating in an event of this kind together obviously with many others in South Africa. While of course people will be gathering in many other places as well a Medicine wheel based on the planetary Tree of Life will be recreated and so through a unifying ceremony we may reconnect with the source of the evolution of consciousness in preparation for its activation of a new wave, the ninth.
This event can be likened to setting up to a base camp for a climb to the ninth level of the Mayan evolution scheme, which is the one that will bring the transformation to unity consciousness and is activated March 9, 2011. The Conscious Convergence is thus placed according to the Mayan calendar ahead of this since it is a time for people to prepare spiritually and set the intention of being part of delivering the cosmic plan in relationship with the divine energies. It is for those that want to commit themselves to being co-creators in the cosmic plan and do not want to contend themselves with being passive observers of something they expect will happen at some date in the future. It is for those that intend to manifest unity consciousness in the time ahead and realize that this intention is expressed collectively as broadly as possible so that it will come to live a life of its own as a support for those that intend to make the climb (It is not realistic to believe that this shift will be easy since a shift to unity consciousness will also a bring a downfall of many established hierarchical structures that are not consistent with this). It is also very important that those that chose to be part of this intention setting event are authentic about setting this intention. It should not be done because, it “sounds good”, because your friends, a guru or a movement says so, but it is for those that are called from the inside to co-create the transformation to unity consciousness. This is the possibility for our planet, which is promised by the Mayan calendar. Personally, I believe it is now or never, but also that these two days will only be the beginning of a climb from which the new world will be created. If we do not broadly ask for this transformation of consciousness, not only for ourselves as individuals, but also as a committed collective, what right does humanity have to expect that it will happen?
Carl Johan Calleman,
Seattle, June 29, 2010 (8 Jaguar)
World Oneness Day 100609, Message from Sri Bhagavan
100608”The growing inability to live as a family, to feel for each other and to connect to each other is a world-wide crisis. It is a relationship crisis. The crisis of our present day civilization is not so much biological as it is psychological. Our sense of separation having become too strong, life has become a battle for significance and a struggle for identity. The struggle to be a “somebody”, even at the expense of others and at the cost of hurting others is a very unhealthy sign. People destroy themselves emotionally, spiritually and physically. It is a disease and is most reflected in families today. Unless the family is held intact, individuals would go to pieces. They would miss a mother´s care, a father´s attention and a partner´s love. Loneliness and loss of identity would eat into them. To escape from loneliness and the fear of being a nobody, people would pursue destructive paths. This would ultimately lead to the break-up of the individual and the fragmentation of society and civilization itself. Though the world is heading in this direction; all is not lost. There is a beautiful window opening up for humanity to awaken into a new state of consciousness; that is – Awakening. When you are awakened you automatically start experiencing everything around you including your relationships. You feel a greater sense of connection to all people and all things. Emotional hurts are hard to sustain because awareness keeps consciousness empty; ready for a fresh experience. Life this way is so ordinary that it is extraordinary. You would begin to realize, this is how you always had been.”
Sri AmmaBhagavan
Mayaelders deltar i Conscious Convergence
100601De Maya-åldermän kommer att delta i the Conscious Convergence
Tre Mayaåldermän, Don Alejandro Oxlay, Don Rigoberto Itzep och Hunbatz Men kommer att delta i the Conscious Convergence, den 17-18 juli 2010 och utföra ceremonier på dessa datum. Dessa tre Maya-åldermän är bland de mest respekterade och välkända representanterna för Mayafolket, dock med något olika roller i deras traditionen.
Hunbatz Men är förmodligen den mest välkända åldermannen från Yucatec-Maya och är initiativtagare till Maya Mystery Schools, (see http://www.themayas.com.mx/
Don Rigoberto Itzep leder "The Wajshakib Batz" (8 apor) ceremonierna i Momostenango i Guatemala, vilka spelar en betydelsefull roll för att uppehålla kalenderns kontinuitet genom initieringen av nya dagräknare. (see http://www.maya-portal.net/blog/ken/initiation_of_daykeeper_report_from_momostenango
or http://www.kachina.net/~alunajoy/wajshakib-batz.html).
Don Alejandro Oxlaj, Vandrande Vargen, http://www.shiftoftheages.com/, är talesman för Mayas 440 personer starka äldreråd samt också Grand Elder för de amerikanska ursprungsbefolkningarnas kontinentala råd.
Det är troligt att the Conscious Convergence kommer att observeras av många andra Äldre över hela Mayas land, när ryktet sprider sig. Deltagandet av Hunbatz Men och Don Alejandro har en speciell betydelse för att etablera en kontinuitet till Harmonic Convergence 1987, där de båda spelade en bidragande roll. Kärnteamet för the Conscious Convergence är glada att berätta om stödet från Mayas Äldre den 17-18 juli och genom detta önskar vi utöka kallelsen till andra ursprungsbefolkningar i världen att delta.
Carl Johan Calleman
Vision for the Conscious Convergence, Carl Johan Calleman
100331My Vision for the Conscious Convergence,
July 17-18, 2010
The preparations to facilitate the Conscious Convergence, July 17‐18, 2010 have now begun. Even if it will need the support and active collaboration of a large number of people the snowball has started rolling. Very possibly, this will become an event that influences the course of our civilization by setting the intention to manifest unity consciousness on a large scale with the ninth wave of the Maya calendars. I would then now like to share my own vision of the Conscious Convergence, and what it may accomplish, in an article that does not have too much technical detail.
Over the time period since the Harmonic Convergence in August of 1987, and maybe even earlier than that, an increasing number of people, and not just a few select mystics, have come to directly experience states of unity with all things and a purposeful direction in their own lives. Yet, although sometimes such experiences may have been enlightening or blissful, they have not come to alter the way our world at large operates. While this fact may not surprise us there is really no reason that this should be taken as a given. Such experiences, sometimes resulting from spiritual practices, have clearly been at odds with both the predominating materialist worldview and the one that sees the divine as something separate from ourselves. An increasing number of people have thus come to directly experience that some “energies” greater than themselves are working to provide guidance for them. In everyday parlance we talk about certain things having been “meant to happen” and other things “not meant to happen.” This direct experience of guiding energies is a relatively recent undercurrent of our civilization. It also intensifies as the frequency of shifts between calendrical energies increases as we approach the completion of the Mayan calendars. It is as if, through this frequency increase, the cosmic plan is now calling us to wake up and realize that we are here for a reason and that the universe has a plan. This ongoing awakening has generated a fairly widespread perception that the end of the Mayan calendars will bring a “shift in consciousness”.
Such experiences are of course made sense of in a multitude of different ways, sometimes in terms of divine intervention or astrology, depending on the individual. Yet, they always seem to imply that the universe has a higher purpose. The perception of such a purposeful direction may be the least common denominator for those that will chose to participate in the Conscious Convergence. On my own part I have come to understand what is “meant” and “not meant” to happen primarily from the broad perspective of the Mayan calendars, simply because of the vast body of scientific evidence showing that the energies these describe have been driving evolution in all of its aspects from the beginning of time.
In parallel with the increase in individual experiences of guidance there has also been a number of initiatives to organize meditations or other global spiritual events on special days that often focus on a positive cause such as peace. What I feel we need to realize however is that despite these experiences of individual or collective unity, those that embody them still remain largely fragmented. As yet, the intention to manifest unity consciousness has thus not been firmly anchored in our world. Someone who meditates is perceived as doing so as a private act and as part of his or her individual path. A meditation to heal the earth is seen as a basically uncommitted event of a day or two before things go back to “business as usual”. In society at large and its media it is relegated to a fringe phenomenon, despite the large number of people embracing it. I however feel that the Conscious Convergence will be, and has to be, a unique event that is something more than just another global meditation. It is about anchoring an intention to manifest unity consciousness on an ongoing basis.
The current fragmentation of both individuals and groups is a critical point. It is here I believe the Conscious Convergence will enter into the picture to give hope and visions for the future. Part of the reason that the intention towards unity consciousness has not been anchored in the consensus reality is that events may not have gathered a critical mass. I feel however that a more important factor has been that individual experiences and events have not always been perceived as steps in a cosmic time plan that has a clear direction towards unity consciousness. This absence of a context in time has probably had much more far reaching consequences than most people recognize. It has affected not only the role of those that have become awakened, but also a broad range of grass root movements focusing on progressive socioeconomic change. If such movements are unable to see how their aspirations are part of a cosmic time plan for the planet they too will be fragmented and their fruits often be temporary or incorporated in the already existing dualist civilization.
The fragmentation of the experiences of unity consciousness, and the absence of a collectively existing intention to manifest this, thus have consequences that go farther, much farther, than most people would tend to believe. It influences a very high number of organizations and projects that are potentially healthy to our planet because these, and the social movements they give rise to, exist without a context in time. All such movements that intend to manifest a world of unity consciousness may thus benefit from their participation in the Conscious Convergence exactly because this provides such a temporal framework. From this also follows an interest of the powers that be to suppress information about the Mayan calendar that may serve as inspiration and encouragement for those desiring a new course for our civilization.
The big media, including but not limited to Hollywood, have thus touted a distorted view of the Mayan calendar as simply a date in the future when something dramatic is supposed to happen. It is here almost irrelevant whether this change is seen as positive or negative, since such a view is so totally at odds with the Mayan calendar to begin with. The message of the media has thus been: “Do not take responsibility for co-creating the future! Just wait and see!” Nothing could be further from a Mayan perspective, and the truth, than an obsession with a singular date in the future, when something is supposed to just fall down on us from the sky. The Mayan calendar describes processes, processes that have been going on from the beginning of time and step by step have been lifting human beings to higher frames of consciousness. As part of this, humanity is now heading towards the initiation of a new process, the ninth wave, that is meant to take us to a place of unity consciousness where we have never been before. Hence, the solutions of the past are not particularly likely to be applicable and so we are now called to develop a new level of creativity.
The Mayan calendars have thus come to be perceived in a disempowering way, rather than as guiding tools for positive social and spiritual transformation. The reason for this is mainly that it is not generally known that there is not merely one, but in fact nine, calendars that are about to be completed. Each of these calendars describes a wave movement of evolution and it is the ninth of these that is designed to bring the unity consciousness that represents the current hope of mankind as it provides a necessary starting point for the birth of a new world. Yet, unless there is a conscious collective intention to affirm this ninth wave what is the likelihood that this will manifest? One might even ask whether without such an intention to manifest unity consciousness, anyone has reason to complain if it is not brought forth? To have this happen we need to align with this calendar in time, otherwise I believe we will lose our power to influence the course of events. The Conscious Convergence is thus set so that we will be able to prepare ourselves for the coming energies in advance and so be able to align with them. Unlike the Harmonic Convergence in 1987 that was a relatively spontaneous event, I, for one, believe that the Conscious Convergence in 2010, due to the current high speed of time, will need to be unified by a common intention in order to make a difference. As we approach the simultaneous manifestation of the nine waves there will be complicated overlappings of waves that may be difficult to surf without such a shared intention.
My vision for the Conscious Convergence is that it will be an event that helps people break out of the current constraints and fragmentation and facilitates for us to co‐create our future especially as now many of the established structures of society may be falling apart. With the impending unity consciousness many things that are not consistent with this are in fact becoming visible in the new light. An increasing number of people are losing faith in churches (Ireland and US), mosques (Iran) as well as bankers and politicians (all over), and so much of the previous functioning of the world may be overturned. It then becomes all the more important to establish an intention of manifesting unity consciousness as a basis for novel solutions. I however do not think that the Conscious Convergence is for those that contend themselves by pointing out and criticizing all the negative aspects of our current world and its system of rule. Rather it is for those that want to create a more positive intention, anchor this broadly and manifest it in the world.
An intention to manifest unity consciousness thus does not only serve to guide ourselves or our individual development, but here it also refers to the possibility that it may guide our civilization at large. Such a collectively shared intention held by a critical mass of people may start to live a life of its own and give a direction to a wide variety of projects. If this is to happen it is however critical that the intention is authentically held and not coming from a desire to look good in our own eyes, or in those of our friends, teachers or gurus. Only an intention authentically shared by a critical mass of sovereign individuals may play a positive role for co‐creating our future. Conscious Convergence then means that it is for people who are conscious of their intentions.
Unity consciousness does not mean conformism or that everyone is shaped in the same mold to think or look alike. Rather, unity consciousness will generate a world that is the very opposite to conformist. Because unity consciousness is about transcending the judgmental dualities and inherent dominance mentality generated by lower waves it allows for a much wider variety of viewpoints and life styles than previously. Thus, the Conscious Convergence refers to the coming together, convergence, of people from many different walks of life with very different backgrounds and viewpoints to express and experience a shared intention for the future.
The two initial days, July 17‐18, 2010, may be days for individual experiences of awakening as well as a collective expression of a new commitment to climb to the highest level of the Mayan calendar and co-‐create a world truly based on peace. I for one however do not believe that the continued climb will be easy and no one knows exactly how long time it will take until the new world based on this new consciousness stabilizes. Yet, I also know that it is only through a shared intention aligned with the cosmic plan that there is any reasonable hope for a future. The Conscious Convergence is thus also about retrieving the Mayan calendar to its rightful place as a guide on the common path towards a world based on unity consciousness. In a time of dramatic change it becomes all the more important to have a firmly anchored intention to relate to as we approach the full completion of all nine calendars. I believe that only such an intention, existing on the level of our civilization, may serve to give us guidance in a time when the old social structures will very possibly disintegrate. The Hopi prophecy for instance urges us to gather ourselves and be good to each other. They warn that the time of the lone wolf is over. We can only survive if we cooperate on achieving common goals. This is obvious to any faithful Christian as well.
Many people realize that there will be a need to recreate our civilization in the time ahead and if nothing else a series of natural disasters have told people that this may now have reached a dead end. To get out of this dead end, many are suggesting profound changes of our current economic and social system in order for humanity to survive into a better world. This points to the Conscious Convergence also as an event for networking in a very broad sense. If the Conscious Convergence can gather people that are seeking this new direction and experience that they have the energies of the cosmic plan on their back then I would say that my vision of this event will have been fulfilled. It is however also part of my vision that millions will share their own visions based on this common intention of manifesting unity consciousness. The preparations for the ninth wave would allow many positive aspirations to be anchored in a purposeful process. When millions are taking the stand that there is a higher purpose to this planet than just to end in a series of disasters then I believe providence will move. When millions are showing each other that they too see a higher purpose to life, and intend to manifest it together, then a significant step towards the fulfillment of the cosmic plan will have been taken.
Carl Johan Calleman, 5 Jaguar.
Stockholm, March 27, 2010, 5 Ahau
The temporary web site for the Conscious Convergence is:
http://forum.commonpassion.org/viewforum.php?id=50.
Viktigt meddelande från Sri Bhagavan!!! 100322
100322Sri Bhagavan has been feeling for many months that vast changes will occur after March 18th, 2010. Sri Bhagavan just announced that he will be fully activating the Oneness Phenomena to run at 100% power!
In accordance with this major leap in this work, Sri Bhagavan is announcing these new changes to take immediate effect:
Oneness Trainers will discontinue all Oneness Experience Courses, and immediately begin holding 3 day Oneness Awakening Courses.
There will only be two Courses / Programs offered here at Oneness University. One is the Oneness Trainer Course, and the other is the Oneness Deepening Process.
All Level 1 and Level 2 Courses will be ending on the last dates currently posted on the website campus calendar.
The Oneness Deepening Process is a very intense Deepening Process offered everyday Wednesday – Sunday from 6:30pm to 8:30pm inside the Hall for Awakening (Oneness Temple). It is a 2 hour process. This Deepening Process is open to everyone who wants to attend. It is a free course being offered only to people who are staying on the Oneness University Campus.
Web Casts with Sri Amma and/or Sri Bhagavan will be generally given twice a year, August 15th, and March 7th, and occasionally if there is an important message Sri Amma Bhagavan would like to share with the Oneness Community. They are doing this because they want to empower the Trainers to lead the way, and give the job of Awakening into the hands of Humanity and start to slowly fade away from the work more and more as they have always wished to do! The role of Sri Amma and Bhagavan will be done through the Mukthi Deeksha! (Mukthi is an ancient Sanskrit word meaning Liberation.)
As all of you know, the primary purpose of Oneness is to give liberation from the mind. This is the natural state in which human beings are supposed to be living. As Sri Bhagavan shares, “Humanity cannot make it on their own; Awakening has to be given to them.”
For the past 20 years, the work of Oneness University has been to prepare people to receive the state of Awakening. After many years now, Sri Bhagavan feels strongly that Humanity is now ready for the actual state of Awakening.
Bhagavan said that "We are transferring the power to you today. We have initiated the process of dissolution which we said would start in 2014, we have initiated that today."
Sri Bhagavan Mukti Deeksha Webcast
Webcast 20th March 2010
The video and transcription of the webcast on Saturday is now online here:
http://onenessfacilitatorsuk.ning.com/video/sri-bhagavan-world-webcast-20
Medelvägen enligt Bhagavan
100316Medelvägen
De 7 balanserna
Oneness rekommenderar Medelvägen, eller De 7 balanserna, som ett bra verktyg för uppvaknande.
1:a balansen – undvik extremerna av säkerhet och osäkerhet.
2:a balansen – undvik extremerna av njutning och avhållsamhet.
3:e balansen – undvik extremerna av dominans och undergivenhet.
4:e balansen – undvik extremerna av habegär och liknöjdhet.
5:e balansen – undvik extremerna av uppgivenhet och extremt sökande.
6:e balansen – undvik extremerna av vårdslöshet och perfektionism.
7:e balansen – undvik extremerna av analys och syntes (sammanställning).
Bhagavans teaching 7 mars
100312Bhagavans teaching 7 mars
Detta säger Bhagavan i en webb cast med London och Frankrike 7 mars:
Varje 7 mars vrids kraften upp, och denna 7 mars i synnerhet eftersom vi närmar oss 2012. Så i morgon kommer den att vara enormt mycket starkare. Ni kommer att kunna se det mycket dramatiskt, på det sätt mirakel händer, hur folks problem löser sig, och det blir också en förändring i perceptionen (uppfattningen av verkligheten). Du kommer att märka att det är väldigt dramatiskt.
Hur som helst, från 18 mars kommer det att bli ännu kraftfullare. Efter 11 dagar kommer kraften att bli mycket, mycket kraftfull. Om du är känslig kommer du att kunna förnimma det.
Hur ska vi då använda denna ökade kraft? Jag har ofta sagt – livet är relationer. Så nu…om du skulle…låt oss säga att du har en familj. Om du kunde acceptera din fru eller man fullständigt och totalt, utan dömande, utan att försöka förändra den andre, utan att försöka förstå den andre med psykologi eller andra saker, bara acceptera personen som han eller hon är.
Om du började idag eller i morgon och fortsatte i en månad eller så, så skulle du snabbt bli medveten om: Herre Gud, jag har fördömt, jag har försökt förstå vad som händer. Och är du inte gift så kan det vara med dina föräldrar, och finns inte de heller kan det vara en vän som du ibland har motstånd emot, ibland vill ska vara annorlunda, något sådant. Inte någon av motsatt kön, det är ok med man och hustru, eller bror och syster, men inte med vänner
Så om du börjar öva detta så kommer du, tack vare den enormt ökande Grace, att nå excellenta resultat inom en månads tid, och bli förbluffad att se vilka förändringar som har hänt i dig, Du kan tom komma mycket nära ett uppvaknande själv. Så det är budskapet för detta året, 7 mars.
Se klippet här:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hv93iIp7V6I
Hierarkin monteras ner av Sri Bhagavan
100301Här talar Bhagavan om hur hierarkin monteras ned. Dasas (lärarna vid Oneness University) är nu vänner. Han säger t o m att bara man använder ordet dasa eller acharya så stoppas det gudomliga flödet...
Bhagawan: I don’t know if I have spoken it in this Satsangh but I have spoken it in other Satsanghs all over India so we are...we have dismantled the spiritual structure and that’s the reason why the power is picking up as we have dismantled the structure. The phenomenon is unleashed and it’s acquiring tremendous power and the Mukti is being delivered. So as a consequence, you must know that there are no Dasas in the order. No Dasas, no Acharyas, nobody like that. The structure is completely gone. My son is not my successor, no Dasas....because they can’t succeed. Nobody succeeds Amma Bhagawan; so the only tools we have are you people. You are the ones who will succeed; you are the ones we have got to train and handover the power so you have to get ready for that by year 2014.
The first step is that the structure is being dismantled so there are no Acharyas, no Dasas. I would like to give you a small word of caution. If by any chance if you were to utter the word ‘Acharya’ and ‘Dasa’, all grace will be instantly cut off, not even an atom of grace will come for you. That you will have to be very clear, absolutely clear. It’s exactly like your cell phone, the moment you stop playing your bills, the cell phones cease to function, it’s remotely controlled, no? The same thing here also, all things are remotely controlled and the moment you do that, grace will stop. So no more question of…the words should not come at all. They are just my friends and helping me in this work. Before 2014, many of them would have retired and would have gone back to lead normal lives and I will be helping them to settle down in life and continue with their work. They are fully taken care of for their lives. Of course you must help me in helping them. And just like you, they’d be settling down and you will be also good enough to pick up some good bridegrooms for them or good brides for them.
Bhagawan: ‘Dasas’, that must go out of your system and then you will be facing towards Mukti or Awakening. But if you use the word ‘Dasa’ or get attached to them somewhere, no hope for you. Directly relate to God, that’s all. No middle men, no middle women. Mukti is happening because the middle people have been removed. The obstruction has been removed therefore, it’s very very fast.
Bhagavans Teachings for February
100301Alla dina tankar, det du säger, det du gör, händer automatiskt. Du är inte alls inblandad. Det är en illusion att tro att du är inblandad. Det är en illusion att tro att du är den som gör nånting, att du tänker, att du talar, att du agerar. Allt händer automatiskt. Att det finns någon som gör något är en illusion.
Nu vill jag att ni under februari kontemplerar över detta: Ja, jag är inte den som gör något. Mina tankar bara flödar genom mig, det jag säger händer automatiskt, och allt jag gör sker automatiskt.
Det är vad som verkligen händer för alla människor. Eftersom du inte är uppvaknad, eftersom du inte är upplyst, ser du det som att du gör det själv. Det är anledningen till att sitta fast. Det är anledningen till lidande.
När du blir upplyst kommer du att vara som vanligt, dina vanliga tankar kommer att flöda, du kommer att säga som vanligt, agera som vanligt. Det enda är att DU inte kommer att vara där. Du kommer inte att vara känslomässigt kopplad till det. Du kommer inte att identifiera dig med det. Du kommer inte att känna att det är du som gör något. Allt händer av sig själv.
Det är dit vi måste komma. Så jag kommer att ge många mer teachings som du bör kontemplera över, och för februari är det detta. Detta är läxan för februari.
Bhagavans Teachings for January
100301Bhagavans teaching for January:
“To see is to be free”…that happens for a short time but then for it to continue, you have to watch the naming process in which the mind indulges. The problem is with the naming process. Like for example, if a child would look at a tree, it does not call it a tree, it does not know what it is but it is nevertheless experiencing the tree. On the other hand, you say that it is a coconut tree or a mango tree or whatever tree it is, and then you say what a nice fruit it has, I’d like to have it…and then the whole commentary starts.
Actually, what is happening is happening there, that’s all, over which you have no control. The whole universe is involved in it. But you call it a negative thought, you call it a negative emotion, you call it jealousy, lust, anger, hatred. The problem is not with anger, not with jealousy, not with hatred but it is with your naming. Why do you call it anger, lust, hatred? Why do you name it? Whatever is there is there. And whether the thought is lust or God, both are equally sacred because God is both and there’s nothing but God only. The universe is God and God is the universe. So how could you say that this is bad..this is good? Obviously you can’t say that. Unless we have the high and the low, the up and the down, the front and the back, there can be no creation.
If you have an electron, you must have the proton. If you have matter, you must have anti matter. You can’t do without both sides and that’s the essential principle of creation. So they’ll all be there and I have often told you...It’s not your mind, it’s the human mind. It has been so and it will be so. The structure has not changed. Jealousy, anger, hatred, lust all remain the same, fear everything ......but the objects of fear have changed, the object of lust has changed , the object of jealousy has changed, maybe it was a spear now it’s a bunglow or a car. Only the object of desire and object of all these emotions have changed but they are very much the same..does not change and it will not change.
What you are hoping is that the mind will change. No, the mind will not change. The problem is that you say, “I suffer from anger”…that is where you become unenlightened. Now, there are some tribes in the world who are more or less some kind of awakened people. Their language is very strange. They won’t say “I am Angry”. In their language they say that, “I angrying, I jealousying, I fearing” because they are seeing it as actually happening. That’s all. So that word fear...there’s no naming at all. Just to say that something is happening. Not that ‘I have fear’, ‘I have anger’. These are the people who make it very very easily. The problem with you is that you are stuck in the labeling / naming.
Now, when you keep watching, you will see how the mind is involved in this trick or game of naming. That’s where the problem starts. Now, that will help you up to a point. But the thing is that your mind is ever going to be the same. Whether it’s you or for Ramana Maharishi or for Buddha, the mind cannot be changed. What has happened to them is that they have come out of the mind. They no more identify (themselves) with the mind. Now, you will say that ‘This is my mind’. That is ‘Anaatma’. Anaatma in Sanskrit means false identification. And why is there this false identification? Because of what we call in Sanskrit ‘Pragnaaparaadha’ or failure of intelligence; which is what we try to awaken in level 2.
Now intelligence has flowered in Ramana or Buddha or Ramakrishna Paramhansa. And therefore they don’t identify with their mind. Their mind is just like some other animal going on the road. What do you do with a cow on the road? You do nothing, the same thing with your mind also. It’s just there. You should not think that your mind will change. No, you will no more identify with your mind. You just come out of it, you will be pulled out.
The problem is you are all living in a prison. The strangest thing is that you do not even know you are in a prison. You’ve have so beautifully decorated the prison. Nice dining table, curtains, air conditioner, and kitchen everything is there. But that does not mean you are really enjoying it. There is no true enjoyment. But then you have been able to manage your suffering. You all got an MBA in the art of managing your suffering. For what is the dining table, that is the security of your husband. What’s the kitchen? That’s the security of your wife. What are small chairs? They are for the children, air conditioners are for your parents; or name or fame. So name, fame and all attachments, they are the furniture of the house. That’s being nicely put in a place and I am all for it. So but then you got to realise that still it’s only a prison. And then you must try to come out of the prison because you are not living.
That’s why on our channel we say ‘(From) Existing to Living’. You are just existing...you are mechanically living your life from morning to night, year after year and finally what is there...Nothing, it’s the end of it. So in order to live, you must come out of the mind. There is a lock inside which you must blast open. How? By realising that you are in a prison. But still you cannot come out. We who are outside will come and blast the lock outside and pull you out. This is called Mukti or Awakening. That we will do.
2a Harmoniska Konvergensen 27-30 Maj 2010 av CJ Calleman
100225Sprid!
2a Harmoniska Konvergensen –
27-30 Maj 2010:
Skapa avsikten att uppnå enhetsmedvetande
med Mayakalenderns nionde våg!
av Carl Johan Calleman
Den enda forntida Mayainskrift som beskriver betydelsen av kalenderns slut, Tortuguero-monumentet nr 6, säger att vid den tidpunkten så kommer nio-stegs-“väsendet”, Bolon Yookte, (Fig 1) att nedstiga.”1 Vad detta betyder på modern språk är att en kombination av nio kosmiska krafter, nio vågrörelser som skapar universum, samtidigt kommer att manifesteras fullt ut. I detta Mayafolkets eget sätt att se på innebörden av slutet på deras kalender finns det alltså inte något som talar om att jorden skulle gå under. Snarare handlar kalendersystemet om en fullbordan, eller förverkligande, av evolutionära processer som har pågått sedan universums födelse och lett till den värld som vi lever i idag. Dessa nio kosmiska krafter är de nio stegvisa utvecklingarna (Undervärldarna), var och en genom tretton energier, som Mayas kalendersystem är uppbyggd på, ett system som korrelerar extremt väl med betydelsefulla händelser i den biologiska och historiska evolutionen. De nio olika progressionerna i tretton steg utvecklar var och en en särskild ram för medvetandet och den nionde och högsta av dessa vågrörelser kommer att bära med sig ett slutligt skifte till enhetsmedvetande som kommer att kulminera när kalendern kommer till sitt slut. Jag tror dock här att det är av avgörande betydelse att dessa nio kosmiska krafter inte uppfattas som något från människorna avskilt utan att de bara manifesteras i den utsträckning som människor sätter sig i resonans med dem.
Dessa nio vågrörelser utvecklas var och en med en egen rytm på ett sådant sätt att de skapar en upplevelse av en uppsnabbning av tiden. Ju högre frekvens vågen har desto högre är utvecklingsnivån. I detta schema så har vi nu kommit till den sjätte natten av den åttonde vågen, den Galaktiska. Det är med andra ord bara en ytterligare våg som behöver aktiveras, som kommer att utvecklas med den högsta hastigheten och det är den universella, eller nionde, vågen i Mayas kalendersystem. Detta är vågen med den högsta frekvensen i Mayakalenderns hela schema över skapelsen, och eftersom den avrundar och avslutar hela skapelseprocessen så kan man förvänta sig att den spelar en mycket speciell roll. Det är som en förberedelse till denna något mystiska våg som jag uppmuntrar till firandet av den 2a Harmoniska Konvergensen, 27-30 maj 2010 som n tidpunkt för att fokusera på att utveckla resonansen med den högsta och avgörande vågen i Mayas kalendersystem, den nionde vågen.
Vilka sorts förändringar kommer denna nionde våg att medföra för människolivet? Till att börja med kan man notera att många människor har en intuitiv känsla av att Mayakalenders avslutning kommer att medföra ett medvetandeskifte. Ändå uttrycks det ganska sällan mer exakt hur och varför det skulle komma att ske eller vad som är dess källa. Men kanske är ett medvetandeskifte i själva verket inte så mystiskt som många har letts till att tro. Medvetandeskiften har till exempel pågått från tidens begynnelse och fortsätter att hända närhelst det är ett betydelsefullt energiskifte i Mayakalendern, som till exempel mellan någon av dess DAGAR och NÄTTER. Trots alla dessa tidigare medvetandeskiften under den kosmiska historiens gång så tror jag dock att det är något mycket speciellt och betydelsefullt med det nya medvetande som vi kan förvänta oss att den nionde vågen skapar. Detta är att den medför ett skifte till enhetsmedvetande i vilket människans sinne inte längre domineras av några mörka filter (se Fig 2). Vi kommer med andra ord att bli ”genomskinliga” och jag tror att det är just denna sorts medvetandeskifte som många väntar på. Inte bra vilket medvetande som helst utan ett som överskrider det förflutnas dualiteter och hjälper människorna att se enheten i allt. Anledningen att denna sorts enhetsmedvetande kan vara välgörande för planeten, och för mänskligheten, är att detta leder till ett överskridande av all separation (mellan man och kvinna, människa och natur, härskare och behärskad osv.) Jag tror att om ett sådant medvetandeskifte inte manifesterar sig så kommer förr eller senare jorden att gå under eftersom individer med ett dualistiskt och åtskiljande medvetande fungerar som ett slaga cancerceller i jordens kropp som fortsätter att expandera på dess bekostnad. Endast ett skifte till enhetsmedvetande kommer att för alltid att sätta ett stopp för det obegränsade utnyttjandet av jordens resurser som nu pågår. På en djupare nivå kan det få oss att förstå att vi är en del av skapelsen och måste leva i harmoni med denna.
Som nämnts ovan så har medvetandeskiften sitt ursprung i resonansen med de kosmiska krafter som beskrivs av Mayakalendern. Och även om en del kan ha upplevt medvetandeskiften och alltings enhet så är det bara i den utsträckning som ett sådant medvetandeskifte induceras globalt i enlighet med den kosmiska planen, på det sätt som vi kan förstå från Mayakalendern, som det kan ha varaktiga konsekvenser. Med den nionde vågen kan ett skifte till enhetsmedvetande dock betraktas som något vars tid verkligen har kommit. Det är denna våg som kommer att vara pricken över i-et på mänsklighetens tidigare evolution och bygga den bro som kommer att tillåta oss att gå in i den nya värld som kommer att följa på kalenderns slut. Å andra sidan så vet den som är kunnig om Mayakalendern att för att ett medvetandeskifte skall manifestera sig så måste människorna vara i resonans med det och någon gång också göra åtminstone ett undermedvetet val att omfattas av det. Ett storskaligt medvetandeskifte är alltså inte något som kan ske mot människornas vilja. Det kan bara ske genom att människor väljer att fungera som medskapare, och detta gäller i synnerhet för de högsta nivåerna på pyramiden.
Så vad kommer att krävas av människorna för att det skall ske ett medvetandeskifte? Som många läsare av denna artikel kan ha upplevt så existerar det många andliga utövanden, helandetekniker och metoder för personlig utveckling som faktiskt åtminstone tillfälligt ger upphov till tillfälliga medvetandeskiften och upplevelser av alltings enhet. Ändå så tror jag inte att det är möjligt att hitta någon gyllene kungsväg som garanterat ger upphov till ett sådant tillstånd och jag tror att vi bör vara både ödmjuka och ha en öppen attityd till hur ett enhetsmedvetande kan skapas. Till dess att den nionde vågen sveper genom kosmos och över jorden så kanske vi faktiskt inte riktigt kan veta vad som fungerar för detta syfte. Detta betyder dock inte att vi kan eller måste bara vänta och se. Idén bakom den 2a Harmoniska Konvergensen, den 27-30e maj 2010, är att det finns en sak som alltid står i vår makt att göra, och står i alla människors makt att göra, är att skapa en intention till ett enhetsmedvetande. All kreativitet börjar med en intention och utan en intention sker ingenting. Den 2a Harmoniska Konvergensen är för alla dem som avser att skapa ett skifte till ett enhetsmedvetande. Vad du en tror på och vilken världsbild som du än omfattar så finns alltid möjligheten att skapa en intention till ett enhetsmedvetande och detta är de datum då detta måste påbörjas om det skall ske i samklang med den kosmiska tidsplanen. Utan att det skapas en sådan intention så är det inte troligt att det någonsin blir ett skifte till enhetsmedvetande på denna planet vare sig individuellt eller kollektivt.
På grundval av skapandet av en sådan intention för ett enhetsmedvetande i den 2a Harmoniska Konvergensen så tycks det naturligt att människor också kommer att vilja utföra ceremonier och delta i andliga övningar som är manifestationer av just ett sådant enhetsmedvetande och söka olika sorters vägar att permanenta ett sådant skifte. Eftersom den i själva verket faller på dagarna för sådden i en ny Helig Kalender runda (1 Alligator och 2 Vind) så kan den 2a Harmoniska Konvergensen innebära början på en process mot ett fördjupat enhetsmedvetande som aldrig upphör. Den kan komma att innebära in ingång till den nionde vågens kreativa inriktning som vi kanske aldrig skall försöka hoppa av. Att börja dagligen följa Mayakalendern från denna tidpunkt inom ramen för den nionde vågen kan i själva verket i sig själv vara en betydelsefull faktor för att utveckla enhetsmedvetande, eftersom den gör dig medveten om den tidsram inom vilken detta medvetande skall uppnås. Projekt blir bara verkliga när de har tidsramar.
Det tycks viktigt att manifestationer som kopplas till den 2a Harmoniska Konvergensen planeras mycket omsorgsfullt och i den utsträckning som är möjligt uttrycker det nya enhetsmedvetandet och inte bara består av rutinartade uttryck för den värld vi har levt i. Om till exempel artistframträdanden ingår i firandet, så tycks det klokt att fundera över i vilken utsträckning dessa stärker upplevelsen av alltings enhet eller om de skapar en känsla av separation mellan artisterna och publiken. Samma sak kan tänkas gälla utförandet av ceremonier om den som leder dem inte har en förmåga att inkludera alla i den på ett likaberättigat sätt. Ett bra exempel på en ceremoni som är ett uttryck för enhetsmedvetande är enligt min mening upptagandet av Jack Sully i folket på Pandora i filmen Avatar. Om man i den 2a Harmoniska Konvergensen använder sig av tekniker för andlig utveckling som är etablerade och värdefulla så bör man tänka igenom om de i onödan sätter en grundare eller guru på en piedestal och om just den sidan av saken kan avvaras. Kanske tysta aktiviteter med låg profil och en djup upplevelse av gemenskap i själva verket är de kraftfullaste manifestationerna av ett enhetsmedvetande. Dessa saker måste de lokala arrangörerna bestämma, och jag vill bara här ge uppmärksamhet åt att man bör närma sig detta med helt nya ögon och en enhetsmedvetandets kreativitet som genomlyser det sätt som saker har gjorts på tidigare.
Namnet den 2a Harmoniska Konvergensen hänvisar naturligtvis till den 1a Harmoniska Konvergensen, August 17-18, 1987, som var den första gången i modern tid som en större händelse baserad på Mayakalendern firats. Det är därför viktigt att diskutera förhållandet mellan de två och varför efter så många år det kommer en andra 27-30 maj, 2010. Till att börja med kan vi då lägga märke till en viktig, men inte speciellt unik, likhet mellan de två och det är att de firas på de två första dagarna 1 Alligator och 2 vind, av en helig 260 dagars Mayakalender-runda. (Den 2a Harmoniska Konvergensen inkluderar två ytterligare dagar, 3 Härd och 4 Ödla, på veckoslutet som kan vara mer gynnsamt för gemensamma aktiviteter.) En viktigare relation mellan de två Konvergenserna är emellertid att de båda (i huvudsak) placerade vid dubbleringstiden för de 8e och 9e vågorna i Mayakalendern och sålunda reflekterar energiskiften som varslat om de respektive medvetandetransformationerna som själva dessa vågor har inneburit. (se fig 3). Uttryckt i andra termer: Vad den 1a Harmoniska Konvergensen betydde för kvantsprånget till den åttonde vågen kommer den 2a Harmoniska Konvergensen att betyda för kvantsprånget till den nionde vågen.2 Vi kan utvidga denna parallell ytterligare genom att inkludera en jämförelse med den sjunde vågen och lägga märke till vad som hände vid dennas dubbleringspunkt, men en hel bok skulle krävas för att täcka detta viktiga ämne.
Vad vi kan se från dessa paralleller är att den 2a Harmoniska Konvergensen inte i sig själv är början på den nionde vågen, som inte startar tills den 11e februari 2011.3 Snarare så initierar detta firande den våg som föregår och lägger grunden för den nionde vågen och direkt leder in i denna. Den 2a Harmoniska Konvergensen är oerhört betydelsefull som en punkt för att skapa intentionen till ett enhetsmedvetande även om detta inte kommer att utvecklas fullt förrän under den nionde vågen. Kanske kommer det i själva verket vara mänsklighetens sista chans att sätta en sådan intention, vilken nästan med nödvändighet måste existera på förhand hos dem som vill kunna lyfta sig över mycket av de ekonomiska svårigheter som vi kan vänta oss under åren framöver. Med mitt eget sätt att se ligger hoppet inför framtiden i att lära sig surfa på den nionde vågen och på så vis överskrida snarare än att bli fångad i de lägre Undervärldarnas dualiteter. Om detta stämmer så måste man också förvänta sig att den 2a Harmoniska Konvergensen kommer att mötas med mycket motstånd från alla de krafter som försvarar den gamla världens ego-baserade sätt att fungera och de massiva hierarkier som detta har genererat. En kommersiell media-industri har uppstått kring ”2012”, där olika ”experter” spekulerar om vad som kommer att hända som om detta vore oberoende av vilka intentioner och kreativ inriktning människor har och denna tar ifrån människorna deras makt att förändra.
Den 2a Harmoniska Konvergensen avser att vara en mycket inkluderande event som omfattar alla som delar avsikten att vi skall uppnå ett enhetsmedvetande oavsett vad de tror på i övrigt. I dag finns det massvis med högst olika idéer bland annat på Internet, som avser att förklara och beskriva ”2012”-fenomenet och denna situation är naturligtvis mycket förvirrande för den som vill försöka förstå hur den verkliga historien ser ut. Det är dessutom knappast troligt att denna situation bara kommer att försvinna och omedelbart ersättas av allmän klarhet. Idén bakom den 2a Harmoniska Konvergensen är att mitt i detta virrvarr erbjuda ett gemensamt fokus för alla dem avser en övergång till enhetsmedvetande oavsett vilken syn de har i detalj om Mayakalendern eller något annat. Det handlar om att positivt och konstruktivt dra fördel av ett speciellt ”window of opportunity” och kräver bara av oss att vi inser att medvetandeskiftet måste utgå ifrån de utvecklingsprocesser som vi för närvarande är en del av. Ett skifte till enhetsmedvetande är inte något som bara kommer att falla ner på oss från himlen vid något datum i framtiden utan kan bara utvecklas från den punkt som vi befinner oss på nu. Det är en grundläggande princip i detta universum att försynen bara hjälper den som har ett ”commitment”.
För att denna event skall bli framgångsrik för att generera avsikten att skifta till den nionde vågens medvetande så kommer ett massivt deltagande bli nödvändigt också när det gäller förberedelsearbetet. Förberedelsearbetet måste delas av de miljoner som önskar att ett sådant medvetandeskifte skall ske. För att genomföra detta kommer en kollektiv ansträngning att krävas och i själva verket så är redan valet att delta en del av att skapa den avsikten till en medvetenhetsförändring. Inledningsvis kommer det att finnas ett stort behov av att människor sprider kallelsen till den 2a Harmoniska Konvergensen över världen. Detta inkluderar att skapa en internetnärvaro genom sajter, bloggar och social media samt göra det en del av andra former av nätverk. Det kommer också att finnas ett stort behov av finansiering av många aktiviteter. Slutligen kommer det att finnas ett behov av organisation och kreativitet vid de event som anordnas. De som vill bidra med ekonomiskt stöd eller praktiskt arbete bör höra av sig till mig. svensk hemsida kommer att vara http://www.fredpajorden.se/ Min egen syn är att detta är vår sista chans på denna planet att verkligen leva upp till den kosmiska planen. Det är nu eller aldrig och om du inte tror att den 2a Harmoniska Konvergensen handlar om dig så har du antagligen inte studerat Mayakalendern tillräckligt djupt och allvarligt. Det finns ingen som kan ersätta ditt eget deltagande i transformationen till en värld av enhetsmedvetande när kalendern går mot sitt slut. Den slutliga nedstigningen av de nio vågorna (tidens nio gudar, eller de nio Undervärldarna eller vilket namn man nu vill ha). Det är inte en tillfällighet att talet nio är heligt i många andliga traditioner. Nio är mänsklighetens ödestal och det kommer att vara ditt eget val om du vill vara medskapare i dess öde.
Carl Johan Calleman
Alla Skype Broadcasts med Sri Bhagavan
100126Klicka eller kopiera nedanstående länk så får du tillgång till alla Skype Broadcasts med Sri Bhagavan.
http://archive.constantcontact.com/fs009/1102402771884/
archive/1102415116084.html
Du kan även gå med Noni Kaufmans maillista så får du dessa Broadcasts automatiskt till din egen mail adress.
noni.kaufman@gmail.com
Letter to Oneness Community 100110
100112Reprinted with the permission of Global Oneness Trainers, Buddha and Bhavani:
Beloved Oneness family... Namaste
Bhavani and I just returned from India and wanted to share some of our experiences with you... but first we would like to wish all of you a belated Happy New Year.
This sharing is quite long and although I could not get everything in I tried my best to concise it as much as possible without losing too much information that may somehow help some of you. Bhagwan told us that we all have to help as many oneness family members as possible restore their faith... thus this sharing.
We were invited to the oneness university by Beloved Bhagwan and going there we had no idea why he invited us, all we were told was that he wanted to speak to us privately. He had personally invited us once before in 2007 and we were not told why then either, all we were told was to come for the entire month of September. When we arrived he put us into a Mahadeeksha group which is usually only for Indians, it was a group for the dasa's parents and Bhavani and I were the only westerners and the experience we had that September proved to be a major contribution to our spiritual work.
This last visit was also full of surprises, but this time we were given a lot more indeed. The sixteen days that we were there was a mixture of what I would call 'mystical and magical' and it was by far the most rewarding and the most transformational visit we have ever experienced at the oneness university thus far. We stayed in campus 3 and while we were there a Level 1 process for VIP Indians took place and a Level 2 process for Malaysians.
Bhavani and I were allowed to give a talk and give Deeksha in the Great Hall to these groups as well as to attend a homa with them and received Deeksha from the divine beings with them and also attended their group darshan with Bhagwan. Bhagwan and Amma's nephew was in the Indian group... a very bright and handsome young man of 36 who resides in San Francisco. We really bonded with him and connected him with the three people who organize our groups in northern California, as he was anxious to get to work, and he will be sharing Deeksha with us in our groups in northern California in August. Ajeet Saxena was also in this group, Ajeet is a very powerful business man in Chennai who is a long devote of Babaji and who is bringing several popular Indian gurus that have very large followings to Bhagwan and oneness. This union will greatly help expand the number of the oneness family in India.
At the end of our first week in campus 3 Bhagwan had Anandji (our new dasa for New Zealand) take us to campus 2 and we were once again put into a group with only Indians. This time it was with one hundred tribal Indians and the group was quite different from anything we had ever experienced, although it did 'kind-of' resemble some of the events we were involved in with the Zulu tribal people in Durban and the big event in Tanzania.... somewhat of a similar kind of wild energy anyway. This group has only been used in the oneness university for the last three years, and with only tribal Indians. Bhagwan only trained two dasas, Prasadji and Raghavendraji, to facilitate this group and since then over twelve thousands Indians have been initiated.
This is a two day group with meditation, prayer, chanting and extremely wild dancing... and of course Deeksha. There are three Deekshas given during these two full-on days.... the first is given on the head like the normal Deeksha we all know, the second is given on the chest in the heart area while laying down in the shavasana position and the last one is given as the initiation Deeksha.
The wild dancing seems to be the major part of this group... and I mean DANCING, we danced until we dropped... danced right out of our minds you could say. Bhagwan said that many Tribal people get completely awakened in just a few hours of being in the energy of this group, in fact their transformation takes 3 minutes... and we experienced this happening to several of them. When the second day is finished all the people who attended can be initiated to become Deeksha givers.
After the group ended, Prasadji had a darshan with Bhagwan and Bhagwan questioned him about Bhavani and I, he wanted to know how the two of us adapted and experienced this energy. The following day Prasadji was sent to campus 3 and he spend the afternoon explaining everything to Bhavani and I about this group... every detail.
We had our first private darshan with Bhagwan that night and Bhagwan gave us a teaching on this group and told us he wanted Bhavani and I to facilitate it with certain people in certain third world countries. This darshan lasted two hours and fifteen minutes. The following day Anandji brought us to Golden City and we were taken to Prasadji and Raghavendraji's room where we spent the afternoon being trained deeper to facilitate this group... we were walked through every step of the group and had to take notes on every detail. After everything was covered we were brought to the temple and seated with Prasadji, Raghavendraji and Anandji and the group of tribal Indians was brought in and seated in front of us. Many of them got up and shared their experiences and miracles that happened to them and Prasadji and Raghavendraji translated this for us.
Prasadji told the group that Bhavani and I will be the first westerners to facilitate this group and asked them all to close their eyes and pray for us to be successful in sharing this group with other people in the world. When they began praying, something happened to Bhavani and I that is difficult, or I should say impossible, to put into words. I'm quite certain that because this was taken place in the temple that it somehow elevated the amazing energy that began filling our bodies and it was so powerful and so touching that we could not hold back the tears and we both burst out crying. All of this was videotaped and photographed and we will be receiving copies of it soon and will share it with you somehow.
Bhavani and I went to the temple to meditate every chance we had and several times received Deeksha from the divine beings there... we also gave Deeksha to a multitude of Indians in the temple on several occasions. The temple was officially reopened on Jan. 1st with the golden ball replaced and something called Varamala Deeksha was happening so thousands of Indians were there for this amazing event. The energy in the temple after the golden ball was replaced felt like it expanded tenfold. Just sitting on the third floor now is truly a deep experience.... don't miss this!
We also had a darshan with Bhagwan with a small group of foreigners, key players from Japan, China, Italy, Russia and India... this was a Level 3 teaching and the subject was 'the importance of not naming' which I will write about in the next few days and share as much as I possibly can with all of you. In this darshan Bhagwan told us that from March until the end of 2010 will be what he called 'problematic' times and that we must all apply everything that we have learned to get through this period and also to be able to help as many people as possible get through it. He said that once we reach 2011, things will begin coming together more smoothly and there will be a lot more love and that will move us much easier into 2012. He said that raising our individual level of consciousness is most important so that we can help others... the importance of not naming is something that can help us with our own individual process and like promised above I will share what I can on this with you very soon... as we just arrived home.
Also in our first private darshan with Bhagwan on this visit, we received another gift. When we came up to him he said "Happy Anniversary Buddha" for it was exactly thirty one years to the day that Osho gave me Deeksha and named me Buddha and initiated me to become one of his sannyasins. Bhagwan smiled teasingly and asked me what time of the day it was when Osho initiated me, and I looked at my watch and realized it was exactly the same hour on the same exact night thirty one years before... this completely blew me away.
I remember when Bhavani and I had our very first private darshan with Bhagwan in June 2005 he asked me many questions about Osho and wanted to know all about my experiences with him. I felt then that there was some kind of mystical connection, or reconnection, happening. I also clearly remembered that my very first pull to come to the oneness university was when Deva Premal and Miten wrote to us right after doing their 21 day process and Miten telling us that he felt that this was a continuation of Osho's vision to awaken mankind.
So as some kind of mysterious esoteric birthday gift Bhagwan told us that because of our many years of spiritual experience with other masters and our experience of working in so many countries and with so many different types of people, that we were going to be initiated to become what he called 'global oneness trainers' and he said "you two are now free agents and can work in any country you choose and I will bless and support you completely in doing this." He also told us that he wanted us to be his 'antennas' and to keep him informed to what was happening in other countries. He now wants to be much more fine-tuned with everything happening in the worldwide oneness family. He said that our mission was to initiate large numbers of people worldwide until 2012. He also instructed Anandji to do a special private homa for Bhavani and I... and at the end of that darshan we were given very long hands-on Deeksha by him... which was the most precious gift possible. We had a difficult time walking out of the room and as soon as we got outside we had to sit down. I felt like every cell in my body was being tickled with bliss and this state expanded and expanded until it reached the border of almost becoming painful. Bhavani on the other hand could hardly keep her eyes open.... this Deeksha did something to the both of us that no other has come anywhere close to doing... this one was transformational !
The following day Bhavani and I were taken to campus 4 where Anandji and Hemanthji did a private homa for us... the homa was to make our initiation Deekshas more powerful and to make the people we initiate very powerful Deeksha givers and for our work to be a major contribution to 2012. The next evening in our last private darshan, Bhagwan spoke to us for about forty-five minutes giving us some final instructions, he wants us to do large oneness experience courses in Singapore, Malaysia, Thailand, Bali and the Mauritius Island.... and then he initiated us as global oneness trainers. He told me to move close to him and then said "get comfortable Buddha because this is going to take a while" then he put his hands in the same position that he instructed all the oneness trainers to use when initiating new Deeksha givers. He placed his hands on my head for a very long time... then changed positions and placed his hands flat on my head, like a normal Deeksha position, for a long time and I felt like he was cooking my brain. Then he touched both of my cheeks with his hands very lightly and said in a soft voice "I love you"...he then did the same thing to Bhavani. When he was bidding us good-bye he said "you two will now be unstoppable" and his beautiful face smiled like I have never seen him smile before and then he had a huge belly laugh that seems to be welded in my memory.
Once again we wobbled out of the room and had to immediately sit down outside for some time to come back into the body and become somewhat orientated... and once again his Deeksha was transformational. The next day we met with the dasas who are in charge of the five countries we will be working in first and they will arrange with key players in those countries to organize large oneness experience groups for us to facilitate and then initiate the people attending.
So that is part of our experiences concerning our sacred journey. The other thing I want to share is something more important for you I hope. Before going on this trip, Bhavani and I were very concerned about the loss of all the teachers, as you know all of the dasas that left were the teachers before, but after working closely with the new dasas that are now teachers and spending a lot of time with them I must honestly say that nothing was lost as far as the teaching is concerned.
These new teachers have a freshness and a purity about them that somehow seems to go even deeper. The chanting at both homas was just brilliant and the way they preformed and explained each step of the homa was very unique and had a clarity and very powerful effect. The level of their devotion can be felt so strongly... and we made a point to ask all the people in both Level 1 and Level 2 separately how did they rate the teachers and every single person was blown away by what they experienced.
So dear ones if any of you have the same feeling about losing the teachers please relax about that one, the courses are extremely powerful and the energy at the oneness university is indeed more powerful than ever. We will all be experiencing a new beginning in a way, a new phase of this work we are all involved in... and we have to apply ourselves more than ever now. Just being a spectator with the title 'Deeksha giver' does not help at all to make Bhagwan and Amma's vision become a reality... we all have a major part to play, we are all important players in this push for 2012.
Those of you who have completed the Level 2 and want to become trainers, please contact your coordinator and apply as soon as possible... once you become trainers you can begin doing the oneness experience course and initiate more people. Those of you who have not completed the Level 2 and want to help in this push please go and do it and then apply to become a trainer. Each time someone has the right intention to contribute and then applies the right effort, Grace takes over and makes everything happen. If everyone in every country does this it will make an amazingly giant difference in this world we live in. As I have said before.... we are all standing on the edge of a beautiful dream, and if we hold hands and forget about fame or blame and focus on our intention, it will happen just exactly as Bhagwan and Amma envisioned it to be.
May this find all of you in peace and enjoying your precious gift of being.
With love
Buddha & Bhavani
Blue Moon Lunar Eclipse
091231On December 12, 2009, 12:12, our Mother God and the Feminine Aspects of Deity throughout the Universe expanded the portal of Transfiguring Divine Love. Through this expanded portal, the Earth and all her Life are being bathed with higher transformational energies than we have ever experienced. These frequencies of Divine Love will build in momentum daily and hourly until December 12, 2010. During this 12-month cycle, Humanity will have an unparalleled opportunity to release any of the behavior patterns that are preventing us from tangibly manifesting the patterns of perfection for the New Earth. This is a merciful gift of Divine Grace. It is a time for us to focus on our Divine Intentions.
On December 16, 2009, the portal of Transfiguring Divine Love was intensified through a very powerful New Moon. This enhanced the influx of Light that bathed the Earth during the Solstice, December 21, 2009. On December 31, 2009, we will experience a BLUE MOON LUNAR ECLIPSE. The Beings of Light have revealed that this is going to be the most significant New Year we have experienced since our fall from Grace millions of years ago. This is a vitally important time for all of us to empower what we want to cocreate in our individual lives and on this planet. Not only will our hopes, dreams, visions, and Divine Intentions be expanded a thousand times a thousandfold by the Company of Heaven, they will be exponentially expanded by the tremendous influx of Light we will experience on that sacred day.
These gifts of Divine Intervention will expand in power and might until January 14, 2010. On that day, we will experience an incredibly powerful New Moon Solar Eclipse. During the Solar Eclipse, the patterns of perfection we have empowered will be permanently sealed in the highest frequencies of vibration possible. From that moment forth, they will build in momentum daily and hourly. When our visions reach a critical mass, an unstoppable shift will occur that will bring our cocreations into manifestation.
Text Anders B Johansson
Broadcast with Sri Bhagavan to Spain 091216
091224Broadcast with Sri Bhagavan to Spain
Video: http://vimeo.com/8246893
Q1: We have learned that relationship with the parents are very important. My experience tells me that that is the deeper meaning, but very rarely, you mention another kind of relationship that is very important to me: it is the relationship with our children. This relationship can be a source of suffering, sadness, and internal conflict. Can we know more about relationships with our children, especially when they are teenagers, ( ? ) to grow, and have a happier life together in family.
Bhagavan: When we talk about setting right relationships with one's parents, what we really mean to communicate is, if you set right your relationship with your parents, all relationships are automatically set right. Every other relationship is based on this relationship. Not necessarily your biological mother or father, whoever brought you up when you were very young, they are the ones who are guiding you throughout life. That relationship only colors all other relationship. So if you are to have a very good relationship with your mom and dad, whether they are your biological parents, or whoever brought you up, it's automatically set right with everybody else including your children. However, I would like to give you some tips regarding to taking care of children.
Now as far as a child is concerned, everybody must know some basic psychology as to the developments in a child's life - how does a child think, feel and behave who is five years old, ten years old, fifteen, twenty - this knowledge everybody must have, because then a lot of mysteries grow out of that. The child is rebelling, not listening to you, not obeying you, not speaking to you; all of these are biologically controlled.
And if you understand that, half the problem is gone. The other thing is, while dealing with your child, you have to become a child. You have to put yourself in your child's shoes. Think of your days when you were five years old, when you were ten years old, fifteen years old; you would be able to know how to deal with your child.
The other thing is, do not treat a child like a child, and put him down. Treat him as your equal. A child should not be thought of as somebody very small and insignificant. No. You have to treat him as your equal - That is very important. And the other thing is, there is a general rule in India, which has been formed in what we call the (?) stories, which has been the guiding principle in this country for a very long time, and it has helped millions of people across a few thousand years. That is until a child is young, treat him like a king. Until age six, treat him like a king, six to twelve, treat him like a prince, and beyond twelve, treat him as a friend. These are three guidelines, and we strictly follow this, and we have achieved very, very good results.
And more than all that, you must be a good parent, which means: there must not be conflict inside you. There must not be fear inside you. There must not be anxiety inside you. You must be whole. You must not be splintered inside. You must be whole, you must see yourself as you are, you must love yourself as you are, you must accept yourself as you are. This you can do to yourself, then whatever you do will be perfect with the child, and the child will dutifully respond. But if you are not all right inside, try as you might, you are only going through the motions. You are pretending, you're acting - that is not going to get any results. The child will become what is inside you. You cannot fool a child. You have to transform yourself, and then see you could do wonders with the child.
That is the answer to the first question, now I go on to the second question.
Q2: What do you say to the deeksha givers that have passion for the mission of 2012, and want to share blessings, but still feel blocked about it?
Bhagavan: Yes, what I want to make clear, in this Skype programs, I want to help you overcome those blocks. Through meditation, through prayer, through blessings, and through teachings, I am going to systematically clear those blocks, give you more confidence in yourself, and confidence in the blessing. One of the things I would suggest is, to become a powerful blessing giver, you must know certain kinds of fasting, and I would recommend at least a two day fast in a month, which would make you into a powerful blessing giver, and some exercises like pranayama ( or some exercises which) would help you become a powerful blessing giver.
But more important than that, you must learn to talk to the Divine. As you are giving a blessing, you must feel for the person, know his problem, and then talk to the Divine about that. As you keep talking, you will find that the blessing becomes very, very powerful. And in fact sometimes you will even know what the problem is, without the other person talking to you. So this talking to the Divine is the most important thing. I will help you with that, and I am sure in six months time you could become powerful blessing givers, because by 2011 you must have real power in your hands. I'm helping you with it, don't worry.
Q3: You have mentioned a lot of times, it is very important (???)
The question is, could we share the teachings... (unintelligible)
Bhagavan: You are perfectly ready to share whatever you have got. There are no controls, there are no restrictions, everything has been removed. You are totally free. You can share with anybody you like, do whatever you want to do. You've got complete freedom. The only thing we want from you is, help people. That's all. 2012 is coming. We have to speed up now. Please help people. Whatever knowledge you have got, whatever processes you know, please start helping people! No restrictions.
Q4: We have a group of nearly 40 deeksha givers, and have decided to do the trainers course, to go to India. Our question is, is it possible for them to practice internal integrity also as a group?
Bhagavan: Yes, first of all, you are most welcome to come to India and we'll train you to become excellent trainers. We'll go all out and we'll train you. We are waiting to receive you in India. That's the answer to the first part. And regarding practice of inner intent as a group, that is the best way to do it! As I told earlier, this is not going to be achieved through individual effort. It's only collectivity that is going to make it. So it will be ideal to have at least groups of 25, a 45 group is very, very good. More is good. So as groups, if you would work on inner integrity - in other words, you'd work on yourself, and you share it. The other works on himself and he shares it. Collectively you would move much, much fast - much, much faster. So, that's the best thing to do. So please go ahead and do it as a group.
[Following this there was a three-minute meditation.]
Broadcast with Sri Bhagavan to Mexico 091219
091224Broadcast with Sri Bhagavan to Mexico
Video:
Part 1: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=NCmAW-DP2xs
Part 2: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=i_JqvTOpPCU
Q1: The first question Bhagavan, regarding the relationship with my parents. Why is it that sometimes I feel that I have healed a lot there and afterwards situations happen where I realize there is still a lot more to heal, as if I were going backwards instead of forward. What can I do, Bhagavan?
Bhagavan: Life is relationship. It's something which is very alive. We are not dealing with some dead past here. So what we must understand is, when we talk of relationship with your parents, it does not mean that you've done some work on that and that it has been healed. It's not like that. The teachings must be correctly understood.
So what it means is that you have become alive to that problem. The problems are there, but people are not aware of them, people are not alive to them. By this awareness we don't mean simple knowledge. It's like holding a snake in your hands. It's very intense. So that kind of holding, that kind of awareness, we're talking about. When you hold something like that, it heals. It does not mean it's gone forever. It could very well come back, if you lose your level of awareness.
So the more you're in your level of awareness, healing is in place. It's alright. But the moment you slip from awareness, it comes back. It's not that there's been a disease and you've been healed and you're free. It's not like that. It's a living thing. Relationship is a living thing. Life is a living thing. And life is relationship. No relationship, no life. So it is there working all the time. It's coming up, it's dissappearing, it will come back after some time. So it will be bobbing up and down. Like so many personalities are there inside you, each personality takes turns and then comes and stays and then goes away and something else comes.
So if you give away the concept of saying "I am healed".. No, it's not like that. You have to be intensely aware. Even if you are awakened, if at some point of time you lose your awareness, it will come back. The only thing is an awakened person would quickly get back. The awakening will come back, the awareness will come back, and he'll get back to his beautiful state. You could always slip and fall.
Similarly here, you should not assume that all is healed. No. Maybe the charge is reduced a bit, that's all. It would come bouncing back if you're not aware. So you must learn to spend more of your time in greater and greater awareness. Maybe initially it could be for a few minutes, then for a few hours, then for a few days at a stretch. It goes on like that. And then it's almost permanent. It's almost permanent. It's almost permanent, whatever be the problem is not going to trouble you at all. Problems would be there, but they do not trouble you when there's awareness. When there's no awareness, they trouble you.
So you can never say "Yes, I am now healed". Maybe temporarily you feel like that. The charge is gone or something like that. But then again it can come back if there's no awareness.
So that's the answer for the first question. We move on to the second question.
Q2: Bhagavan, it is very difficult for me to let go of my emotions, problems etc. I feel there are things that stay back and accumulate inside. Although, since I took my first course in India, I have become more conscious about my feelings and I allow myself to feel more. I can not experience things completely and then I go into frustration. What can I do, Bhagavan?
Bhagavan: So, we have never told you to let go of your emotions, problems or stop accumulating. Never at all. That is not the teaching. All that we are telling is, please realize, it is the one mind, it is the ancient mind, that is how it was for millions of years and that is how it would be, unless and until the human brain changes. It has always been so.
The other thing is, it's not your mind or my mind or his mind. It's the one human mind. So what we expect you to realize or understand is, that it can not change. That it's impossible to change whatever is there. The impossibility of change must strike you like a ton of bricks. That's what we're talking about. We're not asking you to change things at all. We've been telling you that's what man has been doing for millennia, trying to change. It's like straightening a dog's tail. That cannot be done.
Now if somebody's going on trying to straighten a dog's tail, then he realizes it can not be changed, then he gives up the whole effort. When he gives it up, what is there is peace, there is silence, there is tranquility. That's the absence of conflict.
Similarly, the problem with you is, you hear some teaching, you hear something about an awakened man, you want to become like that and you want to be free of this or you want to have something, you want to change this, and you're lost. That is not what the teaching is saying. The teaching is saying "just be aware of them", that's all. It does not matter what you see or what is going on.
The only thing that we want you to realize is, it can not be changed. You cannot give up those things. And strangely - we do not want to emphasize this because then it again becomes a concept - if you stop trying to change, what is there is peace. What is there is the absence of conflict. What is there is joy. But if you try to say "I'll be free of conflict, I'll have peace, I'll have joy" - you will never have it until doomsday.
It's all a question of giving up. Not deliberately, not through effort. That's why we are saying "effortless effort". If you try giving up and then give up, it is false. It's just tricking you. The mind is tricking you. It must drop like a dry leaf. A dry leaf automatically falls down.
Similarly, all that we want you to see is that it's impossible to change. It's your effort to change which is the problem. A problem does not exist by itself. It is your problem that you want to change that. You want it to be different. You're saying "that is right, this is wrong, it should be this, it should be that". That effort IS the problem. Saying it is wrong, that is the problem. Saying it is right, that is the problem. Saying "I will change it", that is the problem. When you say "I must change jealousy" - that only is jealousy. If there's no such effort, there's no jealousy also. Because there's no "somebody" who's having jealousy. You are equal to jealousy. What is there is jealousy only. But it appears as though you are suffering from jealousy. And then you're trying to be free of it. How can you be free of it? Because you are only jealousy. Not that you are suffering from jealousy. If that were the case, we could do something about it. But that's not the truth. Therefore, it is just there. Why bother about it?
It is just there like the mountains are there, the clouds are there. You can't do anything with the mountains, nor with the clouds. Just watch them. Just watch them, that is all there is to life. Just mere watching. That is what we call awareness. That is what we call awakening. It's not something to achieve. No. Just realizing there's nothing to do.
We'll go into it deeper in later times. Now we move on to the third question.
Q3: The third question, Bhagavan, you tell us that inner integrity is fundamental for spiritual awakening, but when we practise it, we see that we are the same selfish person as ever. Then, how will this practise help us contribute to global awakening? If despite our processes and teachings, we find more and more ugliness. Reality shows us that what we love today is what we betray tomorrow. Then how do we stop this ugliness from affecting our conviction to move forward? How do we make our heart flower instead of withering away?
Bhagavan: It's the same answer as the last question. Please read the last two sentences about ugliness.
Dasaji repeats the following: Reality shows us that what we love today is what we betray tomorrow. Then how do we stop this ugliness from affecting our conviction to move forward? How do we make our heart flower instead of withering away?
Bhagavan: You see, that exactly is the problem. You've already condemned it as ugliness and you're saying it must change. How do you go from here? These are all the wrong questions.
All that we are saying is, it's neither ugliness nor is it beautiful. That is the problem. The mind which is divisive in nature, because mind is nothing but the flow of thought and what is thought? Thought is measurement. What do you do with measurement? You divide. It is dividing it as the ugly and the beautiful. It is saying, "This should not be there. That must happen.", that's where you're caught up. It's exactly what the teaching is telling. Please understand "the content is never important"! Whatever be the content, that is of no consequence. It is not your content or his content. It is the content of the collective consciousness. It is just there.
All that we are telling you is, please don't try to tamper with it. What is inner integrity? Inner integrity is just seeing what is there. Not trying to condemn it as good and bad, right or wrong or giving explanations saying "How should it be in 2012? What should I change? I'm still self-centered. I'm still ugly. I'm still struggling". Who asked you to struggle? Who asked you to change? Not at all.
All that we are telling you is, please see what's going on. It's very alive inside you. From moment to moment, it is changing. It is as alive as the ocean. The waves are coming and going, up and down, new waves, old waves go away. Similarly, thoughts are coming, going away, emotions are coming, they're going away, personalities are emerging, going away. The whole drama of life is taking place inside you. You're nothing but the Universe.
We're just saying, please don't condemn it. Don't try to change it. There is selfishness, yes. It is not your selfishness, it's not his selfishness. It is selfishness. Suffering is not your suffering or his suffering. Suffering is suffering. Whether you have it or he has it. We are all One. It is just there with us for millions of years and it will be so until the brain changes. So, you are selfish, yes, that's the truth. You are rubbish pits and septic tanks. It's not that you are a rubbish pit or somebody's a septic, it's what we have in the collective consciousness. It is there. We have gathered this over millions of years. There's nothing we can do about it.
I'm not asking you to become saints. Not at all! I want you to become sages. Who's a sage? Who doesn't think of right and wrong. He just responds to life, that's all. He could be violent one moment, he could be peaceful another moment. He could help you one moment, he may not help you another moment. He's just responding to situations as they arise. This is perfect action. You can not call it good action or bad action or right or wrong. He just responds. And he does not go back and think "whether I did the right thing or wrong thing?". He keeps responding. He's just seeing what's going on. The content is not important for him.
So, please, just look at your ugliness and then soon you'll stop calling it ugly. It could look very beautiful also. What looks beautiful could also look ugly. Therefore, you must take a neutral stand. Not that you take a neutral stand, it must become neutral. Not that you behave like an enlightened person. No. You have to be enlightened. Not that you behave like an awakened person and you put an effort. If you do that, you will never get there. The problem with you is, you attend a Level 1, a Level 2, this and that, and then all of that becomes concepts. And then you want to get "there", you want to achieve that and then you're doomed.
There's nothing to achieve. Nowhere to go. Everything is perfect. See things are perfect. And what would help you? Inner integrity. As you go deeper and deeper, it becomes easier and easier. And it becomes very enjoyable because conflict ceases. Because inner integrity means just seeing what is there. You don't lie to yourself. It's OK to lie to somebody. But the problem is you're often lying to yourself. Non-stop lying is going on to yourself. Because you do not want to see what is there because you think it's ugly. Who said it's ugly? Some teacher? Some scripture? Well, you have nothing to do with it. It's just there. That's all. That is the truth. How can you play with truth? You can not tamper with truth. The truth is that. Yes, you are selfish. But why do you call it selfish, why do you name it selfish, why do you say it's bad? It's just there and you're not in control.
So, if you go deeper, it all becomes natural, it all becomes automatic. There's no need to change. What happens then? Please do it and see. If I tell you something, you will again make it into a concept. Just do it. It's not difficult. Start with your breath and go inside and just see what's going on. Don't bring in any scripture or any teaching. Not even my teaching. Just see what is going on, that's all. You are the teacher. And the teaching is yourself. It's there right inside you, the teaching. That is the real teaching. What's going on. Nothing more.
So, if I give you a teaching and you make it a concept, you're not going to go anywhere. I'm just giving you some help, that's all. Teachings must come from inside, from your observation, from what you see. Then you must speak it out. Then you'll see it has got power.
So, more clarifications I think you can get from Cristobal. He can help you out with it, because he has had long sessions with me, so he'll be able to explain it clearly.
So shall we now move into meditation?
*The audio from Mexico can not be heard in this video*
Bhagavan: Love you all so much..
Bhagavan: Oh yes, oh yes. I'll do that. I'll give them a powerful deeksha, while we go into meditation. Yes..
*Meditation*
Shanti, shanti, shanti..
Bhagavan: Love you all! Namaste! Thank you! Thank you so much!
Broadcast with Sri Bhagavan to Stockholm, Sweden 091220
091222Broadcast with Sri Bhagavan to Stockholm, Sweden
Video: http://vimeo.com/8310458
Q1: There is so much pain and sorrow surfacing in me right now, that my daily life is becoming very difficult to manage. And at the same time it takes so much more effort now to dissolve the pain by experiencing it, compared to a year ago after my Level 1 course. How can I make the act of dissolving the pain by experiencing it easier, more effective and more powerful?
Bhagavan: In Oneness, you've got to remember, that only up to a point there could be effort. If effort continues, then nothing would happen. Things must happen automatically, they must become effortless. Experiencing suffering is an effortless act. If you apply effort, you will not be able to do it at all. Effort is only slightly becoming aware, "yes I have this pain" and maybe bringing in some teaching. That's why I often give an example of a snake in the room and you are very scared. And then you go out and get a torchlight, going out and getting a torch is the effort, and then putting on the switch is the effort. Once the light comes out of the torch, you see it's only a rope and not a snake. So it does not take time, energy or effort. The fear is just gone.
So in all of oneness activities, only up to a point there is effort. Beyond that it must become effortless. Now, how does it become effortless? That is where Grace comes in, your connection with the Divine, without which you can not do it. So up to a point it's OK. You try and you put in some effort. And then there comes a point when you realize, nothing is happening. You're trying to experience suffering, nothing is happening. You're trying to stay with it, nothing is happening. That is the point when we say, you've got to surrender. Surrender is not something very cheap or something slavish. You just realize you cannot do anything. When you can not do anything, what do you do? You've got to seek help. So you must have a connection with the Divine. So take a blessing or invoke the Divine, and then you'll see what happens. It just begins to happen. It has to be effortless. If there's effort, it is not oneness. And it naturally happens if you invoke the Divine or if you can not do it, ask some powerful blessing giver to give you a blessing. It will start off. That's why the blessing is so important. Without the blessing you can not get there. Because your trying is what is destroying it.
When you try to experience, you can not experience. It's just not possible. So, you try and you fail, that's when you hand over. Then you'll see it happens very beautifully. And once it starts happening it gives you such joy and powered by joy it goes on automatically. It becomes a habit after some time. But at least initially, you'll need the help of the Divine or the blessing.
So that's the answer for the first question. We move on to the second question.
Q2: I have been trying to set right my relationship with my father for several
years now, yet I still think he is an idiot. One part of me does not seem to
like him or want to have anything do with him, at the same time another part
of me feels guilty about this and bad for giving him more pain than he is
already carrying and this part feels compassion for him, which I'm not able
to express in his Presence. Please help.
Bhagavan: Now as I'm talking to you, taking on your questions or telling you certain things, or we're going to meditate together or I'm going to give a blessing; all this is Level 3. Now in Level 3, I would be giving you more clarity on teachings which have been taught to you already. Because very often after a level 1 and a level 2, you go home with a lot of wrong concepts and that has to be corrected. So I'll be trying to give you a clear understanding of the teachings, that is level 3, and also give you new teachings as we go along, once the foundation has been layed.
Now let us look at this question. Please repeat the question again.
OK. So, now if you look into this question you can get a clear understanding that whoever asked this question has really not understood oneness. Now for example, he calls his father an idiot and he wants that to be changed. That is not oneness. And then he's struggling to be compassionate to his father. That is not oneness. What exactly is the oneness teaching? Now, he thinks his father is an idiot. Oneness does not say change your opinion about your father or do something about it, none of these things. Oneness does not say "change", because oneness says "change is impossible". The fundamental teaching is "when the impossibility of change strikes you, like a ton of bricks, then something happens". What you must realize is, "Look, I'm not able to change my opinion about my father. This is what I think of my father, that he's an idiot". So all that you could do is, become intensely aware of what's going on inside, namely, you think your father is an idiot. That's all there is to oneness.
Like a snake which is focused on the prey, this is not indifference, but be fully focused on what is happening inside. You're thinking he's an idiot, that's all there is to it. Out of that intensity, that awareness, there arises action, about which we won't talk. There's no need to talk about that, because that again becomes a concept. You just act. You can not call it right action, you can not call it wrong action, you can not call it good action, you can not call it bad action. It is just action. If just being action, it is perfect, no matter what the consequences are. It's just action.
You don't go back and say "I should've behaved like this, I should've behaved like that", no. Now what's happening is there's a reaction. A lot of psychology has got in, a lot of philosophy has got in, oneness teachings which has been understood differently has got in and now you're trying to act from that, which is no action at all. You must act from the intensity of awareness. In your case it is, you think your father is an idiot. That's the only truth. How could you change the truth? We're not asking you to change the truth at all. That is the truth for you at that moment. You think he's an idiot. That's all. Be intensely aware of it. Not being indifferent, but be very, very clear. Just be focused on it and see what happens.
The same thing, you're trying to be compassionate to him, there's a conflict inside. So all that you must become aware of is that conflict. You're trying to be compassionate. You're not really compassionate, you're trying to be compassionate. You feel a little sorry for your father and there's a conflict. Become aware of all these things, that little compassion, feeling sorry for your father and having a conflict. That is the content of the mind at that moment of time. The mind is like a river. It's flowing all the time, it is changing every moment. Different personalities are emerging, they're arising and they're ceasing. There's emotions that arise and they cease. It's like a vast ocean where the waves are coming up and going down. Simply happening all the time.
You can't control it, you can not contain it. Something which is living, which is dynamic, how can it be controlled or contained? You can only be aware of it, you can be alive to it. If you're aware and alive, then things happen naturally. You don't need a moral code, you don't need an ethical code, you don't need some scripture to guide you. Nothing is required. You don't need a book on philosophy or psychology, nothing. Simply action arises. That is the book you've got to read. The most important book is the book of your own life. What is going on there. That's the most interesting story you could ever hope to hear. It will be just fascinating and as you read that book there is joy, there is bliss. Everything starts coming to you.
So the content of your mind, the most terrible things - even to use the word terrible is wrong. If you say it's terrible, it's bad, it's good, then there's no more awareness. You're judging it already. And when you start judging, the mind is at full play, because the mind is nothing but the flow of thought. Thought, being measurement, is all the time comparing and then there's no awareness at all. When only comparison stops, when measurement stops, there is awareness. And awareness is the first step and the last step.
There's nowhere to go. Awareness is not going to take you anywhere. Please understand that. Awareness is the be all and the end all. Just to be aware is to be awakened. You should not think you will become aware and then you're going to reach somewhere. That is not oneness. You should not think "Oh, I now got a tool called awareness, I will use it and I'll become this, I'll become that". There's nothing to become. All that is possible is sheer awareness. If you are aware you are in heaven, that's all. We need not describe it.
It's the first step, it's the last step. There's nowhere to go. You should not think "Oh, it's the first step, therefore I'm going to land up somewhere". No. First step is the last step. Finished, it's over! There's nothing else to life than just being aware. It can be awareness about the tree there, or about the bird there, or about your wife nagging, or seeing what's inside. There's no difference at all. If you could be aware of your wife nagging you, or your husband nagging you, whatever the case might be, it's the same thing as listening to a bird or the flowing water.
There's no difference at all. It's sheer joy. It's all over. Whereas you're trying to get somewhere. The teachings are being applied, you're trying to make use of it, you're trying to get somewhere. There's nowhere to go! How long is this going to go on? Trying to get somewhere? The content is never, ever important. It can be anything. Are you just aware of it? That's all that matters. And there you would need the blessing. You certainly need Divine help, at least in the initial stages, to become aware. Thereafter it becomes quite easy and then the Presence starts moving in. And once the Presence is there, there's only awareness, that's all.
The Presence is awareness. As you get closer and closer to the actual event which is happening inside you and awareness increases, the Presence also would increase, that is the Divine. And there comes a point when the Presence is fully there. Awareness is full. The Presence is full. And with that, it's all over. At that point you can say, "I am God", because you become the Presence. So, awareness means, something is happening there and you're getting closer and closer and closer. At the first level, it is contemplation. At a deeper level, it is meditation. At the final stages, it becomes greater and greater awareness. When awareness is total, the Presence is total, you are One with God.
So, we'll go into greater depths in future Skypes. So now we move on to the third question.
Q3: When can all we blessing givers come to India to meditate in the temple and deepen our process and what can we do to help you in your intention?
Yes, you could start coming from February, because in the month of January, we'll be having huge crowds here. But if we still find that we're in a position to invite you, we'll send you an invitation and you could start coming in January. But as of now, it looks like February. You're all free to come and meditate in the temple. Because the temple here or the World Oneness Center is intended to alter our planetary energies. One is, the building itself would do that, plus when people meditate there we'll be helping the process a lot. So, you're most welcome to come here. That's one thing.
What I would want from you is, quickly we must produce a lot more trainers. A LOT more trainers must be produced, who in turn would produce a lot more blessing givers, because only then we can make 2012 possible. We need large numbers of people because unfortunately we have lost some very valuable time, and recent events in the movement has shaken the faith of people. It's very, very difficult to build up faith. The faith has been shaken because of the events. So, we have to make up for lost time. It's a very unfortunate thing.
So, for example, I consider 2012 itself to be a phenomenon, not only our movement is the phenomenon, but the entire 2012 itself is a phenomenon. There are a lot of movements working for that and unfortunately some of the movements have perished. Because of very similar events, they have died a premature death and some have become weak.
Now this has happened to our movement. Wherever there's a front, there's a back, wherever there's a high, there's a low. So whenever you try to create order, disorder also automatically emerges. It's nobody's fault. It very naturally happens. But somehow we have to tie out the crisis. Unfortunately it has come this way and it is in fact shaking the faith of people. So we are losing valuable time. So, our only way to counter that is, in the next two years we'll produce a lot more trainers and a lot more blessing givers. That's the way to counter that.
So I hope all of us could work together. It's not just me working or someone's working, all of us have to work together. It has to be a massive human effort if 2012 to be possible and I hope we can all cooperate and work together very, very fast. I would request you to become trainers as quickly as possible and start producing as many blessing givers as you could possibly, so we'll be ready by the end of 2011. By the end of 2011 itself we'll be able to see things start happening, that will give us the confidence. And in 2012 we should be ready. Because we should start right from January itself, and in the month of December we'll be fully active all 31 days.
I can tell you one thing, that 2012 is not a figment of some imagination or some hallucination. We do work with special groups in India, when you come to India you can see 2012 is happening. People are becoming awakened in something like 6 hours. And the actual turning point is less than 3 minutes. The great buddhist teacher Padmasambhava who brought Buddhism from India to Tibet, he said "when the iron birds fly in the air, man will be awakened in less than 3 minutes". We see it actually happening. When you come here, when you go to India, we'll actually show you. You can see for yourself how this is happening. So 2012 has begun. Only thing is we should build up the requisite numbers by 2012. And I'm sure that we're all going to cooperate and make it happen.
So the three questions I think have been answered, so now shall we go into meditation for three minutes?
Sweden: Yes Bhagavan.
Bhagavan: Yes, so thank you so much. Next time we'll be going for deeper and longer meditations as we prepare ourselves. So we now move on to meditation now.
*Meditation*
Shanti, shanti, shanti..
Bhagavan: Love you all! Love you!
Sweden: We love you so much Bhagavan!
Bhagavan: Namaste, namaste! Thank you so much, thank you!
Sweden: Namaste! Thank you so much Bhagavan!
Bhagavan: Thank you, thank you!
Sweden: Love you so much Bhagavan!
Teleconference with Sri Bhagavan to North Amerika 091220
091221Teleconference with Sri Bhagavan to North America
December 20, 2009
Doug Bentley was facilitating the call.
Namaste Bhagavan
Namaste.
Starting with this month, there is almost 600 new Blessing Givers throughout North America and Canada. The Oneness Trainers have been doing a phenomenal amount of work creating new blessing givers, Bhagavan. At the request of the trainers, we'd like to read the list of new blessing givers by state.
Arizona 57, Canada 36, California 94, Colorado 3, Washington DC 26, Florida 57, Idaho 47, Massachusetts 20, Montana 3, North Caroliina 34, Ohio 20, Nevada 1, Oregon 6, Texas 32, Vermont 7, Washington 21.
Please give blessings to new blessing givers. A lot of them will be on the line tonight.
Bhagavan: I'll give them all a strong blessing.
Q1: Could you please offer more clarity about the shift that will occur in 2012 and how our work with the Oneness Blessing is helping make that shift. What will take place? What will our experiences be? And How will the rapid changes in our movement help facilitate that.
2012. There is first going to be an energy shift. We call this Pranic energy. In fact the temple has been built here called the World Oneness Center to affect these planetary energies. In fact in ancient times the pyramids were built across the world to affect these planetary energies. Objects like Stonehenge and other ancient objects were built specifically meant for the altering of planetary energies. Similarly, the World Oneness Center or what we sometimes call the Oneness Temple has been created to affect these planetary energies. The first shift will be in planetary energies.
Following that will be a rising in the levels of consciousness. Peoples' consciousness will reach to higher levels. This will mean actually what we call the kundalini rising up in the human body. That will be higher levels of consciousness. That will result in a change of perception. These changes essentially will surround the fact that you'll start losing the sense of separation. For some people it could be merely feeling connected. For other people, it could be you'll actually feel you are the other. There will be varying degrees of change with regard to the sense of separation.
For some it could be mild. What I call mild is to feel connected. For some it could be that great that you would feel that you are no different from the other. It could go to that extent. It could be so deep that when someone is physically affected--A physical thing could affect you physically. It can go to that extent.
Besides this, there will also be people experiencing higher states of consciousness, like some could experience Christ consciousness, Buddha consciousness or Krishna consciousness or any kind of consciousness they've been seeking or they have been conditioned from early childhood. That would be a change of consciousness.
There are also others who will discover oneness with the physical earth also. They will feel very, very close to the earth There will be a variety of changes That's why we're not telling sameness. We're saying oneness. People will be having very different experiences. 6 billion or 7 billion on the planet, it could be That many experiences and that many states of consciousness.
What is going to be strange is that despite the differences in experience and the state, all will feel one. You would expect people to differ, quarrel, disagree or to fight. That will not happen. A Christian with his experience and a Muslim with their experience will strangely become very, very close. We'll be moving in that direction. I will say that the experience of each one will be unique. Any two people will not have the same experience. Nature or what you call God does not duplicate. Each one is special and each one is unique. That is what is going to happen.
The common denominator is going to be that we going to work as if we're one being. That is what is likely to happen and that is what will have its own consequences in the external world. When I'm talking about the Oneness age, I'm talking about what is going to happen in the inner world. When I talk of the Golden Age, I'm talking about what will happen in the external world.
The Inner changes will happen first and that will lead to certain external changes. People will be sharing whatever they got with each other, they will be more careful about the environment. they will be more kind and protective with the animals. All this will be happening in the external world as a consequence of the changes in the inner world. So, we can expect these things to happen probably sometime towards the end of 2011. We'll probably get a few samples in early October and November, December of 2011. It will go full speed from January, 2012 and by December 2012 we will be able to see a lot for ourselves. This in short will be the changes that will be happening.
Along with that we will also expect environmental changes as human consciousness changes. We might be able to sort out some of the environmental issues too. On the one hand, we have to move on the physical front and with the inner change also will bring about environmental changes.
Besides that, our thought structures also will start melting down. The thought structures which have been built up for thousands of years. The will sort of be breaking down. In other words, you will not be troubled so much by thought, negative thoughts and emotions. They too will start slowly decreasing. One should not think it's all over in 2012. It keeps growing and there's no end to that growth. So we can be evolving more and more and more. That is not so important for us. What's important is that we bring about these changes in 20112. We cannot take it for granted.
We have got to work for it. The energies are there, but we have to make use of the energies to bring about the shift. If we just sit idle thinking "Okay there may be some change there is no problem, there is nothing more for me to do." Nothing is going to happen. We have got to make use of that. This is where the blessing givers come in. What we need urgently is lots more trainers, a huge number more of trainers and we have to produce huge numbers of blessing givers.
The blessing givers' main role is by helping others is to raise their levels of consciousness. Because blessing givers have to give blessings to each other in the year 2012. You have to form groups, I suggest a minimum group of 25 people. Ideal to have 50 or even 100 and in some cases you may have as many as 300 if they can be cooperative. Now, what we have to do in the year 2012, is you have to form some kind of mandala formation and we'll teach you how to give blessings to each other. Here's the situation where a blessing giver gives a blessing to another blessing giver. It is going on between them.
These groups will begin to move to another level. When you do that, something very strange is going to happen. It is not something we are speculating or we are going to try out. We've tried all these things and it works very beautifully. Everything is ready. Not only that, in 2012 is not something in your imagination or something we are ?? about. We have some special groups in India. Probably when you come to India, we can take you and show you what's happening. Actually, people are moving into 2012. It's happening right now. We find that It happens between 6 hours or 3 days. It's that fast. We hope that you could watch it, and learn something and it's possible you could use at home. Here, we actually notice that the moment of transition is less than 3 minutes. What the ancient teacher called ?? India into Ancient Tibet. He had made the remark, that when the iron birds fly in the air. man would make it in less than 3 minutes. The iron birds have been flying now for quite some time. We think possibly the time has come. Because we are actually seeing this happen. That is what we have all this the confidence.
The question is doing for a small group is one thing, and doing for entire planet is something totally different. This requires LARGE numbers of blessing givers, especially now since we have lost very valuable time. While Oneness is a phenomenon, we also believe that 2012 is itself a phenomenon and a lot of people are working for 2012. It's not just our phenomenon, there are other phenomenon going on also. The sad thing is that many of them have died already. They died a year after inception - some after 2 years, 3 years, some after10 years.
As these things happened, also, the opposite was produced. Like, you have the front, you have the back, you have the top, you have the bottom. So whenever we move in one direction, like matter and anti-matter, the moment you try to bring about order, disorder too is simultaneously created. If the disorder is not much, then of course we can have a higher order. If the disorder crosses a point, then it could become very dangerous and the whole thing could be revert back to disorder.
Now, we have a situation here, most of you know the recent crisis in the Movement. There is a certain amount of disorder and if the disorder continues to grow, basically its function will be to destroy faith. Faith in 2012, faith in the divine, and faith in the blessing. If that happens, we could still lose out. The possibility is there. I have seen many such movements do so in the last twenty years or so. That's why the only way is that order should grow faster than disorder which means more trainers and more blessing givers.
In fact, I've been wanting this to happen for all these years. But it could not happen. But now I see it is beginning to happen. But, this could be our last chance. So, I'm so happy to hear these figures about how the blessing givers have grown in numbers the last few weeks. If we continue in this way, I think we'll have enough Oneness ??. America is a big country and we need a huge number of trainers and vast numbers of blessing givers. If we keep up this pace, I think we should be ready by 2012.
The crucial role is going to be played by the blessing givers and of course the trainers have got to produce them. And that blessing is nothing but the divine working through you. Unless there is divine intervention, we cannot get there. It's next to impossible. Because it involves lots of transformation that only the Divine could bring about. Unless you open up to the divine for 2010 and 2011. We'll be speaking more to you and we'll be guiding you more in order to open up more connections at a deeper contact with the divine. If the divine comes through the blessing is going to bring about the changes in all the blessing givers which in turn will bring about the change in human consciousness. It's actually the work of the divine. We're just helping out. You're probably some kind of a catalyst. The divine has to make use of these energies to bring about this change. We just have to help out. So that is in brief the answer to the first question.
Q2: Not a question but many of the blessing givers would like to ask you to to give them what you feel is best in a teaching for this month to deepen their state and help them grow in whatever way.
I spoke with Mexico yesterday and Sweden and Italy today. What I notice was there seems to be a misunderstanding about the teachings. They have gone through Level 1 and Level 2. From the way they're asking the questions, I could clearly see they've misunderstood the teachings. Now the oneness teaching is actually a very, very simple teaching.
What you need to understand is that If it sounds complex, there is some misunderstanding about the teaching. And then if you understand that you have to put in some effort, then again, you have misunderstood the teaching. By saying no effort, we do not mean indifference at all. This should not be mistaken for indifference.
Let us see what is it we are saying. Basically we could put the entire oneness teaching into one word, That is AWARENESS. So, very often we are getting questions like saying, "Look I know I have ugliness, I have jealousy, I have no love, I have anger, I have violence and I am trying to experience suffering and now it's not happening and when is it I'm going to change and I find that I am helpless."
So we get these kind of questions. What is most important to understand in oneness is the content of your mind is NOT AT ALL important. It could be anything. It could be violence, non-violence, anger, hatred, jealousy frustration, fear, what not. All that whole range of thoughts, feelings and emotions. We're just not concerned about them. Because we are not trying to change at all. There is no effort to change because we cannot change. We cannot change because these are the properties of the human mind which is very ancient and there is only one mind.
What is it we're trying to do? What is this change we're talking about? On the one hand, we say no change and on the other hand, we still do seem to talk about some sort of change. All that we are talking about is please become intensely aware of what is going on. That's all. There is nothing else you could do. There is nothing else you should do. That is why we're talking about it as effortless effort.
The only effort is slightly becoming aware of what is going on and then saying. "Okay. Let me become aware." That's all.
Then, as you try to become aware, you will realize it's next to impossible. It's that difficult to start with. That's when you throw in the towel and say "Oh my God it is not possible." That is the time, we say, you better surrender. This surrender is not some kind of slavish surrender. It's just the realization that you cannot do anything and nothing is happening. It's then that you invoke the divine through a blessing. Then the blessing will take you where you should go. And where do you go? You go nowhere because there is nowhere to go in the first place. You only become more and more aware of what is going on.
And the teaching says that first step, the last step. This does not mean that after you have taken the first step, you are going to go somewhere. You are not going to go anywhere at all for the simple reason there is nowhere to go. So what's the first step? The first step is awareness. What's the last step? Awareness. So what is there? There is only awareness. Awareness is the be all and end all of all things. Please understand that awareness is not going to take you anywhere. It is not going to free you of jealousy. Understand that awareness is not going to free you from anger. It's not going to make you into a saint. No, not at all Awareness will only be giving you freedom with jealousy, Freedom with anger, freedom with hatred. You will stop tampering with them and you will stop trying to change them. What is in the beginning is awareness. What is in the middle is awareness. What is in the end is awareness. When you are aware, you are fully awake, When you are awake, you are living and no more existing.
Right now you are in the state of day dreaming. All the while, you are caught up in this conflict the thought is producing. You are somewhere and you're trying to get somewhere. That is the movement of thought. You are engaged in this and you are caught up in that. That is why you do not live, but you are merely existing. This is the situation which is going to change in the year 2012. Even before that it is going to happen to lots of people if you correctly understand the teachings.
So I'll repeat, you are not going anywhere. You are not going to change anything. There is nothing you can change. All that we're expecting from you is please become intensely aware of what is going on. It's a beautiful movie that you could enjoy. There is no better movie than that. And no better book you can read than that. You cannot read it as long as there is no awareness. To be aware is all there is. To be aware is to have the presence in you. As your awareness deepens, the presence deepens. And there comes a point when you are so intensely aware that the presence is almost completely there. The presence is what you call God. At that point you become God. You and the presence are totally one. You, the awareness and the presence will all completely become one. That's when you see for yourself that you are God. We are trying to get there.
So, I hope that from this moment onwards, you will just see what is going on. Don't try to do anything to it. There is nothing you can do to it. It's just there. That is the truth. That is inner integrity. That is being authentic. Don't be indifferent to It, please, but be intensely aware of it. That's all you have to do. That is the oneness teaching. That's the most fundamental teaching. Other teachings are mainly supportive of it. Like saying the first step is like the last step. Experience it. When you try to experience it, there is no experiencing at all. When you're aware, experience is automatically taking place. You are experiencing reality as it is. What we are merely trying to describe, but then you try to put an effort, "Okay, I must now experience suffering. All right, I must experience reality is at is. All right I'll be a better human being." There is no such thing as a better human being or a lower human being.
Out of this awareness action arises spontaneously. That is what we call action. Everything else you may call action, but it is merely activity. This action -- some may call it who are not awakened good action and some may call it bad action, right action or wrong action. For someone who is awakened, it is just action. For him, it is perfect action. This arises from complete awareness.
I would like you to start contemplating on what I have just now spoken for the following month and let us see what your experiences are. From that, I'll start proceeding further. These interactions with you is what we call Level 3. I'll give you more clarification after the teachings. I'll give you some deeper insights, the power to give you a blessing. I will meditate with you, I will take on your questions. All this comes with Level 3. And level 3 you can attend or come to level 2, or you could come to level 1, or merely the Oneness Experience course, or even for a new person if you are invited, you are most welcome to come. Others can go back to Level 2 or to Level 1 or Oneness Experience to get a better understanding. But all are welcome for this.
That is the message I would like to communicate to you after hearing the questions from Mexico, Sweden, and Italy. I thought this was very important to communicate with you.
Broadcast to Dubai 091211
091219*The skype call begins with the Dubai audience doing aarthi, singing the moola mantra and bhajans while Bhagavan is sitting with eyes closed.*
Dubai audience: Pranams Bhagavan!
Bhagavan blesses them: Love you all!
Dubai audience shouts: Looooove you!! We love you so much Bhagavan!
Bhagavan: Love you too. Shall we start with the questions?
Dubai audience: Yes, Bhagavan. We’ll ask the spiritual questions first Bhagavan.
Bhagavan: OK.
Q1: Bhagavan, we want to know, between now and december 2012, to help the oneness movement and the mission, what do we need to do as individuals, as families, as sevaks and as a community?
Bhagavan: As individuals, you must become deekshagivers, because 2012 is all about giving deekshas. We would be forming groups of devotees, like the group now in this hall, and what you would have to do is, in the year 2012 starting in January, we will teach you a special technique whereby you’ll be giving deekshas to each other.
Now this could be 4 times in the month of January, maybe 5 or 6 times in February, until December 2012. In the month of December 2012, it has to be everyday. So we want committed groups of people who will be able to come and spend some time everyday in the month of December 2012. That’s when the transition is going to take place. And as you give these blessings to each other, the deekshas to each other, I will also be joining you in the Skype. I will be meditating along with you and I will also be giving you deeksha collectively.
The result would be, you would be moving into very high states of consciousness and as that happens, we will be influencing the world. For example, as you go into those high states, if you have a map of UAE (United Arab Emirates) in front of you and ultimately when you give the deeksha to the map, strangely the people of UAE will receive a very powerful blessing and their level of consciousness will be altered. *loud applause from Dubai*
All this is possible the month of December 2012, for the simple reason, the three great cycles are coinciding. We have a 5000 year old cycle which started at the end of the Mahabharata war. That cycle would be closing in the year 2012. We also have a 26 400 year cycle which begins with yugas. All the yugas happened in that timeframe. That cycle also is closing in the year 2012. And then we have a 650 000 year cycle, the most massive cycle, that also is closing in the year 2012. So it’s a very rare phenomenon that these three cycles are closing in the year 2012.
Not only that, 2012, according to revelations and according to certain other calculations, very ancient, is the midpoint of the Universe. This Universe began from a small, infinite, resemblant thought. That was the beginning of this Universe, much smaller than even an individual electron. So small was the Universe in the beginning and that has now grown to this stage. The Universe is now middleaged and it’s lifetime now is another 13.7 billion years as the cycle closes. That is supposed to be one day for Brahma and thousand days for Brahma is equal to one day for Vishnu and thousands days of Vishnu is equal to one day of Shiva and thousands days of Shiva is equal to one day of Shakthi.
Now we are going to enter the midpoint of Brahma’s day. Now what is understood by this is, the Universe which was a single, little, infinitely small thought has grown up to this size. The One has become the many. Not that it has become the many, it appears as the many, and this beautiful creation has moved to this point. It’s like building a home and then you do a grahapravesham and you enter the home. So this is like grahapravesham for the whole of humanity in the year 2012 and then we are going to enter a totally new age. So all this work is about entering this new age.
Now when this new age comes, what happens is, there’s a change in pranic energies, which is what is responsible for a change in human consciousness, which is responsible for change in human perception, which is responsible for the way humans experience reality. Reality would remain the same, but the way we experience reality would be vastly different. When you experience it differently, you will discover Heaven on Earth. That is what is going to happen.
But then, you wait for the rains, when the rains do come, you can not keep quiet, you have to plough the soil to sow the seeds, do all things. So this is like the rains coming in. The new age coming and the energies coming. But then, we have to work for it. Without working, you’re not going to get anywhere. And what is the work? We must raise our levels to higher states of consciousness and it is possible because of these energy changes. And how do we do it? We must become powerful blessing givers. That’s the way to do it.
Now, how to produce blessing givers? It’s not possible for everybody to come to a level 1 or level 2 to India or anywhere and become blessing givers. Therefore, we intend to produce trainers in every country of the world. They are already in other countries and they have started functioning with extraordinarly good results flowing in from December 3rd. Tremendous things are happening now in many, many places. It has started already.
Now, for example, in Dubai we would like to have trainers. And who would be those trainers? Those who are now conducting satsangs, they would become the trainers. We would be training them, in order that they go back and conduct courses in UAE itself. For example, we would first start with what is called Oneness Experience Level 1, that would be the course you conduct. That would be followed by Oneness Experience Level 2, which would be equal to the Level 1 which you are now conducting. And that will be followed by Oneness Experience Level 3, which is the current Level 2.
So all these things would be conducted in UAE itself by the trainers there, whom will be selected from the people who are conducting satsang centers. So then, you will yourself initiate people into becoming blessing givers, so we can have thousands of people who are blessing givers. We need a lot of people to become blessing givers because time is running out. For various reasons, we have lost very, very valuable time and we have to now run faster now to be on time. All this is possible only if it is decentralized and decontrolled. This phenomenon has to be highly decentralized.
When it began in 1989 as a small little baby, it had complete flexibility and zero control. As control increased and flexibility declined, the power got red